2012 Chevy Corvette Owners Manual

Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Performance and Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Keys, Doors, and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-62


2012 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-18 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-19
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Vehicle Data Recording and
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Special Application OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Conversions and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 OnStar Additional
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Recommended Fluids, Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44


Introduction iii

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
and vehicle body designs appearing the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo, substitute the name “General
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
Emblem, CORVETTE, CORVETTE Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
GRAND SPORT, Z06, and ZR1 Detroit, MI 48207
it appears in this manual.
are trademarks and/or service 1-800-551-4123
marks of General Motors LLC, its Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. quick reference. française
www.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20905002 B Second Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this Manual Symbols
{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual
the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is
hazard that could result in injury a safety symbol which means
or death. “Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control : : Oil Pressure
Here are some additional symbols B : Engine Coolant Temperature } : Power
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more O : Exterior Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
information on the symbol, refer to # : Fog Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders
the Index.
. : Fuel Gauge 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
9 : Airbag Readiness Light + : Fuses d : Traction Control/Active
# : Air Conditioning 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Handling System
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer M: Windshield Washer Fluid
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
®
j: LATCH System Child
or OnStar Restraints
$ : Brake System Warning Light *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
" : Charging System


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
1-14
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22
Instrument Panel Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Z06, Z16, and ZR1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Vehicle Features Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-24
Initial Drive Information Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Driving for Better Fuel
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Roadside Assistance
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Driver Information
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Passenger Sensing Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6. I. Hazard Warning Flashers on Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
B. Head-Up Display Controls page 6‑4. page 5‑2.
(If Equipped). See Head-Up J. Infotainment on page 7‑1. R. Horn on page 5‑4.
Display (HUD) on page 5‑31. K. Dual Automatic Climate Control S. Telescopic Steering Column
C. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. System on page 8‑1. Control (If Equipped).
See Turn and Lane-Change L. Fuel Door Release Button. See Steering Wheel Adjustment
Signals on page 6‑4. See Filling the Tank on on page 5‑2.
Cruise Control on page 9‑45. page 9‑51. T. Keyless Ignition. See Ignition
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. Hatch/Trunk Release Button. Positions on page 9‑20.

Exterior Lamp Controls on See “Hatch/Trunk Lid Release” U. Heated Front Seats on page 3‑8
page 6‑1. under Hatch on page 2‑11. (If Equipped).

D. Manual Shift Paddles M. Instrument Panel Illumination V. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown).
(If Equipped). See Automatic Control on page 6‑6. See Automatic Transmission on
Transmission on page 9‑27. N. Power Folding Top Switch page 9‑27 or Manual
(If Equipped). See Convertible Transmission on page 9‑32.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑26. Top on page 2‑24. W. Active Handling System on
O. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 9‑38.
F. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
(Out of View). See Malfunction X. Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
G. Windshield Wiper/Washer on Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
page 5‑4. Y. Selective Ride Control on
P. Bluetooth Controls page 9‑43 (If Equipped).
H. Driver Information Center (DIC) (If Equipped). See Bluetooth on
Buttons. See Driver Information Z. Parking Brake on page 9‑36.
page 7‑16.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑26.
Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 (If Equipped).


1-4 In Brief

Initial Drive Remote Keyless Entry K : Press to unlock the driver door.
(RKE) System Press again within five seconds to
Information unlock both doors.
The RKE transmitter is used to lock
This section provides a brief
and unlock the doors from up to Q : Press to lock all doors.
overview about some of the
important features that may or may 30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle. } : Press and hold for
not be on your specific vehicle. approximately one second to open
the hatch/trunk.
For more detailed information,
refer to each of the features which L : Press to sound the horn.
can be found later in this owner Press any other button on the
manual. RKE transmitter to stop it.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.

Press the button (A) to remove the
key. The key can be used to lock
and unlock the glove box and to
open the hatch/trunk lid if power to
the vehicle is lost. See Hatch on
page 2‑11 for more information.


In Brief 1-5

Door Locks With the RKE transmitter within Loss of Vehicle Electrical
range, grip the door handle Power
From the outside, press Q or K on sensor (A). See Remote Keyless
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Entry (RKE) System Operation on If the vehicle has lost battery power,
transmitter. page 2‑3. the driver door can be opened
manually.
From the inside, use the power door
lock switch (B). Inside the Vehicle
Q: Press to lock the doors.
K: Press to unlock the doors.
To open a door from the inside,
push the door latch button (C).
A tone will sound when the button is
pushed.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑10.
A. Door Handle Sensor
B. Power Door Lock Switch
C. Door Latch Button Pull the door release handle.


1-6 In Brief

Outside the Vehicle Trunk Release
The vehicle must be in P (Park)
with an automatic transmission
and Neutral with a manual
transmission.
For manual transmission vehicles,
the parking brake must be set
when the engine is running
for the hatch/trunk release to
operate. See Parking Brake on
page 9‑36.
Then, pull the manual door release
handle.
Use the key to open the hatch/trunk.
See Keys on page 2‑2.


In Brief 1-7

To release the hatch/trunk:

. Push the hatch/trunk release . Use the vehicle key. See Keys
button with the keyless entry on page 2‑2.
transmitter within range. See For more information, see Hatch on
. Press V. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) page 2‑11.
. Press } on the keyless System on page 2‑3.
entry transmitter. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System on
page 2‑3.


1-8 In Brief

Windows Seat Adjustment Power Lumbar and Side
Bolsters
Power Seats

The power window switches are To adjust a power seat: A. Lumbar Support Control
located on each door. . B. Side Bolster Support Control
Move the seat forward or
Pull up or press down on the front rearward by sliding the control To adjust the support, if equipped:
of the switch to raise or lower the forward or rearward.
window.
. Move control (A) forward or
. Raise or lower the front or rear rearward to adjust lumbar
For more information, see Power part of the seat cushion by support.
Windows on page 2‑18. moving the front or rear of the . Move control (B) up or down to
control up or down.
adjust the side bolsters.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑2.
page 3‑2.


In Brief 1-9

Reclining Seatbacks Heated Seats Memory Features

To recline a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever on the outboard If available, the buttons are on the On vehicles with the memory
side of the seat. center stack. The ignition must be feature, the controls on the driver
2. Move the seatback to the on for this feature to work. door are used to program and recall
desired position, and then L: Press to turn on the heated memory settings for the driver seat,
release the lever to lock the seat at the high setting. outside mirrors, and the telescopic
seatback in place. steering column.
Press again to switch to the low
3. Push and pull on the seatback to setting.
make sure it is locked.
9: Press to turn the system off.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑3. See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑8.


1-10 In Brief

Storing Memory Positions
. On vehicles with a manual To save into memory:
transmission, when the vehicle
To save into memory: is on, the parking brake must be 1. Recall the desired driving
1. Adjust the driver seat, both set to recall a memory position. position by pressing “1.”
outside mirrors, and the Press and release “1” or “2.” 2. Adjust the seat and the
telescopic steering column. A single beep sounds and the telescopic steering column
2. Press and hold “1” until memory position is recalled after to the desired exit position.
two beeps sound. a brief delay. 3. Press and hold B until
3. Repeat for a second driver If the vehicle is on and the two beeps sound.
position using “2.” parking brake is not set, 4. Repeat for a second driver
three beeps sound and the position using “2.”
To recall:
memory position is not recalled.
. On vehicles with an automatic To recall, press and release B.
See Memory Seats on page 3‑4. The vehicle must be in P (Park) for
transmission, press and
release “1” or “2.” an automatic transmission or the
Easy Exit Driver Seat
parking brake must be set for a
If the vehicle is in P (Park), a This feature can move the seat manual transmission. A single beep
single beep sounds and the rearward and the telescopic steering sounds. The seat and telescopic
memory position is recalled after column out of the way to allow extra steering column will move to the
a brief delay. room to exit the vehicle. position previously stored for the
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), B : Press to save and recall the identified driver.
three beeps sound and the easy exit seat position. See Memory Seats on page 3‑4.


In Brief 1-11
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Safety Belts Children (LATCH System)
(Z06 and ZR1 Models Only) on
page 3‑36 or Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) (Coupe and Convertible
Models Only) on page 3‑35.
United States
Passenger Sensing
System
The passenger sensing system
will turn off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag Canada and Mexico
Refer to the following sections for under certain conditions. No other
important information on how to use airbag is affected by the passenger See Passenger Sensing System on
safety belts properly. sensing system. page 3‑22 for important information.
. Safety Belts on page 3‑8. The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible in the
. How to Wear Safety Belts rearview mirror when the vehicle
Properly on page 3‑10. is started.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑11.


1-12 In Brief

Mirror Adjustment If the vehicle has the memory Steering Wheel
feature, a preferred mirror position
Exterior Mirrors can be stored. See Power Seat
Adjustment
Adjustment on page 3‑2.
To fold, pull the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Interior Mirror
An automatic dimming rearview
mirror will automatically reduce
headlamp glare coming from
vehicles that are traveling
behind you.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview The lever is located on the left side
Mirror on page 2‑17. of the steering column.
To adjust mirrors:
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Press } or | to select a mirror. 1. Pull the lever toward you.
2. Press the control pad to adjust 2. Move the steering wheel up
the mirror. or down.
3. Return the switch to the center 3. Release the lever to lock the
to deselect the mirror. steering wheel in place.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.


In Brief 1-13

Telescopic Steering Column The telescopic steering column Interior Light Control
position can be stored with your To adjust the brightness of the
memory settings. See “Memory interior lights, turn and hold the
Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Wheel” instrument panel brightness control
under Power Seat Adjustment on knob located on the left side of the
page 3‑2 for more information. instrument panel. Push the knob in
to turn the lights on or off.
Interior Lighting
For more information on interior
Courtesy Lamps lighting, see:
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid . Instrument Panel Illumination
is opened, the interior lamps will go Control on page 6‑6.
on, unless it is bright outside. . Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.
For vehicles with this feature, the The courtesy lamps can also be
telescopic steering column control turned on and off by pressing the
is located on the right side of the instrument panel brightness knob.
steering column. Reading Lamps
To adjust the telescopic steering The inside rearview mirror includes
column: two reading lamps. The lamps go on
1. Push the switch forward to move when a door is opened. When the
the wheel away from you. doors are closed, press the lamp
buttons to turn on each lamp.
2. Pull the switch toward you to
move the wheel closer to you.


1-14 In Brief

Exterior Lighting AUTO: Sets the exterior lamps to Windshield Wiper/Washer
automatic mode. AUTO mode turns
the exterior lamps on and off
depending on how much light is
available outside the vehicle.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
together with the sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights.
The windshield wiper/washer lever
Exterior Lamps 5: Turns on the headlamps is located on the right side of the
The exterior lamp control is located together with the parking lamps, steering column.
to the left of the steering wheel, sidemarker lamps, taillamps,
on the multifunction lever. license plate lamps, and instrument
1 : Use for fast wipes.
O : Turn the band with this panel lights. 6 : Use for slow wipes.
symbol on it to operate the exterior For more information, see: 3 : Use to set a delay between
lamps. . wipes.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
O: Turns off all lamps. page 6‑1. x : Use for a delayed wiping
cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust
. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
band down for a longer delay or up
on page 6‑4.
for a shorter delay.


In Brief 1-15

9 : Use to turn off the windshield Climate Controls
wipers.
With this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
8: Use for a for a single wiping
cycle. For more wipes, hold the
band longer.
Windshield Washer: Press and
hold the button at the end of the
lever to spray washer fluid on the
windshield.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.

A. Driver Temperature Control G. Fan Control
B. Display H. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Passenger Temperature Control I. Defrost
D. AUTO J. Rear Window Defogger
E. Air Recirculation See Dual Automatic Climate Control
F. Air Conditioning System on page 8‑1.


1-16 In Brief

Transmission The current gear will be displayed One to Four Shift Light
in the Driver Information (DIC), (Manual Transmission)
Manual Paddle Shift or the Head-Up Display (HUD),
(Automatic Transmission) if the vehicle has either of these
features.
The Manual Paddle Shift system
can be deactivated by moving the
shift lever from S (Sport Mode)
back to D (Drive), or by holding
the up‐shift paddle for more than On vehicles with a manual
one second. If the shift lever was in transmission, when this light
D (Drive) when the system was comes on, you can only shift
activated, the transmission will from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) instead
return to automatic shifting after of 1 (First) to 2 (Second).
10 seconds of cruising at a steady
speed and no manual shifts, For more information about shifting
or when the vehicle comes to for the best fuel economy, see
a stop. Manual Transmission on page 9‑32.
The Manual Paddle Shift system
can be used in D (Drive) or The Manual Paddle Shift system
S (Sport Mode). The system is will not allow either an up-shift or a
activated by pushing the paddle, down-shift, if the vehicle speed is
above the steering wheel spokes, too fast or too slow, nor will it
to manually up-shift to the next allow a start from 4 (Fourth) or
gear, or pulling on the paddle, higher gear.
behind the steering wheel
spokes to manually down-shift. See Manual Mode on page 9‑29.


In Brief 1-17

Vehicle Features O / e : Turn to select radio
stations.
Radio(s) t SEEK u: Press to seek
stations.
t SCAN u : Press and hold to
scan stations.
V : Press to change the information
that shows on the display while
listening to the radio.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Infotainment on page 7‑1 and
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
and six AM, and if equipped,
six XM1, and six XM2) can be
programmed.
Radio with CD, Six Disc Radio Similar To program presets:
1. Turn the radio on.
Top Knob: Press to turn the BAND: Press to switch between
system on and off. Turn to increase FM1, FM2, AM, and if equipped, 2. Press BAND to select FM1,
or decrease the volume. XM1 and XM2. FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.


1-18 In Brief

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the XM satellite radio has a wide See “Using the Auxiliary Input
equalization. variety of programming and Jack” under Auxiliary Devices on
5. Press and hold one of the six commercial-free music, coast to page 7‑16.
numbered pushbuttons until the coast, and in digital-quality sound.
radio beeps once. A fee is required to receive the Bluetooth®
6. Repeat the steps for each XM service. For vehicles with a Bluetooth
pushbutton. For more information, refer to: system, it allows users with a
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
See Operation on page 7‑2. . www.xmradio.com or call make and receive hands-free calls
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.) using the vehicle’s audio system
Setting the Clock
. www.xmradio.ca or call and controls.
To set the clock: 1-877-438-9677 (Canada) The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
1. Press and hold H until the See Satellite Radio on page 7‑7. must be paired with the Bluetooth
correct hour displays. system before it can be used in the
2. Press and hold M until the Portable Audio Devices vehicle. Not all phones will support
correct minute displays. all functions. For more information,
This vehicle may have an auxiliary visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
See Clock on page 5‑6. input jack, located on the audio
faceplate. External devices such as For more information, see Bluetooth
Satellite Radio iPod®, MP3 players, etc. can be on page 7‑16.
connected to the auxiliary input jack
XM is a satellite radio service based
using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
in the 48 contiguous United States
cable.
and 10 Canadian provinces.


In Brief 1-19

Steering Wheel Controls c : Press to reject an incoming Cruise Control
call, or to end a call.
e+/e −: Press to Increase or
decrease volume.
w / x : Press to change radio
stations or select tracks on a CD.
1 to 6: Press to play stations that
are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The cruise controls are located at
the end of the multifunction lever.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3. 9 : Turns the system off.
R : Turns the system on.
For vehicles with steering wheel S : Makes the vehicle accelerate
controls, some audio controls can or resume a previously set speed.
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
T : Press the button at the end of
bg: Press to turn on and off the the lever to set the speed.
vehicle speakers. Press and hold
longer than two seconds to interact See Cruise Control on page 9‑45.
with the OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems.


1-20 In Brief

Navigation System Driver Information 2 : Press to display gauge
Center (DIC) information like oil pressure and
If the vehicle has a navigation
temperature, coolant temperature,
system, there is a separate The DIC display is located at the automatic transmission fluid
navigation system manual that bottom of the instrument panel temperature (if equipped), battery
includes information on the radio, cluster. It shows the status of many voltage, and front/rear tire
audio players, and navigation vehicle systems and enables pressures.
system. access to the personalization menu.
TRIP: Press to display your total
The navigation system provides
and trip distance driven, the elapsed
detailed maps of most major
time function, your average speed,
freeways and roads. After a
and the engine oil life.
destination has been set, the
system provides turn-by-turn OPTION: Press to choose personal
instructions for reaching the options that are available on your
destination. In addition, the system vehicle, depending on the options
can help locate a variety of points of your vehicle is equipped with, such
interest (POIs), such as banks, as door locks, easy entry seats, and
airports, restaurants, and more. language.
See the navigation system manual RESET: Press, along with the other
for more information. buttons, to reset system functions,
select personal options, and turn off
The DIC buttons are located on the or acknowledge messages on
instrument panel to the right of the the DIC.
instrument panel cluster.
For more information, see Driver
.4: Press to display fuel Information Center (DIC) on
information such as fuel economy page 5‑26.
and range.


In Brief 1-21

Vehicle Personalization Power Outlets Until you are sure you can remove
the roof panel by yourself, have
Some vehicle features can be The accessory power outlet can be someone help you. Once removed,
programmed by using the DIC used to plug in electrical equipment, the roof panel should always be
buttons located to the right of such as a cell phone or MP3 player. stored properly in the rear storage
the instrument panel cluster.
The accessory power outlet is compartment.
The features that can be
programmed include: located inside the center console For more information:
storage compartment, on the
. Units forward left side.
. See “Storing the Roof Panel”
under Roof Panel on page 2‑19.
. Memory Features Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
. See “Installing the Roof Panel”
. Lighting Features
under Roof Panel on page 2‑19.
. Lock and Unlock Feedback See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
. Door Lock and Unlock Settings Convertible
Roof Panel
. Language If equipped, the convertible top can
On vehicles with a removable roof be lowered and stowed under the
. Personalization Name panel, there are three release tonneau cover behind the rear seat.
See Vehicle Personalization on latches. Two are located on the front For step-by-step instructions, see
page 5‑54. of the roof panel and the other is Convertible Top on page 2‑24.
located on the back of the roof
panel. See “Removing the Roof
Panel” under Roof Panel on
page 2‑19.


1-22 In Brief

Performance and in difficult driving conditions.
See Active Handling System on
If the warning light comes on, stop
as soon as possible and inflate the
Maintenance page 9‑38. tires to the recommended pressure
The vehicle may have shown on the Tire and Loading
Traction Control Competitive Driving Mode Information label. See Vehicle Load
System (TCS) (except ZR1), Performance Limits on page 9‑14. The warning
Traction Management (Z06, ZR1), light will remain on until the tire
The traction control system limits pressure is corrected.
wheel spin. The system turns on and Launch Control systems
automatically every time the vehicle designed to allow increased During cooler conditions, the low tire
is started. performance while accelerating pressure warning light may appear
and cornering. See Competitive when the vehicle is first started and
. To turn off traction control, press Driving Mode on page 9‑39. then turn off. This may be an early
and release the Active Handling indicator that the tire pressures are
button located on the center Tire Pressure Monitor getting low and the tires need to be
console. i illuminates and the inflated to the proper pressure.
appropriate DIC message This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS does not replace normal
displays. See Ride Control monthly tire maintenance. It is the
System Messages on page 5‑44. driver’s responsibility to maintain
. Press and release the active correct tire pressures.
handling button again to turn on See Tire Pressure Monitor System
traction control. on page 10‑64.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36. The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure
The vehicle has an Active Handling of one of the vehicle's tires.
System that helps maintain
directional control of the vehicle


In Brief 1-23

Z06, Z16, and ZR1 Jump Starting the Battery Car Wash Guidelines
Features The battery of Z06, ZR1, and Automatic car washes are not
manual transmission Z16 (Grand recommended for this vehicle.
Checking Engine Oil Sport) coupe models is in the rear Some car washes cause damage to
Z06, ZR1, and manual transmission of the vehicle. You do not need to the vehicle, the wheels, and the
Z16 (Grand Sport) coupe models access the battery for jump starting. convertible top, if the vehicle is so
have a high performance dry sump There are remote positive (+) and equipped.
lubrication system. This system negative (−) terminals under the If you drive the vehicle through an
operates differently than a hood for this purpose. See Battery automatic car wash that does not
standard engine lubrication system. on page 10‑40 and Jump Starting have enough clearance for the
See Engine Oil on page 10‑14. on page 10‑78. undercarriage and/or wide rear tires
You should check the oil level Brake Noise and wheels, you could damage the
only after the engine has been vehicle. Verify with the manager of
Under certain weather or operating the car wash that the vehicle will fit
thoroughly warmed up and then conditions, occasional brake noise
shut off for at least five minutes. before entering the car wash or use
might be heard with the vehicle's a touchless car wash. See “Washing
This ensures that the oil level performance braking system.
reading obtained will be accurate. Your Vehicle” under Exterior Care
This brake system is designed for on page 10‑82.
superior fade resistance and
consistent operation using high
performance brake pads. Brake
noise is normal and does not affect
system performance. See Braking
on page 9‑4.


1-24 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Engine Oil Life System Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
The engine oil life system calculates Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
engine oil life based on vehicle use Driving habits can affect fuel near the size.
and displays a DIC message when mileage. Here are some driving tips . Follow recommended scheduled
it is necessary to change the engine to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
oil and filter. The oil life system possible.
should be reset to 100% only Premium Fuel
following an oil change.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly. This vehicle's engine was designed
Resetting the Oil Life System to use premium unleaded gasoline.
. Brake gradually and avoid See Recommended Fuel on
1. Press the TRIP button so the abrupt stops. page 9‑48.
OIL LIFE percentage is
displayed.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time. Battery
2. Press RESET and hold for
two seconds. OIL LIFE
. When road and weather This vehicle has a maintenance free
REMAINING 100% will appear. conditions are appropriate, battery. See Battery on page 10‑40
use cruise control, if equipped. and Jump Starting on page 10‑78.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑19.
. Always follow posted speed For Z06, ZR1, and manual
limits or drive more slowly when transmission Z16 (Grand Sport)
conditions require. coupe models the battery is
. Keep vehicle tires properly located in the rear hatch/trunk
inflated. area. Access to the battery is
not necessary to jump start the
. Combine several trips into a vehicle. There are positive (+) and
single trip. negative (−) terminals in the engine
compartment.


In Brief 1-25

Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center OnStar®
(U.S. and Canada)
Program If equipped, this vehicle has a
The Online Owner Center is a comprehensive, in-vehicle system
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 complimentary service that includes that can connect to a live Advisor
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 online service reminders, vehicle for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
maintenance tips, online owner Connection, and Diagnostic
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
manual, special privileges, Services. See OnStar Overview on
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 and more. page 14‑1 for more information.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, Sign up today at:
you are automatically enrolled in the
U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on
Roadside Assistance program.
“Owners,” then “Manage My
See Roadside Assistance Program Chevrolet/Owners Login”)
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8
Canada: chevroletowner.ca
or Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
If you have an active OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will be
sent to an OnStar advisor who will
assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the help
you need.


1-26 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Interior Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Windows Vehicle Security
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Windows
Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-14 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors Roof
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-10 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-17
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks the hatch/trunk lid if power to the
vehicle is lost. See Hatch on
Keys

{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons; children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
RKE transmitter in the vehicle Press the button (A) near the bottom
and they could be seriously of the RKE transmitter to remove
injured or killed if caught in the the key. Never pull the key out
path of a closing window. Do not without pressing the button.
leave the RKE transmitter in a
This vehicle has a keyless access
vehicle with children.
system with pushbutton start.
See Ignition Positions on page 9‑20
for information on starting the
The key located inside the RKE vehicle.
transmitter can be used to lock and
unlock the glove box and to open



Notice: If you ever lose your Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry
transmitter(s) and/or key, it could
be difficult to get into your
(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
vehicle. You may even have to See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
damage your vehicle to get in. page 13‑21 for information transmitter functions work up to
Be sure you have a spare regarding Part 15 of the Federal 30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle.
transmitter and/or key. Communications Commission (FCC) There are other conditions that
If locked out of the vehicle, contact rules and Industry Canada can affect the performance of the
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Assistance Program (U.S. and If there is a decrease in the RKE Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside operating range: The vehicle comes with
Assistance Program (Mexico) on . Check the distance. two transmitters. Each transmitter
page 13‑10.
The transmitter may be too will have a number on top of it,
With an active OnStar subscription, far from the vehicle. “1” or “2.” These numbers
an OnStar Advisor may remotely correspond to the driver of
. Check the location. Other
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar the vehicle. For example, the
vehicles or objects may be
Overview on page 14‑1. memory seat position for driver 1
blocking the signal.
will be recalled when using the
. Check the transmitter's battery. transmitter labeled “1,” if enabled
See “Battery Replacement” later through the DIC. See Memory
in this section. Seats on page 3‑4 and Vehicle
. If the transmitter is still not Personalization on page 5‑54 for
working correctly, see your more information.
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.



Keyless Unlocking plate to open the trunk if the K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
Press the door handle sensor to RKE transmitter is within range. only the driver door. Press K twice
unlock and open the doors if the See Hatch on page 2‑11 for
within five seconds to unlock both
RKE transmitter is within range. additional information.
doors. The interior lamps may
See Door Locks on page 2‑8 and come on.
“Passive Door Unlock” under
Vehicle Personalization on Pressing K also recalls the memory
page 5‑54 for additional information. settings. See Memory Seats on
Keyless Locking
} (Hatch/Trunk): Press and
The doors lock after several hold for about one second to unlock
seconds if all doors are closed and the hatch/trunk. If the engine is
at least one RKE transmitter has running, the shift lever must be
been removed from the interior of in P (Park) for an automatic
the vehicle. To customize whether transmission. For a manual
the doors automatically lock when transmission, the shift lever must
exiting the vehicle, see “Passive be in N (Neutral) with the parking
Door Locking” under Vehicle This vehicle comes with two brake set.
Personalization on page 5‑54 for transmitters.
additional information. L (Panic): Press to sound the
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the horn. Press any other button on the
Keyless Trunk Opening doors. When Q is pressed twice, RKE transmitter to stop it.
Press the hatch/trunk release the lights flash and the horn sounds
button located on the rear of the to confirm locking.
hatch/trunk lid above the license



Programming Transmitters to 3. Insert the vehicle key into the 8. A beep sounds when
the Vehicle key cylinder located above the programming is complete.
license plate. The DIC displays READY FOR
Only RKE transmitters programmed #3 or 4, or MAXIMUM NUMBER
to this vehicle will work. If a 4. Open the hatch/trunk.
OF FOBS LEARNED.
transmitter is lost or stolen, a 5. Turn the key five times within
replacement can be purchased and five seconds. 9. To program additional
programmed through your dealer. transmitters, repeat Step 7.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed 6. The DIC displays READY FOR Press Acc. on the ignition switch
so that lost or stolen transmitters FOB #2, 3 or 4. if programming is complete.
no longer work. Each vehicle can
10. Press K on each newly
have up to four transmitters
programmed transmitter to
programmed to it.
complete the process.
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada, two
recognized transmitters are required
to program a new transmitter.
1. The vehicle must be off.
7. Place the new transmitter in
2. Both the recognized and new the glove box transmitter pocket
transmitters must be with you.
with the buttons facing the
passenger side.



Programming without a 1. The vehicle must be off. 5. Turn the key five times within
Recognized Transmitter five seconds.
This procedure requires three 6. The DIC message displays
10-minute cycles to complete the OFF-ACCESSORY TO
programming process. United LEARN.
States owners are permitted to 7. Press Acc. on the ignition
program a new transmitter to switch.
their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available. 8. The DIC reads WAIT
The Canadian immobilizer 10 MINUTES and counts
standard requires that Canadian down to zero.
owners see their dealer for 9. The DIC displays
programming new transmitters OFF-ACCESSORY TO
when two recognized transmitters LEARN again.
are not available. 2. Place the new transmitter in
10. Press Acc. on the ignition
the glove box transmitter pocket
switch.
with the buttons facing the
passenger side. 11. Steps 8, 9, and 10 will be
repeated two more times.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the
key cylinder located above the 12. A beep sounds and the DIC
license plate. reads READY FOR FOB #1.
All previously known
4. Open the hatch/trunk.
transmitter programming has
been erased.



13. A beep sounds once Starting the Vehicle with a
programming in complete. Low Transmitter Battery
The DIC displays READY
FOR FOB #2. If the transmitter battery is weak,
the DIC may display NO FOBS
To program additional DETECTED when trying to start the
transmitters, take transmitter 1 vehicle. To start the vehicle, place
out of the transmitter pocket the transmitter in the glove box
and place transmitter 2 in the transmitter pocket with the buttons
pocket. Up to four transmitters facing the passenger side. Then,
can be programmed. The DIC with the vehicle in P (Park) for an
then displays MAXIMUM automatic transmission, press the
NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED brake pedal and /. If the vehicle
and exits the 1. Separate the transmitter with a
has a manual transmission, press flat, thin object inserted into the
programming mode.
the clutch and /. Replace the slot on the side or back of the
Press Acc. on the ignition transmitter battery as soon as transmitter.
switch to complete the process. possible. Change the transmitter
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
14. Press Acc. on the ignition battery if the DIC displays FOB
use a metal object.
switch if programming is BATTERY LOW.
complete. 3. Insert the new battery, positive
Battery Replacement side facing down. Replace with a
15. Press K on each newly Notice: When replacing the CR2032 or equivalent battery.
programmed transmitter to battery, do not touch any of the
complete the process. 4. Reassemble the transmitter.
circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.



Door Locks WARNING (Continued)
{ WARNING . Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat
. Passengers — especially and can suffer permanent
children — can easily open injuries or even death from
the doors and fall out of a heat stroke. Always lock
moving vehicle. When a door your vehicle whenever you
is locked it will not open. leave it.
You increase the chance of A. Door Handle Sensor
being thrown out of the
. Outsiders can easily enter
vehicle in a crash if the doors through an unlocked door B. Power Door Lock Switch
are not locked. So, wear when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your C. Door Latch Button
safety belts properly and lock
the doors whenever you doors can help prevent this With the RKE transmitter within
drive. from happening. range, grip the door handle
(Continued) sensor (A). See Remote Keyless
From the outside, press Q or " on Entry (RKE) System Operation on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) page 2‑3. When the passenger door
transmitter. is opened first, the driver door will
also unlock.
From the inside, use the power door
lock switch (B). See Power Door
Locks on page 2‑10.



To open a door from the inside,
push the door latch button (C).
A tone will sound when the button
is pushed.
If the vehicle has lost battery power,
the driver door can be opened
manually.

. From outside the vehicle, use Then, pull the manual door
the key to open the hatch/trunk. release handle.
See Keys on page 2‑2.

. From inside the vehicle, pull the
door release handle.



Power Door Locks Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. Automatic Door Unlock
When pressed, a beep sounds. The vehicle is programmed so
If the door is closed when pressed, that when the shift lever is
the indicator light comes on for a moved into P (Park) for automatic
few seconds, then turns off. If the transmission vehicles or when
door is open when pressed, the the ignition is turned off or is in
indicator light stays on. Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
for manual transmission vehicles,
Automatic Door Locks both doors will unlock.
The vehicle is programmed so that With the vehicle stopped and the
when the doors are closed, the engine running, door unlocking
ignition is on, and the shift lever is can be programmed through the
moved out of P (Park) for automatic Driver Information Center (DIC).
There is an indicator light on the transmissions, or when vehicle This allows the driver to
rear of the door near the window. speed becomes faster than 13 km/h choose various unlock settings.
For programming information,
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the (8 mph) for manual transmissions,
see Vehicle Personalization on
doors. both doors will lock.
page 5‑54.
When pressed, a beep sounds. Use the power door unlock switch
If the door is closed, the indicator to unlock the door when the
light flashes twice. If the door is vehicle is not in P (Park). When the
open, the indicator light flashes. door is closed again, the doors will
lock either when your foot is
removed from the brake or the
vehicle speed becomes faster than
13 km/h (8 mph).



Lockout Protection Doors WARNING (Continued)
Your vehicle can be programmed to
sound the horn three times and Hatch If the vehicle must be driven with
unlock the driver door when both the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
doors are closed and there is a
keyless access transmitter inside
{ WARNING . Close all of the windows.
the vehicle. When the driver door is Exhaust gases can enter the
. Fully open the air outlets on
opened, a reminder chime will vehicle if it is driven with the or under the instrument
sound continuously. The vehicle will liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with panel.
remain locked only when at least any objects that pass through the . Adjust the Climate Control
one transmitter has been removed seal between the body and the System to a setting that
from the vehicle and both doors are trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine brings in only outside air and
closed. See Vehicle Personalization exhaust contains carbon set the fan speed to the
on page 5‑54. monoxide (CO) which cannot be highest setting. See “Climate
seen or smelled. It can cause Control Systems” in the
unconsciousness and even death. Index.
(Continued) . If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑26.



Hatch/Trunk Release . Press } on the keyless
entry transmitter. See Remote
The vehicle must be in P (Park) with
an automatic transmission and
page 2‑3.
Neutral with a manual transmission.
For manual transmission vehicles,
the parking brake must be set
when the engine is running for the
hatch/trunk release to operate.
See Parking Brake on page 9‑36.
To release the hatch/trunk:

. Use the vehicle key. See Keys
on page 2‑2.

. Push the hatch/trunk release
button with the RKE transmitter
within range. See Remote
page 2‑3.

. Press V.



Hatch/Trunk Closing (Coupe) Emergency Trunk Release The emergency trunk release
Handle (Coupe) handle is only intended to aid a
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk
person trapped in a latched trunk,
forcefully or from the sides can
enabling them to open the trunk
cause damage to the glass, the
from the inside.
defogger or the weather stripping.
Be sure objects will fit in the There is a glow-in-the-dark
hatch/trunk area before closing emergency trunk release handle
the hatch/trunk. When closing the located on the rear wall of the trunk
hatch/trunk, gently pull down below the latch. This handle will
from the center. glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle down to
Notice: Do not store heavy or
open the trunk from the inside.
sharp objects in the rear storage
compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. The objects
could damage the underbody.
Notice: Do not use the
Pull down from the center of the emergency trunk release handle
hatch/trunk, closing it with light as a tie-down or anchor point
force until the power latch feature when securing items in the trunk
activates. The hatch/trunk will as it could damage the handle.
close the rest of the way and latch
automatically.



Vehicle Security Arming the System The theft-deterrent system does not
arm if the driver door is locked with
This vehicle has theft-deterrent To arm the system, press Q on the the power door lock switch after the
features; however, they do not make RKE transmitter, or open the door doors are closed.
it impossible to steal. and lock the door with the power
door lock switch. The security light If the RKE transmitter is removed
should flash. Remove the RKE from the vehicle while a passenger
Anti-theft Alarm System is in it, have them lock the doors
transmitter from inside the vehicle
This vehicle has a theft-deterrent and close the door. The security after they are closed. The alarm will
alarm system. light stops flashing and stays on. not arm, so the passenger will not
After 30 seconds, the light should set it off.
turn off. Testing the Alarm
The vehicle can be programmed to To test the system use the following
automatically lock the doors and procedure.
arm the theft-deterrent system when
you exit the vehicle. See Vehicle 1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is
The security light flashes if a door is Personalization on page 5‑54. latched.
open and locked with the power 2. Lower the window on the
door lock switch. If a door or the hatch/trunk is
opened without using the RKE driver door.
If this light stays on while the engine transmitter, the alarm goes off. 3. Manually arm the system.
is running, the vehicle needs The horn sounds for two minutes,
service. 4. Close the doors and wait
then goes off to save battery power.
The vehicle will not start without a 30 seconds.
RKE transmitter present.



5. Reach through the open window Immobilizer The system has one or more RKE
and manually pull the release transmitters that are matched to an
lever on the floor. See Radio Frequency Statement on immobilizer control unit in the
page 13‑21 for information vehicle. Only a correctly matched
6. Press the unlock button on the regarding Part 15 of the Federal
transmitter to turn off the alarm. RKE transmitter starts the vehicle.
Communications Commission (FCC) The vehicle may not start if the RKE
If the alarm does not sound, check rules and Industry Canada transmitter is damaged.
to see if the horn works. The horn Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
fuse may be blown. See Fuses and If the engine does not start and the
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑47. Immobilizer Operation security light comes on, there may
If the horn works, but the alarm be a problem with the immobilizer
The vehicle has a passive system. Press the START button
does not go off, see your dealer.
theft-deterrent system. again.
Disarming the System The system is automatically armed If the vehicle does not start and
Press the unlock button on the RKE when the ignition is turned off. the RKE transmitter appears to
transmitter or squeeze the door The immobilization system is be undamaged, try another
handle sensor while the transmitter disarmed when the ignition is turned RKE transmitter. Or, place the
is near the vehicle to unlock a door. to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and transmitter in the transmitter pocket.
Unlocking a door any other way sets a valid transmitter is found in the See “NO FOBS DETECTED”
off the alarm. If the alarm sounds, vehicle. under Key and Lock Messages on
press the unlock button on the RKE page 5‑42 for additional information.
transmitter to disarm it. You do not have to manually arm or Check the fuse. See Fuses and
disarm the system. Circuit Breakers on page 10‑47.
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates the The security light comes on if there
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.



If the engine still does not start with Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors
the other transmitter, the vehicle
needs service. If the engine does
start, the first transmitter may be Convex Mirrors
faulty. See your dealer or have a
new RKE transmitter programmed { WARNING
to the vehicle.
A convex mirror can make things,
The immobilizer system can like other vehicles, look farther
learn new or replacement RKE
away than they really are. If you
transmitters. Up to four RKE
cut too sharply into the right lane,
transmitters can be programmed
for the vehicle. To program you could hit a vehicle on the
additional transmitters, see right. Check the inside mirror or
“Matching transmitter(s) to Your glance over your shoulder before
Vehicle” under Remote Keyless changing lanes.
To adjust the mirrors:
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3. The passenger side mirror is convex 1. Press } or | to select a mirror.
Do not leave the key or device shaped. A convex mirror's surface is 2. Press the control pad to adjust
that disarms or deactivates the curved so more can be seen from the mirror.
theft-deterrent system in the the driver seat.
vehicle. 3. Return the switch to the center
to deselect the mirror.
If the vehicle has the memory
feature, a preferred mirror position
can be stored. See Memory Seats
on page 3‑4.



Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors T (Indicator Light): This light turns
on when the automatic dimming
To fold, pull the mirror toward the
Automatic Dimming feature is active.
vehicle. Push the mirror outward to
return it to the original position. Rearview Mirror Map Lamps
An automatic dimming inside If the mirror has map lamps, they
Heated Mirrors are located at the bottom of the
rearview mirror will automatically
For vehicles with heated mirrors: change to reduce glare from mirror. To manually turn the lamps
headlamps behind you. A time delay on or off, press the button next to
1 (Rear Window Defogger): each lamp.
Press to heat the mirrors. feature prevents rapid changing
from the day to night positions while
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Cleaning the Mirror
driving under lights and through
Dual Automatic Climate Control traffic. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
System on page 8‑1 for more ® on the mirror. Use a soft towel
information. If the vehicle has OnStar , there are
dampened with water.
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See OnStar
Automatic Dimming Overview on page 14‑1.
Mirror
P (On/Off): The automatic
If the vehicle has this feature, the dimming feature is activated when
driver side outside mirror adjusts for the vehicle is started. Press and
the glare of headlamps behind you. hold this button for up to
This feature is controlled by the six seconds to turn this feature on
on and off setting on the inside or off.
rearview mirror.



Windows Power Windows

{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather. Pull up or press down on the front
of the switch to raise or lower the
window.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
allows you to use the power
windows when the ignition is off.
For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑24.



Express-Down Window Power Window Initialize Roof
Press the front of the switch to the After a power reconnect such as
second position to activate the battery replacement, the window Roof Panel
express-down feature. To stop the indexing feature and the power
window as it is lowering, press the convertible top (if equipped) will On vehicles with a removable roof
switch again. not function until the system is panel, follow the procedures when
initialized. removing or installing it.
Window Indexing
Once power is restored: Removing the Roof Panel
This feature automatically lowers
the window a small amount when 1. Close the doors.
the door is opened. When the door 2. Raise the window and hold the
{ WARNING
is closed, the window will raise to its switch up for three seconds after Do not try to remove a roof panel
full up position. If either window the window is closed. while the vehicle is moving.
does not index properly, it could be Trying to remove the roof panel
due to loss of power. Before 3. Release the switch, then hold
the switch up again for while the vehicle is moving could
returning to the dealer for service,
three seconds and release. cause an accident. The panel
perform the power window initialize
procedure. could fall into the vehicle and
Sun Visors cause you to lose control, or it
could fly off and strike another
Pull the visor toward you, or move it vehicle. You or others could be
to the side to help reduce glare.
injured. Remove the roof panel
To use the lighted mirror, lift the only when the vehicle is parked.
cover.



Until you are sure you can remove 5. Lower the windows.
the panel alone, have someone There are two release latches on
help you. the front of the roof panel and
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof one rear release latch on the
panel on its edges, the roof panel, back of the roof panel.
paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place
the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface and set
the parking brake. Shift an
automatic transmission into The driver side handle moves
P (Park). Shift a manual toward the driver door. The
transmission into N (Neutral). passenger side handle moves
toward the passenger door.
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Lower both sun visors.
4. Open the rear hatch and remove 6. To unlock the release latches on
any items that may interfere with the front of the roof panel, grasp
proper storage of the roof panel. each handle and pull it outward.



9. When the roof panel is loosened 1. Turn the roof panel so that the
from the vehicle, one person front edge of the panel is facing
should grasp the roof panel as the storage area.
close to the center as possible
and lift it away from the vehicle.
Storing the Roof Panel

{ WARNING
If a roof panel is not stored
properly, it could be thrown about
the vehicle in a crash or sudden
7. To unlock the rear of the roof maneuver. People in the vehicle
panel's rear release latch, press could be injured. Whenever you
the back of the release store a roof panel in the vehicle,
handle (B). Then press the
always be sure that it is stored
button on the front of the release 2. Insert the roof panel so that the
securely in the proper location.
handle (A). outside front edges line up
Pull down the latch lever. between the receiver covers.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof Push forward on the roof panel
8. Stand on one side of the vehicle, panel on its edges, the roof panel, until it stops.
and if necessary, have someone paint and/or weatherstripping
stand on the other side. may be damaged. Always place
Together, carefully lift the front the roof panel in the stowage
edge of the roof panel up and receivers after removing it from
forward. the vehicle.



Installing the Roof Panel In most cases, it makes it easier if
two people install the roof panel.
{ WARNING 1. Park on a level surface and set
the parking brake. Shift an
An improperly attached roof panel automatic transmission into
may fall into or fly off the vehicle. P (Park). Shift a manual
You or others could be injured. transmission into N (Neutral).
After installing the roof panel,
2. Check that the front release
always check that it is firmly
latches and the rear release
attached by pushing up on the latch on the vehicle's roof
underside of the panel. Check opening are in their opened
now and then to be sure the roof positions before attempting to
3. Gently place the roof panel panel is firmly in place. install the roof panel.
down so that the back pins on
the roof panel drop into the 3. To remove the roof panel from
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof the rear storage area of the
receivers in the back of the
panel on its edges, the roof panel, vehicle, pull up on the rear edge
storage area.
paint and/or weatherstripping and remove it from the
Press down firmly to seat the pins in may be damaged. Always place storage area.
the receivers. the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from 4. Carefully place the roof panel
the vehicle. over the top of the vehicle.
5. Position the rear edge of the
roof panel to the weatherstrip on
the back of the roof opening.



Then align and fit the pins at the 7. Push up on the handle of the Special care is necessary when
rear of the roof panel inside the rear roof release handle to latch cleaning, removing, and/or storing
openings in the rear overhead its hook in the closed position. the roof panel.
weatherstrip. Gently lower the 8. Push and pull the roof panel up . Flush with water to remove dust
front edge of the roof panel to and down and side to side to and dirt, then dry the panel.
the front of the roof opening. ensure the roof panel is securely . Clean a transparent roof panel
installed. with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave
Removable Roof Panel the cleaner on the panel for
one minute, then wipe the panel
Notice: If you use a glass with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not
treatment and/or conditioner that use glass cleaner on a painted
contains ethyl sulfate on the roof roof panel.
panel, you could damage the
panel. The repairs would not be
. Do not use abrasive cleaning
covered by your warranty. Only materials on either type of panel.
use a GM-approved glass cleaner If water drops are frequently allowed
on the roof panel. to dry on the roof panel, impurities
in the water will adhere to the top.
These impurities may etch or mar
6. Turn the front release handles the finish. When the panel gets wet,
inward so that they latch to the dry it off.
closed position.



Convertible Top The parts of the manual convertible Notice: Leaving the convertible
top that are used when lowering and top down and exposing the
After a power reconnect such as raising it are: interior of the vehicle to outdoor
battery replacement, the power conditions may cause damage.
windows need to be initialized Always close the convertible top
for the convertible top to work. if leaving the vehicle outdoors.
See “Power Window Initialize” in
Power Windows on page 2‑18. Notice: Lowering the convertible
top when there are objects in the
Manual Operation storage area could damage it or
For care and cleaning of the break the glass rear window.
convertible top, see “Cleaning the Always verify that no objects are
Convertible Top” in this section. in the storage area before
High pressure car washes may lowering the convertible top.
cause water to enter the vehicle. Notice: Lowering the convertible
If the vehicle has this feature, the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
following procedures explain the can cause stains, mildew, and
A. Front Edge of the
proper operation of the manual damage to the inside of the
Convertible Top
convertible top. vehicle. Dry off the convertible
B. Rear Edge of the top before lowering it.
Convertible Top
C. Tonneau Cover



Notice: If you lower the Lowering the Manual
convertible top on the vehicle Convertible Top
in cold weather (0°C (32°F) or 1. Park on a level surface.
lower), you may damage Shift an automatic transmission
convertible top components. into P (Park) and set the
Do not lower the top in cold parking brake. Shift a manual
weather. transmission into Neutral and set
Notice: If you raise or lower the the parking brake.
convertible top while the vehicle 2. Make sure the ignition is off.
is in motion, you could damage
the top or the top mechanism. 3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
The repairs would not be covered
by the warranty. Always put an 5. Lift upward on the front edge (A)
automatic transmission in of the convertible top to remove
P (Park) or a manual transmission it from the windshield frame.
in Neutral before raising or Then lift upward on the rear
lowering the convertible top. edge (B) of the convertible top
so it is vertical to the tonneau
cover (C). The front edge (A) and
rear edge (B) should be
straight up.
4. Release the convertible top front
6. The convertible top front latch
latch, located above the inside
must be turned and closed after
rearview mirror, by pulling and
the top has been pushed up.
turning it clockwise.
Failure to close the latch may
prevent the tonneau cover from
completely closing.



If battery power has not been Notice: If you lower the
lost, continue to Step 9. convertible top into the storage
If battery power has been lost, compartment and the rear edge of
the tonneau cover (C) can be the top is not in the full-down
opened using the manual position, you could damage the
release cable. top. Always verify that the rear
edge of the convertible top is in
the full-down position before
lowering the top into the storage
compartment.
8. Pull the cable to release the
tonneau cover, continue with
7. Tilt the driver seatback forward Step 9.
and press the tonneau cover
release button located on the
underside of the tonneau
cover (C) behind the driver seat. The tonneau cover manual
After pressing the release release cable is located
button, the driver and passenger underneath the carpeting behind
door glass will retract to the the passenger seat head
full-down position. Then raise restraint, on the underside
the tonneau cover (C). forward edge of the tonneau
If the tonneau cover does not cover. To access the cable, lift
release and three chimes are and pull back the carpeting.
heard, check to make sure the
trunk lid is closed. Also, the
tonneau cover will not release if
the vehicle alarm is armed.



Raising the Manual
Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface.
Shift an automatic transmission
into P (Park) and set the
parking brake. Shift a manual
transmission into Neutral and set
the parking brake.
2. Lower both windows.
3. Make sure the ignition is off.

9. Push forward on the front 10. Then move the convertible top
edge (A) of the convertible top to rearward to its fully stored
allow the rear edge (B) of the position.
convertible top to be moved to 11. After the convertible top is
its full-down position. stored, apply one even push on
the center of the front edge (A)
of the convertible top to ensure
that the convertible top is fully
retracted.
12. Close the tonneau cover (B) by
pressing down on it with a
swift, firm motion. 4. Tilt the driver seat forward
and press the tonneau
cover release button.



After pressing the release
button, the driver and passenger
door glass will retract to the
full-down position. If battery
power has been lost, see Step 7
under “Lowering the Manual
Convertible Top” in this section.
After pressing the release
button, the driver and passenger
door glass should retract to the
full-down position, if they have
not already been lowered.
5. Lift the tonneau cover. 6. Pull the convertible top up by 7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the
firmly gripping the front edge (A) convertible top to its full-up
near the center and applying a position by first raising the front
brisk upward and forward motion edge (A).
to get the top in the full-up 8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by
position. pushing it down with a swift, firm
motion.
9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top by first slightly
pushing the front edge (A) of the
convertible top forward.



10. Push the front edge (A) of the Power Operation Notice: Lowering the convertible
convertible top down from the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
For care and cleaning of the
outside of the vehicle, or pull can cause stains, mildew, and
convertible top see “Cleaning the
the front edge (A) of the damage to the inside of the
Convertible Top” in this section.
convertible top down from the vehicle. Dry off the convertible
High pressure car washes may
center pull-down handle top before lowering it.
cause water to enter the vehicle.
located in the inside of the Notice: If you lower the
vehicle. To operate the convertible top use
convertible top on the vehicle
the following steps.
11. Pull the convertible top front in cold weather (0°C (32°F) or
latch down and turn it Notice: Leaving the convertible lower), you may damage
counterclockwise to lock the top down and exposing the convertible top components.
convertible top. interior of the vehicle to outdoor Do not lower the top in cold
conditions may cause damage. weather.
Always close the convertible top
Notice: If you raise or lower the
if leaving the vehicle outdoors.
convertible top while the vehicle
Notice: Lowering the convertible is in motion, you could damage
top when there are objects in the the top or the top mechanism.
storage area could damage it or The repairs would not be covered
break the glass rear window. by the warranty. Always put an
Always verify that no objects automatic transmission in
are in the storage area before P (Park) or a manual transmission
lowering the convertible top. in Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.



Lowering the Power by pulling and turning it The convertible top will lower into
Convertible Top clockwise. Push upward on the the rear of the vehicle. A chime will
1. Park on a level surface. front edge. The windows will sound when the convertible top has
Start the engine. Shift an automatically lower. lowered completely. If the radio is
automatic transmission into 4. Return the convertible top front on, the sound may be muted for a
P (Park) and set the parking latch to the closed position. brief time due to a new audio
brake. Shift a manual system equalization being loaded.
transmission into Neutral, and If the convertible top is operated
set the parking brake. multiple times, the engine should be
2. Make sure the trunk is closed, running to prevent drain on the
the rear trunk partition in the rear vehicle's battery. Under certain
storage area is in the fastened conditions, the Driver Information
upright position, and no objects Center (DIC) may display a
are forward of the divider. message regarding the convertible
See “Rear Trunk Partition” under top. See Convertible Top Messages
Rear Storage on page 4‑1. on page 5‑37 for more information.

5. Push and hold ª on the
convertible top switch.

3. Release the convertible top
front latch, located above
the inside rearview mirror,



Raising the Power Convertible Top If the radio is on, the sound may be
Notice: If you raise or lower the muted for a brief time due to a new
convertible top while the vehicle audio system equalization being
is in motion, you could damage loaded.
the top or the top mechanism. If the vehicle has lost power, the
The repairs would not be covered convertible top can still be raised by
by the warranty. Always put an releasing pressure on the hydraulic
automatic transmission in pump, located under the passenger
P (Park) or a manual transmission side of the tonneau cover, using the
in Neutral before raising or following steps. The carpet liner on
lowering the convertible top. the passenger side must be pulled
1. Park on a level surface. Start the back to access the hydraulic pump.
engine. Shift an automatic 3. Push and hold « on the Never attempt to open or close the
transmission into P (Park) and convertible top switch. The convertible top manually without
set the parking brake. Shift a convertible top will raise and the releasing pressure first.
manual transmission into Neutral windows will lower if they were Manual operation of the convertible
and set the parking brake. in the raised position. A chime top cannot be attempted for
2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed, will sound when the convertible five minutes after the last time the
the rear trunk partition in the rear top is raised completely. convertible top switch was pressed
storage area is in the fastened 4. After the convertible top is if the convertible top was not
upright position, and no objects completely raised, release the opened completely and the tonneau
are forward of the divider. convertible top switch. cover latched or closed completely
See “Rear Trunk Partition” under with the front latch locked in place
5. Pull the convertible top front
Rear Storage on page 4‑1. at the time the convertible top
latch down and turn it
switch was released.
counterclockwise to lock the
convertible top.



2. Pull back the carpet liner on 5. Then follow the steps under
the passenger side to access raising the manual convertible
the hydraulic pump. top. See “Manual Operation” or
“Power Operation” in this
section.
When power is restored to the
vehicle, the hydraulic bolt must be
tightened, by turning it clockwise.
The convertible top switch can
1. Open the tonneau cover by then be used to lower or raise the
pulling the manual release convertible top.
cable.
If the convertible top is operated
The tonneau cover manual multiple times, the engine should be
release cable is located behind running to prevent drain on the
the passenger seat head 3. Locate the pressure release vehicle's battery. Under certain
restraint, on the underside bolt on the front side of the conditions, the Driver Information
forward edge of the tonneau hydraulic pump. Center (DIC) may display a
cover. message regarding the convertible
4. Use the wrench, located in
Be careful when opening the the center console, and turn top. See Convertible Top Messages
tonneau cover by hand. If the the pressure release bolt on page 5‑37 for more information.
tonneau cover is opened counterclockwise one revolution, If the battery has been
quickly, damage can occur to to relieve pressure to the disconnected, the power windows
the hinging mechanism, which hydraulic pump. This will allow must be initialized for the power
can prevent proper operation of the manual raising of the convertible top to operate. See
the convertible top. convertible top. Power Windows on page 2‑18 for
more information.



Cleaning the Convertible Top To protect the convertible top:
The convertible top should be . After washing the vehicle, make
cleaned often. However, high sure the convertible top is
pressure car washes may cause completely dry before lowering it.
water to enter the vehicle. . Do not get any cleaner on the
When hand washing the convertible vehicle's painted finish; it could
top, do it in partial shade. Use a leave streaks.
mild soap, lukewarm water, and a
soft sponge. A chamois or cloth may
leave lint on the top, and a brush
can chafe the threads in the top
fabric. Do not use detergents, harsh
cleaners, solvents, or bleaching
agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the
top evenly to avoid spots or rings.
Let the soap remain on the fabric
for a few minutes. When the top is
really dirty, use a mild foam-type
cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire
vehicle, then let the top dry in direct
sunlight.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-14
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-33
Airbag System Lower Anchors and Tethers
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 for Children (LATCH System)
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-17 (Coupe and Convertible
Front Seats When Should an Airbag Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-2 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 What Makes an Airbag for Children (LATCH System)
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 (Z06 and ZR1
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 How Does an Airbag Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Replacing LATCH System
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 What Will You See after an Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Securing Child Restraints . . . . 3-40
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-27
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-28


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints Front Seats Lumbar Adjustment
The vehicle's front seats have head Power Lumbar and Side
restraints in the outboard seating Power Seat Adjustment Bolsters
positions that cannot be adjusted.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.

To adjust a power seat: A. Lumbar Support Control
. Move the seat forward or B. Side Bolster Support Control
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward. To adjust the support, if equipped:
. Raise or lower the front or rear
. Move control (A) forward or
part of the seat cushion by rearward to adjust lumbar
moving the front or rear of the support.
control up or down. . Move control (B) up or down to
adjust the side bolsters.



Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright
position:
{ WARNING 1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
You can lose control of the seatback, and the seatback will
vehicle if you try to adjust a return to the upright position.
manual driver seat while the 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
vehicle is moving. The sudden make sure it is locked.
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
{ WARNING desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback in place.
could move forward in a sudden 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
stop or crash. That could cause make sure it is locked.
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.



Memory Seats
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries. Do not have a seatback reclined if
The lap belt could go up over the vehicle is moving.
your abdomen. The belt forces On vehicles with the memory
would be there, not at your pelvic feature, the controls on the driver
bones. This could cause serious door are used to program and recall
internal injuries. memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the telescopic
For proper protection when the steering column, if equipped.
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well The numbers on the back of the
back in the seat and wear the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters correspond to the
safety belt properly.
numbers on the memory buttons.



Storing Memory Positions
. On vehicles with a manual memory position associated with
transmission, when the vehicle the transmitter used to unlock the
To save into memory: is on, the parking brake must be vehicle.
1. Adjust the driver seat, both set to recall a memory position.
outside mirrors, and the Press and release “1” or “2.” This feature is turned on or off using
telescopic steering column, the vehicle personalization menu.
A single beep sounds and the See Vehicle Personalization on
if equipped. memory position is recalled after page 5‑54.
2. Press and hold “1” until a brief delay.
two beeps sound. To stop recall movement, press one
If the vehicle is on and the of the power seat controls, power
3. Repeat for a second driver parking brake is not set, mirror or memory buttons, or the
position using “2.” three beeps sound and the telescopic steering column switch.
To recall a memory position: If something has blocked the driver
. On vehicles with an automatic Memory Remote Recall seat while recalling a memory
transmission, press and release (Automatic Transmission) position, the recall may stop.
“1” or “2.” This feature can recall the driver Remove the obstruction; then press
seat, outside mirrors, and telescopic and hold the appropriate manual
If the vehicle is in P (Park), a control for the memory item that is
single beep sounds and the steering column, if equipped, to
stored positions when entering the not recalling for two seconds.
memory position is recalled after Try recalling the memory position
a brief delay. vehicle.
again by pressing the appropriate
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), To activate, enter the vehicle and memory button. If the memory
three beeps sound and the start the engine. The driver seat, position is still not recalling, see
memory position is not recalled. outside mirrors, and telescopic your dealer for service.
steering column will move to the



Easy Exit Driver Seat To recall, press and release B. If something has blocked the driver
This feature can move the seat The vehicle must be in P (Park) for seat while recalling the exit position,
rearward and the telescopic steering an automatic transmission or the the recall may stop. Remove the
column, if equipped, out of the way parking brake must be set for a obstruction; then press and hold the
to allow extra room to exit the manual transmission. A single beep power seat control rearward for
vehicle. sounds. The seat and telescopic two seconds. Try recalling the exit
steering column will move to the position again. If the exit position is
B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press position previously stored for the still not recalling, see your dealer for
to save and recall the easy exit seat identified driver. service.
position.
If the easy exit seat feature is See Vehicle Personalization on
To save into memory: programmed on in the vehicle page 5‑54.
1. Recall the desired driving personalization menu, automatic
position by pressing “1.” recall occurs when one of the
2. Adjust the seat and the following conditions is met:
telescopic steering column to the . The vehicle is turned off, in
desired exit position. Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) or accessory
3. Press and hold B until mode, and the driver door is
two beeps sound. opened.
4. Repeat for a second driver . The vehicle is turned off, or in
position using “2.” RAP, and the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter is pressed.



Seatback Latches
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.

To return a seatback to the sitting
Some vehicles are equipped with position, lift up on the latch,
this seatback latch. raise the seatback, and push the
seatback rearward. Push and pull
Some vehicles are equipped with To fold a seatback forward, lift the on the seatback to make sure it is
this seatback latch. latch on top of the backside of the locked in place.
seat. The seatback locks when
folded down.



Heated Front Seats Safety Belts
This section of the manual
{ WARNING describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
If you cannot feel temperature
things not to do with safety belts.
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. { WARNING
To reduce the risk of burns, Do not let anyone ride where a
people with such a condition safety belt cannot be worn
should use care when using the properly. In a crash, if you or your
seat heater, especially for long passenger(s) are not wearing
periods of time. Do not place If available, the buttons are on the
center stack. safety belts, injuries can be much
anything on the seat that worse than if you are wearing
insulates against heat, such as The ignition must be on for this safety belts. You can be seriously
a blanket, cushion, cover, feature to work. injured or killed by hitting things
or similar item. This may cause L (Heated Seat): Press to turn the inside the vehicle harder or by
the seat heater to overheat. heated seat on at the high setting. being ejected from the vehicle.
An overheated seat heater may In addition, anyone who is not
cause a burn or may damage Press again to switch to the low
setting. buckled up can strike other
the seat. passengers in the vehicle.
9 (Off): Press to turn the heated
seat off. (Continued)



Why Safety Belts Work Questions and Answers About
WARNING (Continued) Safety Belts
It is extremely dangerous to ride Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
in a cargo area, inside or outside after a crash if I am wearing a
of a vehicle. In a collision, safety belt?
passengers riding in these areas A: You could be— whether you are
are more likely to be seriously wearing a safety belt or not.
injured or killed. Do not allow Your chance of being conscious
passengers to ride in any area of during and after a crash, so you
the vehicle that is not equipped can unbuckle and get out, is
with seats and safety belts. much greater if you are belted.
Always wear a safety belt, and Q: If my vehicle has airbags,
check that all passenger(s) are When riding in a vehicle, you travel why should I have to wear
restrained properly too. as fast as the vehicle does. If the safety belts?
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
A: Airbags are supplemental
going until something stops you.
This vehicle has indicators as a systems only; so they work with
It could be the windshield, the
reminder to buckle the safety belts. safety belts— not instead of
instrument panel, or the safety belts!
See Safety Belt Reminders on them. Whether or not an airbag
page 5‑17. When you wear a safety belt, you is provided, all occupants still
and the vehicle slow down together. have to buckle up to get the
There is more time to stop because most protection.
you stop over a longer distance and, Also, in nearly all states and in
when worn properly, your strongest all Canadian provinces, the law
bones take the forces from the requires wearing safety belts.
safety belts. That is why wearing
safety belts makes such good
sense.


. Wear the shoulder belt over the
How to Wear Safety Belts shoulder and across the chest.
Properly These parts of the body are best
This section is only for people of able to take belt restraining
adult size. forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
There are special things to know
about safety belts and children.
And there are different rules for { WARNING
smaller children and infants. If a You can be seriously injured,
child will be riding in the vehicle, or even killed, by not wearing
see Older Children on page 3‑29 or
your safety belt properly.
Infants and Young Children on
page 3‑31. Follow those rules for . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
everyone's protection. your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
of you. loose or twisted.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
unbelted people are hurt more often for your seating position. under both arms or behind
in crashes than those who are . Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
wearing safety belts. and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
There are important things to know touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
about wearing a safety belt properly. this applies force to the strong armrest.
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.



Lap-Shoulder Belt The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
All seating positions in the vehicle quickly. If this happens, let the
have a lap-shoulder belt. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
The following instructions explain Then pull the belt across you
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt more slowly.
properly. If the shoulder portion of a
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is passenger belt is pulled out all
adjustable, so you can sit up the way, the child restraint
straight. To see how, see “Seats” locking feature may be engaged.
in the Index. If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint 3. If the belt stops before it reaches
locking feature in the right front the buckle, tilt the latch plate and
seating position may affect the keep pulling the safety belt until
passenger sensing system. See it can be buckled.
Passenger Sensing System on

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.



4. Push the latch plate into the 5. To make the lap part tight, pull To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. up on the shoulder belt. on the buckle. The belt should
Pull up on the latch plate to It may be necessary to pull return to its stowed position.
make sure it is secure. If the belt stitching on the safety belt Before a door is closed, be sure the
is not long enough, see Safety through the latch plate to fully safety belt is out of the way. If a
Belt Extender on page 3‑13. tighten the lap belt on smaller door is slammed against a safety
Position the release button on occupants. belt, damage can occur to both the
the buckle so that the safety belt safety belt and the vehicle.
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.



Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
This vehicle has safety belt Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
pretensioners for the front outboard
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
occupants. Although the safety belt
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
are part of the safety belt assembly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
They can help tighten the safety
wear safety belts. properly.
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash if the threshold Safety Belt Extender
conditions for pretensioner If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
activation are met. And, for vehicles around you, you should use it.
with side impact airbags, safety belt
But if a safety belt is not long
pretensioners can help tighten the
enough, your dealer will order you
safety belts in a side crash.
an extender. When you go in to
Pretensioners work only once. order it, take the heaviest coat you
If the pretensioners activate in a will wear, so the extender will be
crash, they will need to be replaced, long enough for you. To help avoid
and probably other new parts for personal injury, do not let someone
the vehicle's safety belt system. else use it, and use it only for the
See Replacing Safety Belt System seat it is made to fit. The extender
Parts after a Crash on page 3‑14. A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the
throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.



Safety System Check Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt
Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a
belt reminder light, safety belts, Crash
buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are all working
{ WARNING
properly. Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
{ WARNING
damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety
that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle.
from doing its job. See your dealer provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the
safety belts may not protect you in a soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or serious injury or even death in a
frayed, get a new one right away. crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
Make sure the safety belt reminder properly after a crash, have them
light is working. See Safety Belt inspected and any necessary
Reminders on page 5‑17. replacements made as soon as
Keep safety belts clean and dry. possible.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑14.



After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System For frontal airbags, the word
safety belts may not be necessary. AIRBAG is on the center of the
But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following steering wheel for the driver and on
were used during any crash may airbags: the instrument panel for the front
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver. outboard passenger.
See your dealer to have the safety For seat-mounted side impact
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the front
outboard passenger. airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
replaced. side of the seatback closest to
New parts and repairs may be . A seat-mounted side impact the door.
necessary even if the safety belt airbag for the driver.
Airbags are designed to supplement
system was not being used at the . A seat-mounted side impact the protection provided by safety
time of the crash. airbag for the front outboard belts. Even though today's airbags
Have the safety belt pretensioners passenger. are also designed to help reduce
checked if the vehicle has been in a All vehicle airbags have the word the risk of injury from the force of an
crash, or if the airbag readiness light AIRBAG on the trim or on a label inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
stays on after you start the vehicle near the deployment opening. very quickly to do their job.
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑17.



Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
{ WARNING force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag
You can be severely injured or an eye, anyone who is up when it inflates can be seriously
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to, any injured or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt, even airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
with airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants.
belts, not replace them. Also, airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle's safety belt
airbags are not designed to inflate on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system
in every crash. In some crashes forward. Safety belts help keep is designed for them. Young
safety belts are the only restraint. you in position before and during children and infants need the
See When Should an Airbag a crash. Always wear the safety protection that a child restraint
Inflate? on page 3‑18. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of the vehicle. To read how, see
crash helps reduce the chance of the vehicle. Older Children on page 3‑29 or
hitting things inside the vehicle or Infants and Young Children on
being ejected from it. Airbags are Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 3‑31.
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted airbags.
properly, whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.



Where Are the Airbags?

There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag The front outboard passenger
Readiness Light on page 5‑17 frontal airbag is in the passenger
for more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the side instrument panel.
center of the steering wheel.



When Should an Airbag
{ WARNING Inflate?
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to
occupant and an airbag, the inflate in moderate to severe frontal
airbag might not inflate properly or near frontal crashes to help
or it might force the object into reduce the potential for severe
that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or
or even death. The path of an front outboard passenger's head
inflating airbag must be kept and chest. However, they are only
clear. Do not put anything designed to inflate if the impact
between an occupant and an exceeds a predetermined
Driver Side Shown, airbag, and do not attach or put deployment threshold. Deployment
Passenger Side Similar anything on the steering wheel thresholds are used to predict how
hub or on or near any other severe a crash is likely to be in time
The driver and front outboard airbag covering. for the airbags to inflate and help
passenger seat-mounted side restrain the occupants.
impact airbags are in the side of Do not use seat accessories that
the seatbacks closest to the door. block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or
seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflate at Depending on the model, the Seat-mounted side impact airbags
different crash speeds depending on vehicle may have one or two seat are not intended to inflate in
whether the vehicle hits an object position sensors. The seat position frontal impacts, near-frontal
straight on or at an angle, and sensor(s) enable the sensing impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
whether the object is fixed or system to monitor the position of the A seat-mounted side impact airbag
moving, rigid or deformable, driver seat (all models except Z06 is intended to inflate on the side of
narrow or wide. and ZR1) and the front outboard the vehicle that is struck.
Thresholds can also vary with passenger seat (all models). In any particular crash, no one can
specific vehicle design. Seat position sensor(s) provide say whether an airbag should have
information that is used in inflated simply because of the
Frontal airbags are not intended to determining whether the airbags
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear vehicle damage or repair costs.
should inflate at a reduced or full
impacts, or in many side impacts. level.
What Makes an Airbag
In addition, the vehicle has The vehicle has seat-mounted side
dual-stage frontal airbags. impact airbags. See Airbag System
Inflate?
Dual-stage airbags adjust the on page 3‑15. Seat-mounted side In a deployment event, the sensing
restraint according to crash severity. impact airbags are intended to system sends an electrical signal
The vehicle has electronic frontal inflate in moderate to severe side triggering a release of gas from the
sensors, which help the sensing crashes, depending on the location inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
system distinguish between a of the impact. Seat-mounted side airbag causing the bag to break out
moderate frontal impact and a more impact airbags will inflate if the of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
severe frontal impact. For moderate crash severity is above the and related hardware are all part of
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags system's designed threshold level. the airbag module.
inflate at a level less than full The threshold level can vary with For airbag location, see Where Are
deployment. For more severe frontal specific vehicle design. the Airbags? on page 3‑17.
impacts, full deployment occurs.



How Does an Airbag What Will You See after
Restrain? an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING
In moderate to severe frontal or After the frontal and seat-mounted When an airbag inflates, there
near frontal collisions, even belted side impact airbags inflate, they may be dust in the air. This dust
occupants can contact the steering quickly deflate, so quickly that some could cause breathing problems
wheel or the instrument panel. people may not even realize the for people with a history of
In moderate to severe side airbags inflated. Some components asthma or other breathing trouble.
collisions, even belted occupants of the airbag module may be hot for To avoid this, everyone in the
can contact the inside of the several minutes. For location of the vehicle should get out as soon as
vehicle. airbags, see Where Are the it is safe to do so. If you have
Airbags? on page 3‑17. breathing problems but cannot
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts by The parts of the airbag that come get out of the vehicle after an
distributing the force of the into contact with you may be warm, airbag inflates, then get fresh air
impact more evenly over the but not too hot to touch. There may by opening a window or a door.
occupant's body. be some smoke and dust coming If you experience breathing
from the vents in the deflated problems following an airbag
But airbags would not help in deployment, you should seek
many types of collisions, primarily airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of medical attention.
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When the windshield or being able to steer
Should an Airbag Inflate? on the vehicle, nor does it prevent The vehicle has a feature that may
page 3‑18 for more information. people from leaving the vehicle. automatically unlock the doors, turn
the interior lamps on, turn on the
Airbags should never be regarded
hazard warning flashers, and shut
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.



off the fuel system after the airbags In many crashes severe enough to
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which
the interior lamps off, and turn the broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a
hazard warning flashers off by using Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data
the controls for those features. also occur from the front outboard Recording and Privacy on
passenger airbag. page 13‑20 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑20.
{ WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
A crash severe enough to inflate inflates, you will need some work on the airbag system.
the airbags may have also new parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that
damaged important functions in If you do not get them, the the airbag system will not work
the vehicle, such as the fuel airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer for
system, brake and steering to help protect you in another service.
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle crash. A new system will include
appears to be drivable after a airbag modules and possibly
moderate crash, there may be other parts. The service manual
concealed damage that could for the vehicle covers the need
make it difficult to safely operate to replace other parts.
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.



Passenger Sensing The words ON and OFF, or the According to accident statistics,
symbol for on and off, will be visible children are safer when properly
System during the system check. When the secured in a rear seat in the correct
The vehicle has a passenger system check is complete, either the child restraint for their weight
sensing system for the front word ON or OFF, or the symbol and size. We recommend that
outboard passenger position. for on or off, will be visible. See rear-facing child restraints not be
The passenger airbag status Passenger Airbag Status Indicator transported in the vehicle, even if
indicator will light in the rearview on page 5‑18. the airbags are off.
mirror when the vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system Never put a rear-facing child seat in
will turn off the front outboard the front. This is because the risk to
passenger frontal airbag and the rear-facing child is so great,
seat-mounted side impact airbag if the airbag inflates.
under certain conditions. No other
airbag is affected by the passenger
sensing system.
{ WARNING
United States The passenger sensing system A child in a rear-facing child
works with sensors that are part of restraint can be seriously injured
the front outboard passenger seat. or killed if the passenger frontal
The sensors are designed to detect airbag inflates. This is because
the presence of a properly-seated the back of the rear-facing child
occupant and determine if the front restraint would be very close to
outboard passenger frontal airbag the inflating airbag. A child in a
and seat-mounted side impact forward-facing child restraint can
Canada and Mexico airbag should be allowed to inflate be seriously injured or killed if the
or not. (Continued)



If the vehicle does not have a rear
. A front outboard passenger
WARNING (Continued) seat that will accommodate a takes his/her weight off of the
rear-facing child restraint, a seat for a period of time.
passenger frontal airbag inflates rear-facing child restraint should not . The front outboard passenger
and the passenger seat is in a be installed in the vehicle, even if seat is occupied by a smaller
forward position. the airbags are off. person, such as a child who has
Even if the passenger sensing The passenger sensing system is outgrown child restraints.
system has turned off the front designed to turn off the front . There is a critical problem with
outboard passenger airbag(s), no outboard passenger frontal airbag the airbag system or the
system is fail-safe. No one can and seat-mounted side impact passenger sensing system.
guarantee that an airbag will not airbag if:
inflate under some unusual When the passenger sensing
. The front outboard passenger system has turned off the front
circumstance, even though the seat is unoccupied. outboard passenger frontal airbag
airbag(s) are off.
. The system determines that an and seat-mounted side impact
Secure rear-facing child restraints infant is present in a rear-facing airbag, the off indicator will light
in a rear seat, even if the infant seat. and stay lit as a reminder that the
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a airbags are off. See Passenger
forward-facing child restraint in
. The system determines that a Airbag Status Indicator on
small child is present in a child page 5‑18.
the front outboard passenger
restraint.
seat, always move the seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to . The system determines that a
secure the child restraint in a small child is present in a
rear seat. booster seat.



The passenger sensing system is Everyone in the vehicle who If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
designed to turn on the front has outgrown child restraints Child Restraint
outboard passenger frontal airbag should wear a safety belt
and seat-mounted side impact properly — whether or not there is If a child restraint has been installed
airbag anytime the system senses an airbag for that person. and the on indicator is lit:
that a person of adult size is sitting 1. Turn the vehicle off.
properly in the front outboard
passenger seat.
{ WARNING 2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
When the passenger sensing If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means 3. Remove any additional items
system has allowed the airbags to
that something may be wrong from the seat such as blankets,
be enabled, the on indicator will light
with the airbag system. To help cushions, seat covers, seat
and stay lit as a reminder that the
avoid injury to yourself or others, heaters, or seat massagers.
airbags are active.
have the vehicle serviced right 4. Reinstall the child restraint
For some children who have
away. See Airbag Readiness following the directions
outgrown child restraints and for
Light on page 5‑17 for more provided by the child restraint
very small adults, the passenger
information, including important manufacturer and refer to
sensing system may or may not turn
safety information. Securing Child Restraints on
off the front outboard passenger
page 3‑40.
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, depending
upon the person's seating
posture and body build.



5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Use the following steps to allow the
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, enable the front outboard passenger
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly frontal airbag and seat-mounted
recline the vehicle seatback side impact airbag:
and adjust the seat cushion, 1. Turn the vehicle off.
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not 2. Remove any additional material
pushing the child restraint into from the seat, such as blankets,
the seat cushion. cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
If the on indicator is still lit, do upright position.
not install a child restraint in this
vehicle and check with your 4. Have the person sit upright in
dealer. the seat, centered on the seat
If a person of adult-size is sitting cushion, with legs comfortably
in the front outboard passenger extended.
seat, but the off indicator is lit, it 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
could be because that person is person remain in this position for
not sitting properly in the seat. two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.



Additional Factors Affecting A thick layer of additional material, Servicing the
System Operation such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the seat covers, seat heaters, and seat Airbags affect how the vehicle
passenger in position on the seat massagers can affect how well should be serviced. There are
during vehicle maneuvers and the passenger sensing system parts of the airbag system in
braking, which helps the passenger operates. We recommend that you several places around the vehicle.
sensing system maintain the not use seat covers or other Your dealer and the service manual
passenger airbag status. aftermarket equipment except when have information about servicing
See “Safety Belts” and “Child approved by GM for your specific the vehicle and the airbag system.
Restraints” in the Index for vehicle. See Adding Equipment to To purchase a service manual, see
additional information about the the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on Service Publications Ordering
importance of proper restraint use. page 3‑27 for more information Information on page 13‑18.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is about modifications that can affect
pulled out all the way, the child
restraint locking feature will be
how the system operates. { WARNING
engaged. This may unintentionally
cause the passenger sensing
{ WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the
vehicle is turned off and the
system to turn the airbag(s) off for Stowing of articles under the battery is disconnected, an airbag
some adult size occupants. If this passenger seat or between the can still inflate during improper
happens, let the belt go back passenger seat cushion and service. You can be injured if you
all the way and start again. seatback may interfere with the are close to an airbag when it
proper operation of the passenger inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
sensing system. (Continued)



Your dealer and the service manual This could either prevent proper
WARNING (Continued) have information about the location deployment of the passenger
of the airbag sensors, sensing and airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
They are probably part of the diagnostic module, and airbag sensing system from properly
airbag system. Be sure to follow wiring. turning off the passenger airbag(s).
proper service procedures, and In addition, the vehicle has a See Passenger Sensing System on
make sure the person performing passenger sensing system for the page 3‑22.
work for you is qualified to do so. front outboard passenger position, If you have to modify your vehicle
which includes sensors that are because you have a disability and
Adding Equipment to the part of the passenger seat. have questions about whether
The passenger sensing system may the modifications will affect the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle not operate properly if the original vehicle's airbag system, or if you
Adding accessories that change the seat trim is replaced with non-GM have questions about whether the
vehicle's frame, bumper system, covers, upholstery or trim, or with airbag system will be affected if the
height, front end or side sheet GM covers, upholstery or trim vehicle is modified for any other
metal, may keep the airbag designed for a different vehicle. reason, call Customer Assistance.
system from working properly. Any object, such as an aftermarket See Customer Assistance Offices
The operation of the airbag system seat heater or a comfort enhancing (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5
can also be affected by changing or pad or device, installed under or on or Customer Assistance Offices
moving any parts of the front seats, top of the seat fabric, could also (Mexico) on page 13‑6.
safety belts, the airbag sensing and interfere with the operation of the
diagnostic module, steering wheel, passenger sensing system.
instrument panel, inside rearview
mirror, front sensors, or airbag
wiring.



Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will
need to replace airbag system
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash parts. See your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance
If the airbag readiness light stays on
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5‑17. airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly.
A damaged airbag system may Have the vehicle serviced right
Notice: If an airbag covering is away. See Airbag Readiness Light
damaged, opened, or broken, the not work properly and may
on page 5‑17.
airbag may not work properly. not protect you and your
Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death.
opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure the airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
location of the airbags, see inspected and any necessary
Where Are the Airbags? on replacements made as soon as
page 3‑17. See your dealer for possible.
service.



Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
the weight and height limitations for
Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
with a lap-shoulder belt until the additional restraint a shoulder
child passes the below fit test: belt can provide. The shoulder
. Sit all the way back on the seat. belt should not cross the face or
Do the knees bend at the seat neck. The lap belt should fit
edge? If yes, continue. If no, snugly below the hips, just
return to the booster seat. touching the top of the thighs.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. This applies belt force to the
Does the shoulder belt rest on child's pelvic bones in a crash.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. It should never be worn over the
If no, then return to the abdomen, which could cause
booster seat. severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the According to accident statistics,
Older children who have outgrown
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, children and infants are safer
booster seats should wear the
return to the booster seat. when properly restrained in a child
vehicle's safety belts.
restraint system or infant restraint
. Can proper safety belt fit be system secured in a rear seating
maintained for the length of the position.
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.



In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older The child could move too far
children need to use safety belts forward increasing the chance of
properly. head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
{ WARNING belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
Never allow more than one child That could cause serious or fatal
to wear the same safety belt. injuries. The shoulder belt should
The safety belt cannot properly go over the shoulder and across
spread the impact forces. In a the chest.
crash, they can be crushed
together and seriously injured. { WARNING
A safety belt must be used by
Never allow a child to wear the
only one person at a time.
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
(Continued)



Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and Every time infants and young 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
size of the traveler changes the children ride in vehicles, they should arms. An infant should be
need, for everyone, to use safety have the protection provided by secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every appropriate child restraints. restraint.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and will become so heavy it is not
the safety belt continues to possible to hold it during a crash.
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never (Continued)
allow children to play with the
safety belts.



For most basic types of child
{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available.
Children who are up against, When purchasing a child
or very close to, any airbag when restraint, be sure it is designed
it inflates can be seriously injured to be used in a motor vehicle.
or killed. Never put a rear-facing If it is, the restraint will have a
child restraint in the right front label saying that it meets federal
seat. Secure a rear-facing child motor vehicle safety standards.
restraint in a rear seat. It is also The restraint manufacturer's
better to secure a forward-facing instructions that come with the
child restraint in a rear seat. If you restraint state the weight and
must secure a forward-facing Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
child restraint in the right front add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
seat, always move the front are many kinds of restraints
A: Add-on child restraints, which
passenger seat as far back as it available for children with
are purchased by the vehicle
will go. special needs.
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into { WARNING
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also To reduce the risk of neck and
whether or not the restraint will head injury during a crash,
be compatible with the motor infants need complete support.
vehicle in which it will be used. In a crash, if an infant is in a
rear-facing child restraint, the
crash forces can be distributed
(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
across the strongest part of an
infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always
be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.

{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
so small that the vehicle's regular A forward-facing child seat (B)
(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat
safety belt may not remain low provides restraint for the child's
on the hip bones, as it should. A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness.
Instead, it may settle up around provides restraint with the seating
the child's abdomen. In a crash, surface against the back of the
the belt would apply force on a infant.
body area that is unprotected by The harness system holds the infant
any bony structure. This alone in place and, in a crash, acts to
could cause serious or fatal keep the infant positioned in the
injuries. To reduce the risk of restraint.
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.



Securing an Add-On Child See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Restraint in the Vehicle Children (LATCH System) (Z06 and
ZR1 Models Only) on page 3‑36 or
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
{ WARNING Children (LATCH System) (Coupe
A child can be seriously injured and Convertible Models Only) on
or killed in a crash if the child page 3‑35. Children can be
restraint is not properly secured endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
in the vehicle. Secure the child
the vehicle.
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or When securing an add-on child
LATCH system, following the restraint, refer to the instructions
(C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that that come with the restraint which
A booster seat (C) is a child child restraint and the instructions may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint designed to improve the fit in this manual. booklet, or both, and to this manual.
of the vehicle's safety belt system. The child restraint instructions are
A booster seat can also help a child important, so if they are not
To help reduce the chance of injury, available, obtain a replacement
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured copy from the manufacturer.
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in Keep in mind that an unsecured
vehicle seats by lap belts or the child restraint can move around in a
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder collision or sudden stop and injure
belt, or by the LATCH system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle— even when no child
is in it.



In some areas of the United States Lower Anchors and In Canada, the law requires that
and Canada, Certified Child forward-facing child restraints have
Passenger Safety Technicians
Tethers for Children a top tether, and that the tether be
(CPSTs) are available to inspect (LATCH System) attached.
and demonstrate how to correctly (Coupe and Convertible Your vehicle does not have lower
use and install child restraints.
In the U.S., refer to the National
Models Only) anchors or top tether anchors to
secure a child restraint with the
Highway Traffic Safety Some child restraints have a LATCH system. If a national or
Administration (NHTSA) website to LATCH system. As part of the local law requires that your top
locate the nearest child safety seat LATCH system, your child restraint tether be anchored, do not use a
inspection station. For CPST may have lower attachments and/or child restraint in this vehicle
availability in Canada, check with a top tether. The LATCH system because a top tether cannot be
Transport Canada or the Provincial can help hold the child restraint in properly anchored. You must use
Ministry of Transportation office. place during driving or in a crash. the safety belts to secure your child
Some vehicles have lower and/or restraint in this vehicle, unless a
Securing the Child Within the top tether anchors designed to
Child Restraint national or local law requires that
secure a child restraint with lower the top tether be anchored. Refer to
attachments and/or a top tether. the child restraint instructions and
{ WARNING Some child restraints with a top instructions in this manual for
A child can be seriously injured tether are designed to be used securing a child restraint using the
whether the top tether is anchored vehicle's safety belts. See Securing
or killed in a crash if the child is
or not. Other child restraints require Child Restraints on page 3‑40.
not properly secured in the
that the top tether be anchored.
child restraint. Secure the child A national or local law may require
properly following the instructions that the top tether be anchored.
that came with that child restraint.



Lower Anchors and installed using the top tether anchor
and the vehicle's safety belt.
Tethers for Children A child restraint must never be
(LATCH System) (Z06 and installed using only the top tether
ZR1 Models Only) and anchor. Refer to your child
restraint instructions and see
Some child restraints have a Securing Child Restraints on
LATCH system. As part of the page 3‑40 for instructions on
LATCH system, your child restraint securing your child restraint using
may have lower attachments and/or the vehicle's safety belts. A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
a top tether. The LATCH system
In order to use the top tether of the child restraint to the vehicle.
can help hold the child restraint in
anchors in your vehicle, you need A top tether anchor is built into
place during driving or in a crash.
a child restraint equipped with a the vehicle. The top tether
Some vehicles have lower and/or
top tether. The child restraint attachment (B) on the child restraint
top tether anchors designed to
manufacturer will provide you with connects to the top tether anchor in
secure a child restraint with lower
instructions on how to use the the vehicle in order to reduce the
attachments and/or a top tether.
child restraint and its top tether. forward movement and rotation of
Your vehicle does not have lower The following explains how to attach the child restraint during driving or in
anchors to accommodate lower a child restraint with the top tether in a crash.
attachments. Your vehicle does your vehicle. Your child restraint may have a
have a top tether anchor. If your
single tether (A) or a dual
child restraint has a top tether, make
tether (C). Either will have a single
sure your child restraint is properly
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.



Some top tether-equipped child Top Tether Anchor Locations
restraints are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have To assist you in locating the top
a top tether, and that the tether be tether anchors, the top tether anchor
attached. Be sure to read and follow symbol is located on the trim cover.
the instructions for your child
restraint.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
system secured in a rear seating positions with top tether anchors.
position.

The top tether anchor is located
under the cover behind the
passenger seat.



Securing a Child Restraint with Do not secure a child restraint in a
a Top Tether WARNING (Continued) position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
tighten. Buckle any unused safety that the top tether be attached, or if
{ WARNING belts behind the child restraint the instructions that come with the
so children cannot reach them. child restraint say that the top tether
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
Pull the shoulder belt all the way must be attached.
not attached to anchors, the child
out of the retractor to set the lock,
restraint will not be able to protect 1. Secure the child restraint
if the vehicle has one, after the
the child correctly. In a crash, the using the vehicle's safety belt.
child restraint has been installed.
child could be seriously injured or See Securing Child Restraints
killed. Install a LATCH-type on page 3‑40.
child restraint properly using the Notice: Do not let the LATCH 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
anchors, or use the vehicle safety attachments rub against the recommends that the top tether
belts to secure the restraint, vehicle’s safety belts. This may be attached, attach and tighten
following the instructions that damage these parts. If necessary, the top tether to the top tether
came with the child restraint and move buckled safety belts to anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
the instructions in this manual. avoid rubbing the LATCH child restraint instructions and
attachments. the following steps:
Do not fold the empty rear seat 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
with a safety belt buckled.
{ WARNING This could damage the safety belt 2.2. Press the ribbed area of the
or the seat. Unbuckle and return trim cover to open the cover
Children can be seriously injured the safety belt to its stowed and expose the anchor.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is position, before folding the seat.
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
(Continued)



2.3. Route, attach and tighten Replacing LATCH System
the top tether according to
your child restraint
Parts After a Crash
instructions and the
following instructions: { WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
If the position you are using secure the child restraint,
has a fixed headrest or resulting in serious injury or even
head restraint and you are death in a crash. To help make
using a dual tether, route sure the LATCH system is
the tether around the working properly after a crash,
headrest or head restraint. see your dealer to have the
If the position you are using 3. Before placing a child in the system inspected and any
has a fixed headrest or child restraint, make sure it is necessary replacements made
head restraint and you are securely held in place. To check, as soon as possible.
using a single tether, route grasp the child restraint at the
the tether over the headrest LATCH path and attempt to
or head restraint. If the vehicle has the LATCH system
move it side‐to‐side and and it was being used during a
back‐and‐forth. There should be crash, new LATCH system parts
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of may be needed.
movement for proper installation.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
This vehicle has airbags.
In addition, the vehicle has a A child in a rear-facing child guarantee that an airbag will not
passenger sensing system which is restraint can be seriously deploy under some unusual
designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front circumstance, even though it is
passenger frontal airbag and passenger airbag inflates. turned off.
seat-mounted side impact airbag This is because the back of the
(if equipped) under certain rear-facing child restraint would Secure rear-facing child restraints
conditions. See Passenger be very close to the inflating in a rear seat, even if the
Sensing System on page 3‑22 and airbag. A child in a forward-facing airbag is off. If you secure a
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator child restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in
on page 5‑18 for more information, injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move
including important safety passenger airbag inflates and the the front passenger seat as far
information. passenger seat is in a forward back as it will go. It is better to
A label on the sun visor says, position. secure the child restraint in a
“Never put a rear-facing child seat rear seat.
Even if the passenger sensing
in the front.” This is because the risk See Passenger Sensing System
to the rear-facing child is so great, system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no on page 3‑22 for additional
if the airbag deploys. information.
system is fail-safe. No one can
(Continued)
Rear-facing child restraints should
not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag(s) are off.



If the child restraint has the LATCH Do not secure a child seat in a When the passenger sensing
system, see Lower Anchors and position without a top tether anchor system has turned off the right
Tethers for Children (LATCH if a national or local law requires front passenger frontal airbag
System) (Z06 and ZR1 Models that the top tether be anchored, or if and seat-mounted side impact
Only) on page 3‑36 or Lower the instructions that come with the airbag (if equipped), the off
Anchors and Tethers for Children child restraint say that the top strap indicator on the passenger
(LATCH System) (Coupe and must be anchored. airbag status indicator should
Convertible Models Only) on In Canada, the law requires that light and stay lit when you start
page 3‑35 for how and where to forward-facing child restraints have the vehicle. See Passenger
install the child restraint using a top tether, and that the tether be Airbag Status Indicator on
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured attached. page 5‑18.
using a safety belt and it uses a top 2. Put the child restraint on
tether, see Lower Anchors and You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in the seat.
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) (Z06 and ZR1 Models this position. Follow the instructions 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Only) on page 3‑36 or Lower that came with the child restraint. the lap and shoulder portions of
Anchors and Tethers for Children 1. Move the seat as far back as it the vehicle’s safety belt through
(LATCH System) (Coupe and will go before securing the or around the restraint. The child
Convertible Models Only) on forward-facing child restraint. restraint instructions will show
page 3‑35 for top tether anchor you how.
locations.



4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 5 and 6.



7. If the child restraint has a top If the airbag or airbags are off, the
tether, follow the child restraint off indicator in the passenger airbag
manufacturer's instructions status indicator will come on and
regarding the use of the top stay on when the vehicle is started.
tether. See Lower Anchors and If a child restraint has been installed
Tethers for Children (LATCH and the on indicator is lit, see
System) (Z06 and ZR1 Models “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Only) on page 3‑36 or Lower Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
Anchors and Tethers for System on page 3‑22 for more
Children (LATCH System) information.
(Coupe and Convertible Models
Only) on page 3‑35 for more To remove the child restraint,
information. unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
8. Before placing a child in the If the top tether is attached to a top
child restraint, make sure it is tether anchor, disconnect it.
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt
to move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage Storage Rear Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 the lever. Use the key to lock and
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 unlock the lighted glove box.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Cupholders
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Convertible Shown, Coupe Similar
There are two storage
compartments in the floor of the
hatch/trunk area; pull up to open the
cover.
For the Z06 and ZR1, the right
compartment stores the battery and
cannot be used for storage.
Notice: Do not store heavy or
Slide the cover to access the sharp objects in the rear storage
cupholders. compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. The objects
could damage the underbody.


4-2 Storage

Rear Trunk Partition Additional Storage
For vehicles with the power Features
convertible top option only, there is
a trunk partition to keep cargo from
getting in the way of the convertible Cargo Cover
top. The trunk partition must be in For vehicles with this feature, the
place for the convertible top to security shade can provide hidden
move. If the trunk partition is not storage in the rear area of the
properly in place, a message will vehicle. The shade is also helpful
display. See Convertible Top in blocking the glare from the
Messages on page 5‑37 for more removable roof when it is stored in
information. the rear compartment.
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted Pull the divider up and snap it onto
board with a horizontal flap that can place on both sides of the trunk.
be attached to the top of the trunk to
divide the storage compartment. Center Console Storage
It can be stored flat when not in use. To use this storage area, pull the
cover up on the driver side front
edge of the center console and
swing it to the passenger side.
Some vehicles might also have
input jacks for auxiliary audio
devices. See Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑16.


Storage 4-3

Using the Cargo Cover

3. Grasp the loop at the rear center 4. Push the loop to the top of the
of the shade and wrap it around striker (base plate).
1. Hook the elastic loops on the the striker assembly.
front corners (A) of the shade to Convenience Net
the T-nuts located on the front
corners of the rear hatch frame. The vehicle may have a
convenience net located in the rear,
2. Hook the elastic loops on the to store small loads as far forward
rear corners (B) of the shade to as possible. The net should not be
the hooks recessed inside the used to store heavy loads.
rear hatch frame, near the rear
corners.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments and Boost Gauge (ZR1) . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine Oil Pressure
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Engine Coolant Temperature
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-31
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages
Controls Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-17
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17 Battery Voltage and
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Charging Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-36
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-37
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-38
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Cooling System
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40
Warning Lights, Gauges, and One-to-Four Shift Light Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-41
Indicators (Manual Transmission) . . . . . 5-22 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-42
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-23 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Active Handling System Ride Control System
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-48
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Anti-theft Alarm System
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-49 Controls Telescopic Steering Column
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Steering Wheel
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-52 Adjustment
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-53
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-62
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 For vehicles with this feature, the
Universal Remote System telescopic steering column control
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68 is located on the right side of the
steering column.
The lever is located on the left side
of the steering column. To adjust the telescopic steering
column:
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Push the switch forward to move
1. Pull the lever toward you.
the wheel away from you.
2. Move the steering wheel up
2. Pull the switch toward you to
or down.
move the wheel closer to you.
3. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.



The telescopic steering column b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): To change radio stations:
position can be stored with your Press to silence the vehicle
memory settings. See “Memory
. Press w or x to go to the
speakers only. Press again to turn
Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Wheel” next or to the previous radio
the sound on.
under Power Seat Adjustment on station and stay there.
page 3‑2 for more information. For vehicles with Bluetooth or The radio only seeks stations
OnStar® systems press and with a strong signal that are in
Steering Wheel Controls hold b / g for longer than the selected band.
two seconds to interact with those . Press and hold w or x for
systems. See Bluetooth on
two seconds until SCAN displays
page 7‑16 or OnStar Overview on
and a beep sounds to scan
stations. The radio goes to a
c (Phone On Hook): Press to station, plays for a few seconds,
reject an incoming call, or end a then goes to the next station.
current call. Press again to stop scanning.
w x (Next/Previous): Press to . Press and hold w or x for
change radio stations or select four seconds until PRESET
tracks on a CD. SCAN displays and a beep
sounds to scan presets.
The radio goes to a station,
plays for a few seconds, then
For vehicles with steering wheel goes to the next station.
controls, some audio controls can Press again to stop scanning.
be adjusted at the steering wheel.



To select tracks on a CD: Horn x (Delay Adjustment): Use for
. Press w or x to go to the next a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the
Press near or on the horn symbols
intermittent adjust band down for a
or to the previous track when a on the steering wheel pad to sound
longer delay or up for a shorter
CD is playing. the horn.
delay. The wiper speed can only be
. Press and hold w or x for manually adjusted when the lever is
more than two seconds to scan
Windshield Wiper/Washer in this position.
the current CD. The CD goes to 9 (Off): Use to turn off the
the next track, plays the first windshield wipers.
10 seconds, then goes to the
next track. Press again to stop 8 (Mist): Move all the way down
scanning. to mist and release for a single
wiping cycle. The windshield wipers
. Press and hold w or x for will stop after one wipe. Hold the
more than four seconds to scan band on mist longer for more wipes.
The windshield wiper/washer lever
all of the CDs loaded. The CD is located on the right side of the Heavy snow or ice can overload the
goes to the next CD, plays the steering column. wipers. If this occurs, a circuit
first 10 seconds of each track, breaker will stop the wipers until the
then goes to the next CD. Move the lever to the following
motor cools. Clear all ice and snow
Press again to stop scanning. positions:
from the wiper blades before using
+ e − e (Volume): Press to 1 (High Speed): Use for fast them. If frozen to the windshield,
wipes. carefully loosen them or thaw them.
increase or to decrease the radio
volume. 6 (Low Speed): Use for Damaged wiper blades should be
slow wipes. replaced. See Wiper Blade
1 to 6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Replacement on page 10‑43.
Press to play stations that are 3 (Delay): Use to set a delay
programmed on the radio preset between wipes.
pushbuttons.



Windshield Washer For information on the correct letter C or CAL appears in the
washer fluid to use, see Washer compass window, the compass
Press and hold the button at the end
Fluid on page 10‑34 and needs calibration.
of the lever to spray washer fluid on
Recommended Fluids and Depending on the mirror, in order to
the windshield. The washer will
Lubricants on page 11‑12. calibrate, CAL must be displayed
spray until the button is released.
The wipers will continue to clear the in the mirror compass windows.
window for about six seconds after Compass If CAL is not displayed, press P for
the button is released and then stop Compass Operation several seconds or until CAL is
or return to your preset speed. displayed.
With the compass feature on, each
time the vehicle is started, the If the compass has map lamps, it
{ WARNING compass will take a few seconds to can be placed in calibration mode
adjust and display the current by pressing and holding the left map
In freezing weather, do not use
compass heading. For example, light button until a C appears on the
the washer until the windshield is
NE is displayed for north-east. compass display.
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the Compass Calibration The mirror compass can be
windshield, blocking your vision. calibrated by driving the vehicle in
Press P once to turn the compass circles at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less until
display on or off. the display reads a direction.
If the fluid in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir is low a message may If after several seconds the display Compass Variance
appear on the Driver Information does not show a compass heading,
The mirror is set to zone eight.
Center (DIC) display, see Washer there may be a strong magnetic
If you do not live in zone eight or
Fluid Messages on page 5‑53. It will field interfering with the compass.
drive out of the area, the compass
take 15 seconds after the bottle is Interference can be caused by a
variance needs to be changed to
refilled for this message to turn off. magnetic antenna mount, note pad
the appropriate zone.
holder, or similar object. If the



To adjust for compass variance: Clock Remove the cover to access and
1. Find your current location and replace when not in use.
To set the clock:
variance zone number on the
zone map that follows. 1. Press and hold H until the { WARNING
correct hour displays.
Power is always supplied to the
2. Press and hold M until the
correct minute displays. outlets. Do not leave electrical
equipment plugged in when the
The clock mode automatically times vehicle is not in use because the
out with the changed display format vehicle could catch fire and cause
set as the current default setting. injury or death.
To set the clock on a navigation
system, see the separate navigation Notice: Leaving electrical
manual. equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
Power Outlets the vehicle is off will drain the
The accessory power outlet can be battery. Always unplug electrical
2. Press and hold P until a Z and equipment when not in use and
a zone number displays. The used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. do not plug in equipment that
compass is now in zone mode. exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
3. Once the zone number displays, The accessory power outlet is rating.
located inside the center console
press P repeatedly until you storage compartment, on the
reach the correct zone number. forward left side.
Stop pressing P and the mirror
returns to normal operation.



Certain electrical accessories may Cigarette Lighter Ashtrays
not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could To use the cigarette lighter, push it The ashtray and cigarette lighter are
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. in all the way and let go. When it is located on the instrument panel, in
If a problem is experienced, see ready, it will pop back out by itself. front of the shift lever. To use the
your dealer. Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter ashtray, press on the indentation at
in while it is heating does not let the top of the door.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper the lighter back away from the Notice: If papers, pins, or other
installation instructions included heating element when it is hot. flammable items are put in the
with the equipment. See Add-On Damage from overheating can ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑54. occur to the lighter or heating smoking materials could ignite
element, or a fuse could be them and possibly damage the
It is recommended that a qualified blown. Do not hold a cigarette vehicle. Never put flammable
technician or dealer be seen for the lighter in while it is heating. items in the ashtray.
proper installation of your
equipment. Loose objects, such as paper clips,
can lodge behind and beneath the
Notice: Hanging heavy ashtray lid and prevent movement of
equipment from the power the lid. You should avoid putting
outlet can cause damage not small, loose objects near the
covered by the vehicle warranty. ashtray.
The power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only,
such as cell phone charge cords.



Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.



Instrument Cluster

English Coupe and Convertible Shown, Metric Similar



Z06– English Shown, Metric Similar



ZR1– English Shown, Metric Similar



Speedometer Notice: Fuel shuts off at about An arrow on the fuel gauge
6500 rpm for the base model, indicates the side of the vehicle the
The speedometer shows the speed 7000 rpm for the Z06 model, and fuel door is on.
in either kilometers per hour (km/h) 6600 rpm for the ZR1 model. If the
or miles per hour (mph). For more When the needle approaches the
vehicle continues to be driven at low fuel symbol, a chime sounds
information see “Personal Options” the fuel shut off rpm, the engine
under Vehicle Personalization on and LOW FUEL appears on the
could be damaged. Be sure to Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 5‑54. operate the vehicle below the fuel display. There is still a little fuel left,
shut off rpm or reduce the but the vehicle's fuel tank should be
Odometer vehicle's rpm quickly when the filled soon.
To read the odometer with the fuel shuts off.
Press the RESET button to
ignition off, turn on the parking
Fuel Gauge acknowledge a DIC message(s).
lamps.
Pressing the RESET button also
If the vehicle needs a new odometer turns off a DIC message but the
installed, the mileage total of the LOW FUEL message comes on
new odometer will be set to the again in 10 minutes if fuel is not
original kilometers (miles) of the old added to the vehicle.
odometer. See your dealer if the
odometer must be replaced in the
vehicle.

Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm). The fuel gauge shows how much
fuel the vehicle has left while the
engine is on.



Here are five things that some See “DIC Operation and Displays”
owners ask about. All these things in Driver Information Center (DIC)
are normal and do not indicate that on page 5‑26 for more information.
anything is wrong with the fuel
gauge. Boost Gauge (ZR1)
. At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads the full.
. It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated half
English
full, but it took a little more or
less than half of the tank's This gauge indicates vacuum during
capacity to fill the tank. light to moderate throttle and boost
. under heavier throttle.
The gauge pointer may move
while cornering, braking or It displays the air pressure level in
speeding up. Metric the intake manifold before it enters
the engine's combustion chamber.
. The gauge may not indicate the
tank is empty when the ignition The gauge is automatically centered
is turned off. at zero every time the engine is
started. Actual vacuum or boost is
. The gauge reading may change
displayed from this zero point.
slightly within the first several
Changes in ambient pressure,
minutes after starting the
such as driving in mountains and
vehicle.
changing weather, will slightly
change the zero reading.



Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge

English Metric — Z06 and ZR1 Models

Metric



Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Oil pressure should be 140 to
maintenance can damage the 550 kPa (20 to 80 psi). In certain
engine. Driving with the engine situations such as long, extended
oil low can also damage the idles on hot days, it could read as
engine. The repairs would not be low as 40 kPa (6 psi) and still be
covered by the vehicle warranty. considered normal. Oil pressure
Check the oil level as soon as may exceed 689 kPa (100 psi)
possible. Add oil if required, when first started or when
but if the oil level is within the accelerating. It may vary with
operating range and the oil engine speed, outside temperature
pressure is still low, have the and oil viscosity, but readings above
vehicle serviced. Always follow the shaded area show the normal
English— Z06 and ZR1 Models the maintenance schedule for operating range. Readings in the
changing engine oil. shaded area tell you that the engine
is low on oil, or that you might have
{ WARNING The engine oil pressure gauge
shows the engine oil pressure some other oil problem. See Engine
in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds Oil on page 10‑14.
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can per square inch) when the engine is The engine oil pressure can also
become so hot that it catches fire. running. be displayed using the GAGES
Someone could be burned. Check button on the Driver Information
the oil as soon as possible and Center (DIC). See Driver Information
have the vehicle serviced. Center (DIC) on page 5‑26.



Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gauge
Temperature Gauge

English
This gauge shows the engine Base and Z06
coolant temperature. If the gauge
Metric The voltmeter shows the voltage
pointer moves into the shaded area,
the engine is too hot. output of the battery. It shows the
voltage output of the charging
This means that the engine coolant system while the engine is running.
has overheated. If the vehicle has
been operating under normal driving The reading changes as the rate of
conditions, pull off the road, stop the charge changes (with engine speed,
vehicle and turn off the engine as for example), but if the voltmeter
soon as possible. reads at 9 volts or below, the
instrument panel cluster and other
See Engine Overheating on systems may shut down. The Driver
page 10‑30 for more information. Information Center (DIC) reads
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW when
the vehicle is at 10 volts or below.



Have it checked right away. Airbag Readiness Light
Driving with the voltmeter reading at { WARNING
10 volts or below could drain the The system checks the airbag's
battery and disable the vehicle. electrical system for possible If the airbag readiness light stays
malfunctions. If the light stays on, on after the vehicle is started or
Safety Belt Reminders it indicates there is an electrical comes on while driving, it means
problem. The system check includes the airbag system might not be
Safety Belt Reminder Light the airbag sensor(s), passenger working properly. The airbags in
sensing system, the pretensioners, the vehicle might not inflate in a
When the engine is started, a chime the airbag modules, the wiring, and
sounds for several seconds to crash, or they could even inflate
the crash sensing and diagnostic without a crash. To help avoid
remind a driver to fasten the safety module. For more information on the
belt, unless the driver safety belt is injury, have the vehicle serviced
airbag system, see Airbag System right away.
already buckled. on page 3‑15.

If there is a problem with the airbag
system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See Vehicle Messages on
The safety belt light comes on and
stays on for several seconds, then The airbag readiness light flashes
flashes for several more. for a few seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does not come
This chime and light are repeated if on then, have it fixed immediately.
the driver remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled,
neither the chime nor the light
comes on.



Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the If, after several seconds, both status
passenger airbag status indicator indicator lights remain on, or if there
Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol are no lights at all, there may be a
The vehicle has the passenger for on and off, for several seconds problem with the lights or the
sensing system. See Passenger as a system check. Then, after passenger sensing system.
Sensing System on page 3‑22 several more seconds, the status See your dealer for service.
for important safety information. indicator will light either ON or OFF,
The rearview mirror has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
or the on or off symbol, to let you
know the status of the front
{ WARNING
outboard passenger frontal and If the airbag readiness light ever
seat-mounted side impact airbags. comes on and stays on, it means
If the word ON or the on symbol is that something may be wrong
lit on the passenger airbag status with the airbag system. To help
indicator, it means that the front avoid injury to yourself or others,
outboard passenger frontal airbag have the vehicle serviced right
United States and seat-mounted side impact away. See Airbag Readiness
airbag are allowed to inflate. Light on page 5‑17 for more
If the word OFF or the off symbol is information, including important
lit on the passenger airbag status safety information.
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and
Canada and Mexico seat-mounted side impact airbag.



Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by these systems could lead to
the system before any problem is costly repairs not covered
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light by the vehicle warranty.
A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage This could also result in a
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system assists failure to pass a required
Generation) monitors the operation the service technician in correctly Emission Inspection/Maintenance
of the vehicle to ensure emissions diagnosing any malfunction. test. See Accessories and
are at acceptable levels, to produce Notice: If the vehicle is Modifications on page 10‑3.
a cleaner environment. This light continually driven with this light This light comes on during a
comes on when the vehicle is on, the emission controls might malfunction in one of two ways:
placed in Service Only Mode, as a not work as well, the vehicle fuel
check to show it is working. If it Light Flashing: A misfire condition
economy might not be as good, has been detected. A misfire
does not, have the vehicle serviced and the engine might not run as
by your dealer. See Ignition increases vehicle emissions and
smoothly. This could lead to could damage the emission control
Positions on page 9‑20 for more costly repairs that might not be
information. system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
covered by the vehicle warranty. and service might be required.
Notice: Modifications made to The following can prevent more
the engine, transmission, serious damage to the vehicle:
exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement . Reduce vehicle speed.
of the original tires with other . Avoid hard accelerations.
If the malfunction indicator lamp than those of the same Tire
comes on and stays on while the Performance Criteria (TPC) can
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
engine is running, this indicates that affect the vehicle's emission
there is an OBD II problem and controls and can cause this light
service is required. to come on. Modifications to



If the light continues to flash, stop
. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
and park the vehicle. Turn the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, the engine not to run as
and restart the engine. If the light is efficiently as designed and may Some local governments may have
still flashing, follow the previous cause: stalling after start-up, programs to inspect the on-vehicle
steps and see your dealer for stalling when the vehicle is emission control equipment.
service as soon as possible. changed into gear, misfiring, For the inspection, the emission
hesitation on acceleration, system test equipment is
Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration. connected to the vehicle’s Data
control system malfunction has These conditions might go away Link Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up.
Diagnosis and service might be
required. If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
The following may correct an fuel brand used. It will require at
emission system malfunction: least one full tank of the proper
. Check that the fuel cap is fully fuel to turn the light off.
installed. See Filling the Tank on See Recommended Fuel on The DLC is under the instrument
page 9‑51. The diagnostic page 9‑48. panel to the left of the steering
system can determine if the wheel. See your dealer if assistance
fuel cap has been left off or If none of the above have made is needed.
improperly installed. A loose or the light turn off, your dealer can
missing fuel cap allows fuel to check the vehicle. The dealer has The vehicle may not pass
evaporate into the atmosphere. the proper test equipment and inspection if:
A few driving trips with the cap diagnostic tools to fix any . The malfunction indicator lamp is
properly installed should turn the mechanical or electrical problems on with the engine running, or if
light off. that might have developed. the vehicle is placed in Service
Only Mode and the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come



on. See your dealer for Brake System Warning
assistance in verifying proper
Light
{ WARNING
operation of the malfunction
indicator lamp. The vehicle brake system consists The brake system might not be
of two hydraulic circuits. If one working properly if the brake
. The OBD II (On-Board
circuit is not working, the remaining system warning light is on.
Diagnostics) system Driving with the brake system
determines that critical emission circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking warning light on can lead to a
control systems have not been crash. If the light is still on after
completely diagnosed. The performance, both circuits need to
be working. the vehicle has been pulled off
vehicle would be considered not
the road and carefully stopped,
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has have the vehicle towed for
recently been replaced or run service.
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical If this warning light stays on after
emission control systems during the engine is started, the parking
normal driving. This can take Metric English
brake may still be set or there could
several days of routine driving. be a brake problem. Refer to
This light comes on briefly while
If this has been done and the Parking Brake on page 9‑36 to
starting the engine. If it does not
vehicle still does not pass the see if it is set. If the parking brake
come on, have it fixed so it is ready
inspection for lack of OBD II is not set, have the brake system
to warn if there is a problem.
system readiness, your dealer inspected right away.
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.



If the light comes on while driving If it does not, have the vehicle One-to-Four Shift Light
and a CHECK BRAKE FLUID serviced by your dealer. If the
message shows on the DIC, pull off system is working normally the
(Manual Transmission)
the road and stop carefully. The indicator light then goes off.
pedal may be harder to push or the If the ABS light stays on, turn the
pedal may go closer to the floor. ignition off. If the light comes on
It may take longer to stop. If the while driving, stop as soon as it is
light is still on, have the vehicle safely possible and turn the ignition
towed for service. See Towing the off. Then start the engine again to When this light comes on, the
Vehicle on page 10‑82 and Brake reset the system. If the ABS light vehicle can only be shifted from
System Messages on page 5‑36 for stays on, or comes on again while 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) instead of
more information. driving, the vehicle needs service. 1 (First) to 2 (Second).
If the regular brake system warning The shift must be completed into
Antilock Brake System light is not on, the vehicle still has 4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.
(ABS) Warning Light brakes, but not antilock brakes. This helps the vehicle get the best
If the regular brake system warning possible fuel economy.
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a After shifting to 4 (Fourth), the
problem with the regular brakes. vehicle can be downshifted to a
See Brake System Warning Light on lower gear.
page 5‑21. Notice: Forcing the shift lever
into any gear except 4 (Fourth)
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light
System (ABS), this light comes on comes on may damage the
briefly when the engine is started. transmission. Shift only from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the
light comes on.



This light comes on when: This light and the Active Handling This light also comes on while the
. The engine coolant temperature light come on when Active Handling vehicle is in the Competitive
is higher than 76°C (169°F). is turned off. Driving Mode.
. The vehicle is going 24 to If the TCS is off, wheelspin is not For the ZR1 this light comes on
31 km/h (15 to 19 mph). limited. Adjust driving accordingly. when Performance Traction mode is
See Active Handling System on activated, along with DIC messages
. The vehicle is at 21 percent for the five traction modes.
throttle or less. page 9‑38 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for This light comes on when the
more information. Active Handling system is turned
Traction Off Light off. If Active Handling is off, the
StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System (TCS) is
also off.
If the TCS is off, the system does
not assist in controlling the vehicle.
Turn on the TCS and the Active
Handling systems and the warning
light turns off.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not, See Active Handling System on
have the vehicle serviced by your This light comes on briefly as the page 9‑38 and Traction Control
dealer. If the system is working engine is started. If the light does System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for
normally, the indicator light then not, have the vehicle serviced by more information.
turns off. your dealer. If the system is working
normally the light goes off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the traction control button.



Active Handling System Control System is off and the When the Light Is On Steady
Active Handling System does not
Light assist with controlling the vehicle.
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
When the Active Handling System is underinflated.
turned back on, the light turns off, a A Driver Information Center (DIC)
chime sounds, and the TRACTION tire pressure message may also
SYSTEM AND ACTIVE display. See Vehicle Messages on
HANDLING– ON message displays page 5‑35 for more information.
The Active Handling System light in the DIC. Stop as soon as possible, and
comes on briefly while starting the See Ride Control System Messages inflate the tires to the pressure value
engine. If it does not, have the on page 5‑44 for more information. shown on the Tire and Loading
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Information label. See Tire Pressure
If the light stays on or comes on Tire Pressure Light on page 10‑62 for more information.
while driving, a chime sounds and a When the Light Flashes First and
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING Then Is On Steady
SYSTEM message appears on the
DIC and the vehicle need service. If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
When the Active Handling System problem with the TPMS. If the
is turned off, the light comes on, problem is not corrected, the light
a chime sounds, and the For vehicles with the Tire Pressure will come on at every ignition
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE Monitor System (TPMS), this light cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor
HANDLING– OFF message comes on briefly when the engine is Operation on page 10‑66 for more
displays in the DIC. The Traction started. It provides information information.
about tire pressures and the TPMS.



Security Light For information regarding this light The light goes out when the fog
and the vehicle's security system, lamps are turned off. See Fog
see Anti-theft Alarm System on Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
page 2‑14. information.

High-Beam On Light Lamps On Reminder

The security light should come on
briefly as the engine is started. If the
system is working normally, the
indicator light turns off. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced This light comes on when the
by your dealer. high-beam headlamps are in use. This light comes on whenever the
parking lamps are on.
If the light stays on and the engine See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
does not start, there could be a Changer on page 6‑2 for more See Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
problem with the theft-deterrent information. on page 6‑2 for more information.
system.
This light is also used to indicate the Front Fog Lamp Light
status of the anti-theft alarm system
when the ignition is turned off. The
light will flash rapidly if the alarm
system is arming and one or more
of the monitored entry points is not
closed. The light will stay on if the
The fog lamp light comes on when
alarm is arming and all entry points
the fog lamps are in use.
are closed.



Information Displays on page 9‑27 and Head-Up Display 2 (Gauges): Press this button to
(HUD) on page 5‑31 for more display gauge information like oil
information. pressure and temperature, coolant
Driver Information temperature, automatic transmission
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
Center (DIC) has different modes which can be fluid temperature, if equipped,
The Driver Information Center (DIC) accessed by pressing the following battery voltage, and front/rear tire
display is located on the instrument buttons located on the instrument pressures.
panel cluster and shows driver panel, to the right of the instrument TRIP: Press this button to display
personalization features and panel cluster. your total and trip distance driven,
warning/status messages. the elapsed time function, your
The DIC comes on when the ignition average speed, and the engine
is turned on. After displaying oil life.
CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the OPTION: Press this button to
DIC shows the information that was choose personal options that are
last displayed before the engine available on your vehicle,
was turned off. depending on the options your
If a problem is detected, a warning vehicle is equipped with, such as
message appears on the DIC door locks, easy entry seats, and
display. See Vehicle Messages on language.
page 5‑35 for more information. RESET: Press this button, used
along with the other buttons, to
DIC Operation and Displays
reset system functions, select
Depending on the features on the . 4 (Fuel): Press this button to personal options, and turn off or
vehicle, the drive gear may display display fuel information such as fuel acknowledge messages on the DIC.
on the DIC. See “Manual Paddle economy and range.
Shift” under Automatic Transmission



Fuel Button Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Press the fuel button again to
Instantaneous fuel economy reflects display the range, such as:
The fuel button displays average
only the fuel economy that the . RANGE 48 km or
fuel economy and instantaneous
vehicle has right now and will
fuel economy, calculated for your . RANGE 30 MI
change frequently as driving
specific driving conditions, and
conditions change. Unlike average If the LOW FUEL warning is
range information.
fuel economy, this menu item displayed or if RANGE is less than
Average Fuel Economy: The cannot be reset. 64 km (40 miles), the display will
average fuel economy is viewed as read RANGE LOW.
Press the fuel button again to
a long-term approximation of your
display instantaneous fuel economy, The fuel economy data used to
overall driving conditions. You
such as: determine fuel range is an average
should reset the average fuel
economy display every time you . INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY of recent driving conditions. As your
refuel. If you press the RESET 11.7 L/100 km or driving conditions change, this data
button in this mode while you are is gradually updated automatically.
. INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY
driving, the system will reset this 20.1 MPG If the vehicle has been idling for a
display and begin figuring fuel long time, the range displayed on
economy from that point in time. Fuel Range: The range calculates the DIC could be abnormally low.
the remaining distance you can The vehicle must be driven
Press the fuel button to display drive without refueling. It is based
average fuel economy, such as: 8 to 16 km (5 to 10 miles) to get an
on fuel economy and the fuel accurate reading.
. AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY remaining in the tank.
11.7 L/100 km or
. AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
20.1 MPG



Gauges Button If the oil temperature is low, Transmission Fluid
the display will show OIL Temperature: If you have an
The gauges button displays oil
TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil automatic transmission vehicle,
pressure, oil temperature, coolant
temperature is high, the display will this display shows the automatic
temperature, transmission fluid
show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH. transmission fluid temperature.
temperature for automatic
transmission vehicles only, Coolant Temperature: This Press the gauges button again to
battery voltage, and tire pressure display shows the engine coolant display the automatic transmission
information. temperature. fluid temperature, such as:
Oil Pressure: This display shows Press the gauges button again to . TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C or
the oil pressure. display the coolant temperature, . TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F
such as:
Press the gauges button to display If the transmission fluid temperature
the oil pressure, such as: . COOLANT is low, the display will show TRANS
TEMPERATURE 51°C or FLUID TEMP LOW. If the
. OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa or
. COOLANT transmission fluid temperature is
. OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI
TEMPERATURE 123°F high, the display will show TRANS
Oil Temperature: This display FLUID TEMP HIGH.
If the coolant temperature is low,
shows the oil temperature.
the display will show COOLANT Battery Voltage: This display
Press the gauges button again to TEMPERATURE LOW. If the shows the current battery voltage.
display the oil temperature, such as: coolant temperature is high, the Press the gauges button again to
. OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C or display will show COOLANT display the battery voltage, such as:
TEMPERATURE HIGH.
. OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F . BATTERY VOLTAGE
13.5 VOLTS



Tire Pressure: This display shows Odometer: The odometer shows The trip odometers are able to
the tire pressure for each tire. how far your vehicle has been display up to 3217.9 km (1999.9 mi).
Press the gauges button again to driven in either kilometers or miles. This display will roll over to 0.0
display the tire pressure for the front Press the TRIP button to display if the maximum displayed miles or
tires, such as: odometer readings, such as: kilometers are reached.
. FRONT TIRE PRESSURES
. ODOMETER 20008 km or There is also a miles since last
L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or . ODOMETER 12345 MI ignition feature that displays the
number of kilometers (miles) driven
. FRONT TIRE PRESSURES You can also display the odometer since you last started the vehicle.
L 34 PSI R 33 PSI by turning on the parking lamps. Press and hold the RESET button
Press the gauges button again to Trip Odometers: There are two trip for three seconds, then release it.
display the tire pressure for the rear odometers. Press the TRIP button The kilometers (miles) since the last
tires, such as: to display TRIP ODOMETER A ignition cycle will be set into the trip
readings and press the button again odometer.
. REAR TIRE PRESSURES
L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or to display TRIP ODOMETER B Elapsed Timer: Press the
readings, such as: TRIP button until ELAPSED
. REAR TIRE PRESSURES . TIMER is displayed, such as
L 34 PSI R 33 PSI TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km or
ELAPSED TIMER .00.
. TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI
TRIP Button When the ignition is in on, the
. TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km or DIC can be used as a stopwatch.
The TRIP button displays the
odometer, trip distance, elapsed
. TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI The display can show hours,
time, average speed, and oil life minutes, and seconds.
Both of the trip odometers can be
remaining information. used simultaneously. The trip
odometers can be reset by pressing
the RESET button on the DIC.



The elapsed time indicator will Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP See Maintenance Schedule on
record up to 23 hours, 59 minutes, button until the engine oil life is page 11‑3 and Engine Oil on
and 59 seconds, then it will reset displayed, such as OIL LIFE page 10‑14 for more information.
to zero and continue counting. REMAINING 89%.
The display appears as ELAPSED OPTION Button
This is an estimate of the engine
TIMER .00 in the elapsed time oil's remaining useful life. It will The OPTION button allows you
function. show 100% when the system is to access the PERSONAL
You can start or stop the elapsed reset after an oil change. It will OPTIONS menu and customize
time by pressing the RESET button. alert you to change the oil on a the personalization settings on
To reset the elapsed time to zero, schedule consistent with your your vehicle. See Vehicle
press the RESET button for driving conditions. Personalization on page 5‑54 for
three seconds while the timer is more information.
When the remaining oil life is low,
displayed. the system will alert you with the RESET Button
Pressing and holding the RESET message CHANGE ENGINE OIL. The RESET button, used along
button for at least 10 seconds will Remember, you must reset the with other buttons, will reset
reset the timer display to the time engine oil life system yourself after system functions and turn off or
since last ignition cycle. each oil change. It will not reset acknowledge messages on
Average Speed: Press the TRIP itself. To reset the system, see the DIC.
button until the average speed is Engine Oil Life System on
displayed, such as: page 10‑19. Be careful not to
. AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h or reset the engine oil life system
accidentally at any time other than
. AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH when the oil has just been changed.
Press and hold the RESET button to It cannot be reset accurately until
reset to 0.0 km/h (mph). the next oil change.


. High-Beam Indicator Symbol . Check Gauges Warning
Head-Up Display (HUD)
. Tachometer . Engine Coolant Temperature
{ WARNING . Manual Paddle Shift Gear Gauge
Indicator (If Equipped) . Transmission Fluid Temperature
If the HUD image is too bright, Gauge, (Automatic Transmission
or too high in your field of view, it These displays on the HUD are
for use when using the manual Vehicles Only)
may take you more time to see
paddle shift controls to shift the . Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
things you need to see when it is
transmission. See “Manual . Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
dark outside. Be sure to keep the Paddle Shift” in Automatic
HUD image dim and placed low in Transmission on page 9‑27. . G-Force Gauge
your field of view.
. Shift Light . Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
This light is used for . Audio Functions, Street
For vehicles with the Head-Up
performance driving to Mode Only
Display (HUD), you can see some
of the driver information that indicate that the vehicle's best . Navigation, Only with Navigation
appears on the instrument panel performance level has been Radio, Turn-by-Turn Guidance.
cluster. reached to shift the transmission Street Mode Only
into the next higher gear.
The information may be displayed in An arrow pointing up will light
English or metric units and appears up on the display just prior to
as an image focused out toward reaching the engine fuel cut-off
the front of the vehicle. The HUD mode. This cut-off is about
consists of the following information: 6,500 rpm for the LS3 engine,
. Speedometer 6,600 rpm for the LS9 & ZR1
engines, and 7,000 rpm for the
. Turn Signal Indicators LS7 engine.



There are three HUD modes that
can be viewed in the HUD display.
Press the MODE button to scroll
through these modes in the
following order:

English English

English

Metric Metric
Track Mode 1 supports the G-Force Track Mode 2 supports G-Force
gauge and minor gauges with a gauges, boost gauge w/ZR1, and
circular tachometer. minor gauges with a linear
tachometer.
Metric
When the desired HUD display has
Street Mode supports audio and been selected, release the MODE
navigation functions with your button.
choice of tachometer settings.



Within each mode, the display, can the maximum G gauge digits you may miss something important,
be further customized by pressing (X.XX G) and corresponding such as a warning light. Under
the PAGE button. Pressing this G gauge bar will overwrite the important warning conditions, the
button in each mode will turn off and current G value. CHECK GAGES warning will
on the following: illuminate in the HUD. View your
. Street Mode — No tachometer, Driver Information Center (DIC) for
circular tachometer, and linear more information.
tachometer.
. Track Modes 1 and 2 — No
minor gauge, coolant
temperature, transmission oil English
temperature (Automatic
Transmission only), engine
oil temperature, engine oil
pressure, and boost gauge.
While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the
maximum G value achieved
during the current ignition cycle Metric
can be displayed by pressing
and holding the PAGE button. Be sure to continue scanning the
displays, controls, and driving The HUD controls are located to the
The maximum G display will be left of the steering wheel.
shown until the PAGE button is environment just as you would in a
released. The maximum G value vehicle without HUD. If you never
display will be identical to the look at the instrument panel cluster,
normal G value display, except



To adjust the HUD so it can be seen 2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable The HUD information can be
properly, do the following: driving position. If your seat displayed in one of six languages
1. Start the engine and press the position changes, the HUD may including English, Spanish, French,
HUD dimmer control all the way need to be re-adjusted. German, Italian, or Japanese.
up by pressing the (+) button. 3. Press the up or down arrows to The speedometer can be displayed
center the HUD image in in either English or metric units.
The brightness of the HUD
image is determined by the light your view. To change the language and unit
conditions in the direction the The HUD image can only be selections, see “Entering the
vehicle is facing and where you adjusted up and down, not side Personal Options Menu” under
have the HUD dimmer control to side. Vehicle Personalization on
set. If you are facing a dark page 5‑54.
4. Press the dimmer control
object or a heavily shaded area, downward until the HUD image Clean the inside of the windshield
the HUD may anticipate that you is no brighter than necessary. as needed to remove any dirt or film
are entering a dark area and that reduces the sharpness or clarity
may begin to dim. To turn HUD off, press and hold of the HUD image.
the (–) button until the HUD display
It is possible for sunlight to enter turns off. To clean the HUD, spray household
the HUD making it difficult to glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth.
see the image. The display will If the sun comes out or it becomes Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
return to normal when the cloudy, the HUD brightness may it. Do not spray cleaner directly on
sunlight is no longer entering need to be adjusted again using the lens because the cleaner could
the HUD. the dimmer control. Polarized leak into the unit.
sunglasses could make the HUD
image harder to see.



If the ignition is on and the HUD Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and
image cannot be seen, check to
see if: Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
indicate the status of the vehicle or BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
. Something is covering the
some action may be needed to
HUD unit. This message displays when the
correct a condition. Multiple
. The HUD dimmer control is messages may appear one after vehicle has detected that the battery
adjusted properly. another. voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
. The HUD image is adjusted to The messages that do not require system starts reducing certain
the proper height. immediate action can be features of the vehicle that you may
. Ambient light is low, in the acknowledged and cleared by be able to notice. At the point that
direction the vehicle is facing. pressing the RESET button. features are disabled, this message
. A fuse is blown. See Fuses and The messages that require is displayed. It means that the
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑47. immediate action cannot be vehicle is trying to save the charge
cleared until that action is in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
Keep in mind that the windshield is performed. All messages should be accessories to allow the battery to
part of the HUD system. See taken seriously and clearing the recharge.
Windshield Replacement on messages does not correct the
page 10‑43. problem. BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑16.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑16.



SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM Brake System Messages CHECK BRAKE FLUID
If this message displays while you ABS (Antilock Brake System) This message displays, a sound
are driving, there may be a problem will be heard, and the brake
with the electrical charging system.
ACTIVE system warning light on the
It could mean that there is a loose This message displays when the instrument panel cluster turns on
or broken drive belt or that there is Antilock Brake System (ABS) is if the ignition is on to inform the
another electrical problem. Have the adjusting brake pressure to help driver that the brake fluid level is
vehicle checked right away by your avoid a braking skid. low. See Brake System Warning
dealer. Driving while this message is Slippery road conditions may exist if Light on page 5‑21. Have the brake
on could drain the battery. this message is displayed, so adjust system serviced by your dealer as
If you must drive a short distance your driving accordingly. The soon as possible. See Brakes on
with the message on, be certain to message stays on for a few page 10‑34.
turn off the vehicle's accessories, seconds after the system stops SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES
such as the radio and air adjusting brake pressure. See
conditioner. Antilock Brake System (ABS) on If this message displays while you
page 9‑35 for more information. are driving, stop as soon as
Multiple chimes sound when this possible and turn the ignition off.
message is displayed. CHANGE BRAKE PADS Then start the engine again to reset
To acknowledge the message, press On vehicles with electronic brake the system. If the message stays
the RESET button. The message pad wear sensors, this message will on, or comes back on again while
reappears every 10 minutes until be displayed when the pads are you are driving, the vehicle is in
this condition changes. worn. See your dealer for service. need of service. See your dealer.
If the antilock brake system (ABS)
warning light is on and the regular
brake system warning light is not
on, you still have brakes, but do not



have ABS. If the regular brake Convertible Top SET PARK BRAKE TO
system warning light is also on, MOVE TOP
you do not have ABS and there
Messages
is a problem with the brakes. If the vehicle has a manual
ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION transmission, this message displays
See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on page 5‑22 and If the vehicle has a power and a sound will be heard if you try
Brake System Warning Light on convertible top, this message to operate the power convertible top
page 5‑21. displays and a sound will be heard without first setting the parking
if the trunk partition is not in place. brake. Set the parking brake
If this message is displayed, the Open the hatch/trunk and make before trying to operate the power
Traction Control System (TCS) and sure the trunk partition is secure convertible top. See Convertible Top
the Active Handling System will also and no objects are on the trunk on page 2‑24 for more information.
be disabled. The DIC will scroll partition. See Rear Storage on
three messages: SERVICE page 4‑1 for more information. SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK
ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE BRAKE FOR TOP
TRACTION SYSTEM, and CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP If the vehicle has an automatic
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, and This message displays and a sound transmission, this message displays
the instrument panel cluster lights will be heard if the trunk is open and a sound will be heard if you try
will come on along with a sound. while you are trying to operate the to operate the power convertible top
When the service message is convertible top. Make sure the trunk without first shifting into P (Park) or
displayed, the computer controlled is closed before operating the setting the parking brake. Either
systems will not assist the driver. convertible top. See Convertible Top shift the vehicle into P (Park) or set
Have the system repaired by your on page 2‑24. the parking brake before trying to
dealer as soon as possible. Adjust operate the power convertible top.
your driving accordingly. See Convertible Top on page 2‑24
To acknowledge these messages, for more information.
press the RESET button.



TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP TOP NOT SECURE Cruise Control Messages
This message displays and a sound This message displays and a sound CRUISE DISENGAGED
will be heard when the power will be heard when the power
convertible top button is pressed convertible top button is released This message displays briefly when
and the power convertible top before the top open or close you disengage the cruise control
pump motor temperature is below operation is complete or if the top is system by stepping on the brake on
−20°C (−4°F). Wait for the power closed without the header latch an automatic transmission vehicle or
convertible top pump motor to engaged. Press and hold the the clutch on a manual transmission
warm up before using the power convertible top button to fully open vehicle, or by turning off the cruise
convertible top. or close the top, and make sure that control switch. See Cruise Control
the header latch is engaged after on page 9‑45 for more information.
TOP MOTOR OVER the top is closed.
TEMPERATURE CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH
UNLATCH HEADER TO (XXX km/h)
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when the power
MOVE TOP See Cruise Control on page 9‑45.
convertible top button is pressed This message displays and a sound
and the power convertible top will be heard if you try to lower the Door Ajar Messages
pump motor temperature is over convertible top without first
105°C (221°F). Wait for the power unlocking the top. Move the latch DRIVER DOOR AJAR
convertible top pump motor to cool handle to unlock the convertible top. This message displays if the
down before using the power See Convertible Top on page 2‑24. driver door is not closed properly.
convertible top. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.



HATCH AJAR (Coupe) Engine Cooling System See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑30, Driver Information
This message displays when the Messages Center (DIC) on page 5‑26, and
hatch is not closed completely.
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Make sure that the hatch is closed
on page 5‑16.
completely. See Hatch on page 2‑11 This message displays when
for more information. the engine coolant level is low. To acknowledge the message, press
Have the cooling system serviced the RESET button. The message
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR and sound will come back on until
by your dealer as soon as possible.
This message displays if the See Engine Coolant on page 10‑26. this condition changes. If you do not
passenger door is not closed press the RESET button, the
properly. Make sure that the door is COOLANT OVER message remains on until the
closed completely. TEMPERATURE condition changes.

TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible) This message displays and a sound ENGINE OVERHEATED –
will be heard if the engine coolant STOP ENGINE
This message displays when the exceeds 124°C (255°F). If you have
convertible top is not closed been operating the vehicle under This message displays and a sound
completely. Make sure that the normal driving conditions, pull off will be heard when the engine has
top is closed completely. See the road, stop the vehicle, and turn overheated. Stop and turn the
Convertible Top on page 2‑24 for off the engine as soon as possible. engine off immediately to avoid
more information. severe engine damage. See Engine
You can monitor the coolant Overheating on page 10‑30.
TRUNK AJAR (Convertible) temperature with the gauges
button on the DIC or the engine
This message displays when the
coolant temperature gauge on
trunk is not closed completely.
the instrument panel cluster.
Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Hatch on page 2‑11
for more information.



ENGINE PROTECTION To avoid added strain on a hot CHECK OIL LEVEL
REDUCE ENGINE RPM engine, the air conditioning
On some vehicles, this message
compressor is automatically turned
This message displays if the engine displays and two chimes sound if
off. When the coolant temperature
oil temperature exceeds 160°C the oil level in the vehicle is low.
returns to normal, the A/C operation
(320°F). Check the engine coolant Once the vehicle senses a change
automatically resumes. You can
temperature and engine oil level. in the engine oil level, the light
continue to drive the vehicle. If this
If the engine is too hot, see Engine remains off.
message continues to appear, have
Overheating on page 10‑30. the system repaired by your dealer If this message appears after
The vehicle may need service, so as soon as possible to avoid starting the engine, the engine oil
see your dealer. compressor damage. level may be too low. You may need
You can monitor the oil temperature to add oil. See Engine Overheating
with the gauges button on the DIC. Engine Oil Messages on page 10‑30.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) To acknowledge the message, press
on page 5‑26. CHANGE ENGINE OIL
the RESET button. The message
Multiple chimes sound when This message displays when the reappears every 10 minutes until
this message is displayed. This life of the engine oil has expired. this condition changes.
message remains displayed and See Maintenance Schedule on
active until the issue is resolved. page 11‑3. After an oil change, the LOW OIL PRESSURE
engine oil life system must be reset. This message displays if low oil
HOT ENGINE AIR See “Engine Oil Life” under Driver pressure levels occur. If this
CONDITIONING OFF Information Center (DIC) on message appears while the engine
This message displays when the page 5‑26. Also, see Engine Oil on is running, stop the engine and do
engine coolant becomes hotter than page 10‑14 and Engine Oil Life not operate it until the cause of low
the normal operating temperature. System on page 10‑19 for more oil pressure is corrected. Severe
information. damage to the engine can result.



A sound will be heard when this proceed to your destination. Fuel System Messages
message is displayed. See Engine The performance may be reduced
Oil on page 10‑14. the next time the vehicle is driven. CHECK GAS CAP
The vehicle may be driven at a This message displays if the fuel
Engine Power Messages reduced speed while the REDUCED cap has not been fully tightened.
ENGINE POWER message is Check the fuel cap to make sure
ENGINE DRAG CONTROL
displayed, but acceleration and that it is on properly. Once
ACTIVE speed may be reduced. Anytime the tightened, it takes at least one
This message displays when engine check engine light stays on, the overnight park to reset or clear this
drag control is active. When driving vehicle should be taken to your message. If both the CHECK GAS
in a lower gear in rainy, snowy, dealer as soon as possible for CAP message and the malfunction
or icy conditions and then letting up diagnosis and repair. See indicator lamp in the instrument
on the accelerator or downshifting, Malfunction Indicator Lamp on panel cluster are on, you may need
the rear wheels may begin to slip page 5‑19 for more information. to see your dealer for service.
and this message displays. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
Multiple chimes sound when this
This message stays on for a few page 5‑19 for more information.
message is displayed.
seconds following the engine drag
control event. To acknowledge the message, press LOW FUEL
the RESET button. The message This message displays when the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER reappears every five minutes until fuel tank is less than 10 percent
If this message displays and the this condition changes. full and the display is turned off.
check engine light comes on, a If the REDUCED ENGINE A sound will be heard when this
noticeable reduction in the vehicle's POWER message is displayed in message is displayed. Refill the fuel
performance may occur. If the combination with the COOLANT tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
REDUCED ENGINE POWER OVER TEMPERATURE message, Gauge on page 5‑12.
message is displayed, but there is see Engine Overheating on
no reduction in performance, page 10‑30.



SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM KNOWN FOB interference. Examples of these
devices are cell phones and cell
This message displays if the See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
phone chargers, two-way radios,
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Your Vehicle” under Remote
power inverters, or similar items.
has detected a problem within the Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Try moving the RKE transmitter
fuel system. Have the vehicle Operation on page 2‑3.
away from these devices when
serviced by your dealer. This
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS starting the vehicle. In addition,
message also displays when the
LEARNED PDA devices and remote garage
cluster is not getting fuel information
and gate openers may also
from the PCM. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to generate Electromagnetic
Your Vehicle” under Remote Interference (EMI) that may
Key and Lock Messages Keyless Entry (RKE) System interfere with the RKE
Operation on page 2‑3. transmitter. Do not carry the
FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT
NO FOBS DETECTED RKE transmitter in the same
XX MINUTES
pocket or bag as these devices.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to This message displays if the vehicle
. The vehicle is experiencing
Your Vehicle” under Remote does not detect the presence of a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Electromagnetic Interference
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
transmitter when you have (EMI). Some locations, such as
attempted to start the vehicle or airports, automatic toll booths,
FOB BATTERY LOW a vehicle door has just closed. and some gas stations have EMI
The following conditions may cause fields which may interfere with
See “Battery Replacement” under the RKE transmitter.
this message to appear.
. Driver-added equipment plugged
System Operation on page 2‑3.
into the accessory power outlet
on the center console is causing



NO FOB - OFF OR RUN? READY FOR FOB #X
This message displays when the See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
RKE transmitter is not detected Your Vehicle” under Remote
inside the vehicle while you are Keyless Entry (RKE) System
trying to turn the ignition off. The Operation on page 2‑3.
vehicle may be near a strong radio
antenna signal causing the RKE Lamp Messages
system to be jammed. The vehicle HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
will remain in ACCESSORY until the
vehicle is turned off or is restarted, This message displays if it is dark
or five minutes has expired. If you enough outside and the headlamps
turn the ignition off and you cannot and the Twilight Sentinel® controls
find the RKE transmitter, you will not are off. This message informs the
If moving the transmitter to
be able to restart the vehicle. The driver that turning on the exterior
different locations within the
RKE transmitter needs to be inside lamps is recommended. It has
vehicle does not help, place the
the vehicle in order for the vehicle to become dark enough outside to
transmitter in the glove box
start. See Starting the Engine on require the headlamps and/or other
transmitter pocket with the
page 9‑22 for more information. exterior lamps.
buttons facing to the right and
then press the START button. OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN TURN SIGNAL ON
. The vehicle's battery voltage is See “Matching Transmitter(s) to This message displays and a
low. The battery voltage must be Your Vehicle” under Remote sound will be heard if a turn signal
above 10 volts for the RKE Keyless Entry (RKE) System is left on for 1.2 km (three-quarters
transmitter to be detected Operation on page 2‑3. of a mile). Move the turn signal/
properly. multifunction lever to the off
position.
To acknowledge this message,



Ride Control System ACTIVE HANDLING READY See Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑39, including the “Launch
Messages This message displays when the
Control” information.
functional check of the Active
ACTIVE HANDLING Handling System has been MAXIMUM SPEED 129 km/h
This message displays when the completed. See Active Handling (80 MPH)
Active Handling System is System on page 9‑38 for more
information. This message displays when a
operating. The Active Handling
malfunction is present in the
System is a computer controlled COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE Selective Ride Control system.
system that assists the driver in
This message displays and a The vehicle speed will be limited to
controlling the vehicle in difficult
sound will be heard when the a value determined by the vehicle
driving conditions. You may feel or
Competitive Driving mode is when the shock absorber system
hear the system working and see
selected. The instrument panel has failed and the shocks are in
the ACTIVE HANDLING message
cluster light will be on when the their full soft mode. Have the vehicle
displayed in the DIC. This message
Competitive Driving mode is serviced by your dealer as soon as
stays on for a few seconds following
selected. If your vehicle is equipped possible.
the active handling event. This is
normal when the system is with a manual transmission, To acknowledge the message, press
operating. See Active Handling Launch Control is available when the RESET button. The message
System on page 9‑38 and Braking this mode is selected. The Traction reappears every 10 minutes until
on page 9‑4. Control System (TCS) will not be this condition changes.
operating while in the Competitive
Driving mode. Adjust your driving
accordingly. This system is available
on all models except ZR1 and Z06.



PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT
HANDLING ON HANDLING ON ACTIVE HANDLING ON
This message displays and a sound This message displays and a sound This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance will be heard when this Performance will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is Traction Management mode is Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel selected. The instrument panel selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when cluster light will also be on when cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch this mode is selected. Launch this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this mode Control is available when this Control is available when this
is selected. In this mode the mode is selected. In this mode the mode is selected. In this mode
Traction Control and Active Traction Control and Active the Traction Control and Active
Handling System are available but Handling System are available but Handling System are available but
intended for use on wet race track intended for use on dry race track intended for use on dry race track
conditions. Adjust your driving conditions. Adjust your driving conditions. Adjust your driving
accordingly. This system is available accordingly. This system is available accordingly. This system is available
only on ZR1 and Z06 models. only on ZR1 and Z06 models. only on ZR1 and Z06 models.
See “Performance Traction See “Performance Traction See “Performance Traction
Management” and “Launch Control” Management” and “Launch Control” Management” and “Launch Control”
under Competitive Driving Mode on under Competitive Driving Mode on under Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑39 for more information page 9‑39 for more information page 9‑39 for more information
about the use of this mode. about the use of this mode. about the use of this mode.



PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
ACTIVE HANDLING OFF HANDLING OFF SYSTEM
This message displays and a sound This message displays and a sound This message displays if there is a
will be heard when this Performance will be heard when this Performance problem with the Active Handling
Traction Management mode is Traction Management mode is System and the vehicle needs
selected. The instrument panel selected. The instrument panel service. The active handling system
cluster light will also be on when cluster light will also be on when light on the instrument panel cluster
this mode is selected. Launch this mode is selected. Launch also turns on and a sound will be
Control is available when this mode Control is available when this mode heard. See your dealer. When this
is selected. In this mode the is selected. In this mode the message is displayed, the system is
Traction Control is available but Traction Control is available but not working. Adjust your driving
intended for use on dry race track intended for use on dry race track accordingly. See Active Handling
conditions. The Active Handling conditions. The Active Handling System on page 9‑38 for more
System is disabled when this mode System is disabled when this information.
is selected. This mode will require mode is selected. This mode will
more driver skill than modes 1-3. require more driver skill than SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
Adjust your driving accordingly. modes 1-4. Adjust your driving This message displays when the
This system is available only accordingly. This system is available Selective Ride Control system has
on ZR1 and Z06 models. only on ZR1 and Z06 models. detected a malfunction and the
See “Performance Traction See “Performance Traction system must be serviced.
Management” and “Launch Control” Management” and “Launch Control” See your dealer. If a fault is
under Competitive Driving Mode on under Competitive Driving Mode on present in the Selective Ride
page 9‑39 for more information page 9‑39 for more information Control system which causes the
about the use of this mode. about the use of this mode. shocks to be in their full soft
condition, the messages SERVICE
RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS



INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM To acknowledge the message, stops limiting wheel spin. See
SPEED 129 km/h (80 MPH) will press the RESET button. Traction Control System (TCS) on
display together. See Selective Ride page 9‑36 for more information.
Control on page 9‑43 for more SHOCKS INOPERATIVE
information. This message displays when a TRACTION SYSTEM AND
malfunction is present in the ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM Selective Ride Control system This message displays, the
If this message displays when you which is causing the shocks to instrument panel cluster light turns
are driving, there is a problem with be in their full soft mode. This is a on, and a sound will be heard when
the Traction Control System (TCS) warning to the driver that the vehicle the Traction Control System (TCS)
and the vehicle is in need of handling may be affected. Have the and Active Handling System are
service. See your dealer. When this vehicle serviced by your dealer as turned off by pressing the Active
message is displayed, the system soon as possible. Handling System button on the
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your To acknowledge the message, press center console for five seconds.
driving accordingly. the RESET button . The message The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The traction control system (TCS) reappears every 10 minutes until remains on with the TCS and Active
warning light on the instrument this condition changes. Handling System off. Adjust your
panel cluster will also turn on and a driving accordingly. See Traction
sound will be heard. TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE Control System (TCS) on page 9‑36
This message displays when the and Active Handling System on
When this message is displayed, page 9‑38 for more information.
the computer controlled systems will Traction Control System (TCS) is
not assist the driver in controlling limiting wheel spin. Slippery road To acknowledge this message,
the vehicle. Have the system conditions may exist if this message press the RESET button.
repaired by your dealer as soon is displayed, so adjust your driving
as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly. The message stays on
accordingly. See Traction Control for a few seconds after the TCS
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for
more information.



TRACTION SYSTEM AND TRACTION SYSTEM – ON The reminder will be repeated if the
ACTIVE HANDLING – ON ignition is on, the vehicle is in
This message displays and a
motion, the driver is buckled, the
If the Traction Control System (TCS) sound will be heard when the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the
and Active Handling System are off, Traction Control System (TCS) is
passenger airbag is enabled. If the
this message displays briefly, the turned on by pressing the Active
passenger's safety belt is already
instrument panel cluster light turns Handling System button on the
buckled, this message will not
off, and a sound will be heard when center console. This message
come on.
the TCS and Active Handling automatically clears from the DIC
System are turned on by briefly display on its own. See Traction BUCKLE SEATBELT
pressing the Active Handling Control System (TCS) on page 9‑36
for more information. This message reminds you to
System button on the center
buckle the driver's safety belt.
console. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 and Safety Belt Messages This message displays and a
Active Handling System on sound will be heard when the
page 9‑38 for more information. BUCKLE PASSENGER ignition is on, the driver's safety belt
This message reminds you to is unbuckled, and the vehicle is in
TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF motion. You should buckle your
buckle the passenger's safety belt.
This message displays and stays safety belt.
This message displays and a sound
on, a sound will be heard, when the If the driver remains unbuckled
will be heard when the ignition is on,
TCS is turned off by pressing the when the ignition is on and the
the driver's safety belt is buckled,
Active Handling System button on vehicle is in motion, the reminder
the passenger's safety belt is
the center console. See Traction will be repeated. If the driver's
unbuckled with the passenger
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑36 safety belt is already buckled,
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is
for more information. this message will not come on.
in motion. You should have the
To acknowledge the message, passenger buckle their safety belt.



This message is an additional Have the climate control system Starting the Vehicle
reminder to the safety belt reminder serviced by your dealer if you
light in the instrument panel cluster. notice a drop in heating and air
Messages
See Safety Belt Reminders on conditioning efficiency. PRESS BRAKE TO START
page 5‑17 for more information. ENGINE (Automatic
SERVICE ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM Transmission Only)
Anti-theft Alarm System
This message displays if an This message displays if you try to
Messages start the engine by pressing the
electrical problem has occurred
INTRUSION SENSOR OFF within the Powertrain Control keyless ignition start button without
Module (PCM). Have the vehicle having the brake pressed. The
This message may display when the brake needs to be pressed when
anti-theft alarm has been disarmed. serviced by your dealer.
starting the engine. See Ignition
INTRUSION SENSOR ON SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Positions on page 9‑20 for more
This message displays and a sound information.
This message may display when the
anti-theft alarm has been armed. will be heard when there may be an
electrical or another system problem Tire Messages
with the vehicle. Have your vehicle
Service Vehicle Messages checked by your dealer if this
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING message keeps appearing. This message may be displayed
when one or more of the tires is
This message displays when the overinflated. This message
electronic sensors that control the also displays LEFT FRONT,
air conditioning and heating RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR,
systems are no longer working. or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire is affected.



You can receive more than one tire LOW TIRE PRESSURE or This message displays when one or
pressure message at a time. TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE more of the tires is underinflated.
To read other messages that may This message also displays LEFT
have been sent at the same time, FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
press the RESET button . If a tire
{ WARNING REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
pressure message appears on the When the LOW TIRE which tire is affected. Multiple
DIC, stop as soon as you can. PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT chimes sound and the tire pressure
Have the tire pressures checked message is displayed on the light on the instrument panel cluster
and set to those shown on the turns on when this message is
Driver Information Center, your
Tire and Loading Information label. displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
vehicle's handling capabilities
See Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑56, on page 5‑24. You can receive more
will be reduced during severe
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14, than one tire pressure message at a
Tire Pressure on page 10‑62, and maneuvers. The active handling time. To read other messages that
Tire Pressure Monitor System on system will be affected. See may have been sent at the same
page 10‑64. The DIC also shows Active Handling System on time, press the RESET button. If a
the tire pressure values. See Driver page 9‑38. If you drive too fast, tire pressure message appears on
Information Center (DIC) on you could lose control of your the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
page 5‑26. vehicle. You or others could be Have the tire pressures checked
injured. Do not drive over 90 km/h and set to those shown on the Tire
To acknowledge the message,
(55 mph) when the LOW TIRE and Loading Information label.
A message reappears every PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT See Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑56,
10 minutes until the condition is message is displayed. Drive Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14,
corrected. cautiously and check your tire Tire Pressure on page 10‑62, and
pressures as soon as you can. Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑64. The DIC also shows



the tire pressure values. See Driver TIRE FLAT which tire is affected. Multiple
Information Center (DIC) on chimes sound and the tire pressure
page 5‑26. { WARNING light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on when this message is
To acknowledge the message,
press the RESET button. When the LOW TIRE displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
A message reappears every PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT on page 5‑24.
10 minutes until the condition is message is displayed on the This message is followed by the
corrected. Driver Information Center, your MAXIMUM SPEED 90 km/h
vehicle's handling capabilities (55 MPH) message, and then by
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR will be reduced during severe the REDUCED HANDLING
This message displays if a part on maneuvers. If you drive too fast, message. The Active Handling
the Tire Pressure Monitor you could lose control of your System will intervene more quickly
System (TPMS) is not working vehicle. You or others could be when a flat tire has been detected.
properly. The tire pressure light also injured. Do not drive over 55 mph Adjust your driving accordingly.
flashes and then remains on during (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE You can receive more than
the same ignition cycle. See Tire PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT one tire pressure message at a
Pressure Light on page 5‑24. message is displayed. Drive time. To read other messages that
Several conditions may cause this cautiously and check your tire may have been sent at the same
message to appear. See Tire pressures as soon as you can. time, press the RESET button. If a
Pressure Monitor Operation on tire pressure message appears on
page 10‑66 for more information. the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
If the warning comes on and stays This message displays when one
Have the tire pressures checked
on, there may be a problem with the or more of the tires is flat. This
and set to those shown on the Tire
TPMS. See your dealer. message also displays LEFT
and Loading Information label.
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate



See Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑56, The vehicle will be in ACCESSORY. at a slower speed. Monitor the
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14, Once the shift lever is moved to transmission fluid temperature and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑62, and P (Park), the vehicle will turn off. allow it to cool to at least 110°C
Tire Pressure Monitor System on The vehicle will remain in (230°F). The transmission fluid
page 10‑64. The DIC also shows ACCESSORY, without the 20 minute temperature can be monitored with
the tire pressure values. See Driver time-out period, until the shift lever the gauges button on the DIC.
Information Center (DIC) on is moved to P (Park) or until the See “DIC Operation and Displays”
page 5‑26. driver presses the pushbutton to under Driver Information Center
To acknowledge the message, press restart the vehicle. See Ignition (DIC) on page 5‑26 and Automatic
the RESET button. A message Positions on page 9‑20 for more Transmission Fluid on page 10‑20.
reappears every 10 minutes until the information. Also check the engine coolant
condition is corrected. temperature. If it is also hot, see
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Engine Overheating on page 10‑30.
Transmission Messages ENGINE If this message is displayed during
This message displays and four normal vehicle operation on flat
SERVICE TRANSMISSION chimes sound if the transmission roads, the vehicle may need
This message displays when there fluid temperature rises above service. See your dealer for an
is a problem with the transmission. 132°C (270°F) or rises rapidly. inspection.
See your dealer for service. The transmission may shift gears If driving in a performance or
or apply the torque converter clutch competitive manner, the use of
SHIFT TO PARK to reduce the fluid temperature. (S) Sport Automatic Mode or
If the vehicle has an automatic Driving aggressively or driving (S) Sport Manual Paddle Shift
transmission, this message displays on long hills can cause the gear selection is recommended.
if the vehicle is not in P (Park) when transmission fluid temperature to be See Automatic Transmission on
the engine is being turned off. higher than normal. If this message page 9‑27 for more information.
appears, you may continue to drive



To acknowledge the message, ICE POSSIBLE SET PARK BRAKE FOR
press the RESET button. SEAT RECALL
This message displays when the
The message reappears every
outside air temperature is cold If the vehicle has a manual
10 minutes until this condition
enough to create icy road transmission, this message displays
changes. If you do not press the
conditions. Adjust your driving if you try to recall the memory
RESET button, the message
accordingly. positions when the ignition is on
remains on the display until the
condition changes. and the parking brake is not set.
OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE If the vehicle is on, you must set
UPSHIFT NOW This message displays for a few the parking brake in order for the
seconds if a RKE transmitter that is memory positions to recall.
See Manual Transmission on
not labeled 1 or 2 is used and you See Memory Seats on page 3‑4 for
page 9‑32.
try to personalize the features on more information.
the vehicle by pressing the OPTION
Vehicle Reminder button. The personalization system Washer Fluid Messages
Messages will not recognize the transmitter
and the DIC will not display the CHECK WASHER FLUID
ACCESSORY MODE ON current driver number or the menus See Washer Fluid on page 10‑34.
This message displays when the used to set personalizations.
vehicle is in accessory mode. The personalization features will
then be set to the default states.
See Vehicle Personalization on



Vehicle Separate personalization settings
are saved for two different drivers.
If more than one valid RKE
transmitter is detected upon
Personalization One of the Remote Keyless Entry opening the driver door, the driver
(RKE) transmitters is assigned to preferences for the lowest driver
Many features on your vehicle can
driver 1. The other is assigned to number will be recalled.
be personalized. This means that
driver 2. The backs of the RKE If an RKE transmitter that is not
the operation of these features
transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to labelled 1 or 2 is used, the
can be set to operate differently
correspond to each driver. personalization system will not
depending on who is driving the
vehicle. See “Personal Options” The current driver's preferences are recognize the transmitter. The Driver
later in this section for the features recalled when one of the following Information Center (DIC) will not
that you can personalize. occurs: display a current driver number and
The personalization settings for . The lock or unlock button on the the features that are normally
other features are automatically RKE transmitter, labelled 1 or 2, programmed through the DIC will be
updated and saved as the driver is pressed. set to the default states. Also, if the
adjusts them. These include the OPTION button is pressed, the DIC
. The appropriate memory does not display the menus used to
following settings and presets:
button, 1 or 2, located on set personalizations, but instead
. The radio presets, tone, volume, the driver door is pressed. displays OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
fade, balance, equalization (EQ) See Memory Seats on page 3‑4 for a few seconds.
settings, and source (radio for more information.
or CD). . A valid RKE transmitter is
. The last climate control setting. detected upon opening the
. The Head-Up Display (HUD) driver door.
position and dimming level,
if your vehicle has this feature.
. The instrument panel cluster
dimming level and last selected
DIC display.



Entering the Personal The DIC will display the current Personal Options
Options Menu driver number (1 or 2) for a The following options are available
To enter the personal options menu, few seconds and then will for programming:
use the following steps: display instructions on which
buttons to use for setting the Display Units: This option allows
1. If you have an automatic personalizations. The RESET you to choose the measurement
transmission vehicle, turn the button is used to select a units.
vehicle on with the shift lever in setting for a particular feature. Press the OPTION button until
P (Park). The OPTION button is used to DISPLAY UNITS appears on the
If you have a manual move to the next feature. display, then press the RESET
transmission vehicle, turn the 3. Press the OPTION button while button to scroll through the
vehicle on with the parking the instruction screen is following modes:
brake set. displayed to enter the first . ENGLISH (default)
To avoid excessive drain on the personalization menu item.
. METRIC
battery, it is recommended that 4. Once you have cycled through
the headlamps are turned off. all of the personal options, If you choose ENGLISH, all
pressing the OPTION button a information will be displayed in
2. Press the OPTION button and English units.
you will enter the PERSONAL final time exits the personal
OPTIONS menu. options menu. In addition, If you choose METRIC, all
if no button is pressed within information will be displayed in
45 seconds, the DIC will exit the metric units.
personal options menu.
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.



Auto Memory Recall (Automatic When the mode you want is Press the OPTION button until
Transmission only): If your selected, press the OPTION button AUTO EXIT RECALL appears on
automatic transmission vehicle has to set your choice and advance to the display, then press the RESET
the memory package, you may have the next personal option. button to scroll through the following
this option. This option allows the Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle modes:
driver seat, the telescopic steering has the memory package, you may . YES
column, if your vehicle has this have this option. This option allows
feature, and the outside rearview . NO (default)
the driver seat and telescopic
mirrors to automatically move to the steering column, if your vehicle has If you choose YES, when you turn
current driver's set position when this feature, to automatically move the ignition off and open the driver
the engine starts. to the current driver's exit position door or press the unlock button on
Press the OPTION button until when one of the following occurs: the RKE transmitter, the seat and
AUTO MEMORY RECALL appears the telescopic steering wheel, if your
. The vehicle is turned off or in vehicle has this feature, will return
on the display, then press the Retained Accessory Power
RESET button to scroll through the to their stored exit positions for an
(RAP) or accessory mode and easy exit or an easy entrance when
following modes: the driver door is opened. returning to the vehicle.
. YES . The vehicle is turned off or in The seat and steering wheel will
. NO (default) RAP and the unlock button on only return to the stored driving
If you choose YES, the driver seat, the RKE transmitter is pressed. position if you press the appropriate
the outside rearview mirrors and the In order for the Auto Exit Recall memory button or activate the Auto
telescopic steering column, if your feature to work on an automatic Memory Recall feature.
vehicle has this feature, positions transmission vehicle, the vehicle If you choose NO, this option will
are recalled when you turn the must be in P (Park). On a manual turn off.
ignition on. transmission vehicle, the parking
If you choose NO, this option will brake must be set.
turn off.



When the mode you want is come on for 20 seconds during This will occur when the vehicle is
selected, press the OPTION button low light periods when all of the off or in RAP and the headlamps
to set your choice and advance to following occur: are on due to the automatic
the next personal option. . You press the unlock button on headlamp system. The parking
Approach Lights: This option the RKE transmitter. lamps and high-beam headlamps
briefly turns on the parking lamps, will remain on until the driver
. Both of the doors are closed. selected time expires, the exterior
the high-beam headlamps, and the
back-up lamps during low light . The vehicle is off or in RAP. lamp control is activated, or the
periods when the RKE transmitter is vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
The lamps remain on for 20 seconds
used to unlock the vehicle. or until a door is opened, the lock Press the OPTION button until
Press the OPTION button until button on the RKE transmitter is TWILIGHT DELAY appears on the
APPROACH LIGHTS appears on pressed, or the vehicle is no longer display, then press the RESET
the display, then press the RESET off or in RAP. button to scroll through the following
button to scroll through the following modes:
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
modes: System on page 2‑3 for more
. OFF
. OFF information. . 15 S
. ON (default) When the mode you want is . 30 S (default)
selected, press the OPTION button
If you choose OFF, this option will to set your choice and advance to
. 90 S
turn off. the next personal option. If you choose OFF, this option will
If you choose ON, the parking Twilight Delay: This option allows turn off.
lamps, the high-beam headlamps, you to set the amount of time If you choose 15 S, the twilight
and the back-up lamps will you want the parking lamps and delay time will be set to 15 seconds.
high-beam headlamps to remain If you choose 30 S, the twilight
on after you exit the vehicle. delay time will be set to 30 seconds.



If you choose 90 S, the twilight If you choose NO, this option will If you choose YES, the front and
delay time will be set to 90 seconds. turn off. rear turn signals will flash once
When the mode you want is When the mode you want is when you press the lock button on
selected, press the OPTION button selected, press the OPTION button the RKE transmitter.
to set your choice and advance to to set your choice and advance to If you choose NO, this option will
the next personal option. the next personal option. turn off.
Flash at Unlock: This option Flash at Lock: This option When the mode you want is
activates the front and rear turn activates the front and rear turn selected, press the OPTION button
signals for two short flashes when signals for one long flash when the to set your choice and advance to
the unlock or hatch/trunk button on lock button on the RKE transmitter the next personal option.
the RKE transmitter is pressed. is pressed. This will only occur FOB Reminder: This option
This will only occur when the when the vehicle is off. If the lock sounds the horn three times when
vehicle is off. button on the RKE transmitter is the driver door is closed and there is
Press the OPTION button until pressed again within five seconds, a RKE transmitter inside the interior
FLASH AT UNLOCK appears on the the horn will sound regardless of of the vehicle. This will only occur
display, then press the RESET which setting you have selected. when the vehicle is off.
button to scroll through the following Press the OPTION button until Press the OPTION button until FOB
modes: FLASH AT LOCK appears on the REMINDER appears on the display,
. YES (default) display, then press the RESET then press the RESET button to
button to scroll through the following scroll through the following modes:
. NO modes:
If you choose YES, the front and
. YES
. YES (default)
rear turn signals will flash twice . NO (default)
when you press the unlock button or
. NO
the hatch/trunk button on the RKE
transmitter.



If you choose YES, the horn will in. The RKE transmitter locked in If you choose OFF, this option will
sound three times when a RKE the vehicle can still be used to start turn off.
transmitter is inside of the vehicle the vehicle or unlock the doors, If you choose SILENT, the doors will
while the ignition is turned off and if needed. A person approaching the automatically lock a short time after
the driver door is closed. outside of the locked vehicle without you remove a RKE transmitter from
If you choose NO, this option will an authorized RKE transmitter, the interior of the vehicle and close
turn off. however, will not be able to open both doors.
the door, even with a transmitter in
When the mode you want is the vehicle. If you choose HORN, the doors will
selected, press the OPTION button automatically lock and the horn will
to set your choice and advance to You may temporarily disable the sound a short time after you remove
the next personal option. passive door locking feature by a RKE transmitter from the interior
pressing the door unlock switch for of the vehicle and close both doors.
Passive Door Locking: This three seconds on an open door.
option allows you to select whether Passive door locking will then If you are parking in a quiet area
the doors automatically lock during remain disabled until a door lock and do not want the horn to sound
normal vehicle exit. When the switch is pressed or until the power when the doors lock, press the lock
ignition is turned off and all doors mode transitions from the off button on the RKE transmitter
become closed, the vehicle will power mode. immediately after removing it from
determine how many RKE the interior and closing the doors.
transmitters remain in the vehicle Press the OPTION button until This will lock the doors and cancel
interior. If at least one RKE PASSIVE DOOR LOCKING appears the passive locking for this ignition
transmitter has been removed from on the display, then press the cycle.
the interior of the vehicle, the doors RESET button to scroll through the
following modes: When the mode you want is
will lock after a short delay. selected, press the OPTION button
For example, if there are two RKE
. OFF (default) to set your choice and advance to
transmitters in the vehicle and one . SILENT the next personal option.
is removed, the other will be locked . HORN



Passive Door Unlock: This option Auto Unlock: This option allows vehicles, the driver door will
allows you to select which doors will you to select whether the driver automatically unlock when the
automatically unlock when you door, both doors, or neither door ignition is turned off or is in RAP.
approach and open the driver door automatically unlocks when the shift If you choose BOTH, on automatic
with the RKE transmitter. See Door lever is moved into P (Park) for transmission vehicles, both doors
Locks on page 2‑8 for more automatic transmission vehicles or will automatically unlock when the
information. when the ignition is turned off or is shift lever is moved into P (Park).
Press the OPTION button until in RAP for manual transmission On manual transmission vehicles,
PASSIVE DOOR UNLOCK appears vehicles. both doors will automatically unlock
on the display, then press the Press the OPTION button until when the ignition is turned off or is
RESET button to scroll through the AUTO UNLOCK appears on the in RAP.
following modes: display, then press the RESET When the mode you want is
. DRIVER button to scroll through the following selected, press the OPTION button
modes: to set your choice and advance to
. BOTH (default) . OFF the next personal option.
If you choose DRIVER, only the .
driver door will automatically unlock DRIVER Language: This option allows you
when you approach and open the . BOTH (default) to select the language the DIC, the
driver door with the RKE transmitter. Head-Up Display (HUD), if your
If you choose OFF, this option will vehicle has this feature, and the
If you choose BOTH, both doors will turn off. radio uses to display messages.
automatically unlock when you If you choose DRIVER, on Each language mode will be
approach and open the driver door automatic transmission vehicles, the displayed in its own language.
with the RKE transmitter. driver door will automatically unlock For example, English will be
when the shift lever is moved into displayed as ENGLISH, Spanish as
P (Park). On manual transmission ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle has
the navigation system, you will not
have the Japanese language mode.



Press the OPTION button until Personalize Name: This option instructions listed previously
LANGUAGE appears on the display, allows you to type in a name or under “Entering the Personal
then press the RESET button to greeting that will appear on the DIC Options Menu”.
scroll through the following modes: display whenever the corresponding 2. Press the OPTION button until
. ENGLISH (default) RKE transmitter (1 or 2) is used or the PERSONALIZE NAME
one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) option appears on the display.
. DEUTSCH (German) located on the driver door is
. FRANCAIS (French) pressed. 3. Select YES under
PERSONALIZE NAME by
. ITALIANO (Italian) Press the OPTION button until pressing the RESET button.
PERSONALIZE NAME appears on
. ESPANOL (Spanish) the display, then press the RESET 4. Press the OPTION button and a
. JAPANESE button to scroll through the following cursor will display where you
modes: can insert a letter.
If you choose a language that you
do not understand, press the . YES 5. Press the OPTION button again
OPTION and RESET buttons for until the letter you want is
. NO (default) displayed. To scroll through the
five seconds. The DIC will begin
displaying all of the various If you choose YES, you can type in letters faster and without a
languages one by one for as long a name that will appear on the DIC beeping noise, keep the
as the buttons are pressed. When display. OPTIONS button depressed.
the desired language is displayed, To program a name, use the There are alpha/numeric
release the buttons and the DIC will following procedure: characters and a blank space
set to this language. available.
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS
When the mode you want is menu and select the driver
selected, press the OPTION button number (1 or 2) that you would
to set your choice and advance to like to program by following the
the next personal option.



6. Press the RESET button to If you choose NO, this option will Universal Remote
select the letter of your choice turn off.
and proceed on to the next If a customized name or greeting is
System
space to the right. not programmed, the DIC display See Radio Frequency Statement on
If you make a mistake and would will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to page 13‑21 for information
like to clear or replace a letter, correspond with either the regarding Part 15 of the Federal
perform the following steps: number on the back of the RKE Communications Commission (FCC)
6.1. Press the RESET button to transmitter (1 or 2) being used or to rules and Industry Canada
reach the letter you would the memory button (1 or 2) that is Standards RSS-210/220/310.
like to change. pressed.
The FCC Grant of Equipment
6.2. Press the OPTION button PERSONALIZE NAME is the last Authorization Certificate number is
to scroll through the letter option available to program in the KOBFTE05A.
choices. PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
The Canadian Registration
Pressing the OPTION button after
6.3. Press the RESET button to ID number is 3521A-FTE05A.
this setting will exit you from the
select the letter and PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
proceed on to the next The last item you were in prior to
space to the right. entering PERSONAL OPTIONS
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the will then display on the DIC.
name or greeting you want is
complete. After the name or
greeting is complete, keep
pressing the RESET button until
the display turns blank and exits
out of this option. You can
program up to 20 characters.



Universal Remote System Read the instructions completely Programming Universal Home
before attempting to program the Remote — Rolling Code
Programming transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have For questions or help programming
another person assist with the Universal Home Remote
programming the transmitter. System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Be sure to keep the original remote
control transmitter for use in other Most garage door openers sold
vehicles, as well as for future after 1996 are Rolling Code units.
programming. Only the original Programming a garage door opener
remote control transmitter is needed involves time-sensitive actions, so
for Fixed Code programming. read the entire procedure before
The programmed buttons should be starting. Otherwise, the device will
erased when the vehicle is sold or time out and the procedure will have
This system provides a way to the lease ends. See “Erasing to be repeated.
replace up to three remote control Universal Home Remote Buttons”
transmitters used to activate To program up to three devices:
in this section.
devices such as garage door 1. Press START or put the vehicle
openers, security systems, and Park the vehicle outside of the
in accessory mode. See Ignition
home automation devices. garage when programming a
Positions on page 9‑20 for
garage door. Be sure that people
Do not use this system with any additional information.
and objects are clear of the garage
garage door opener that does not door or gate being programmed. Programming can only occur
have the stop and reverse feature. when the vehicle is running or in
This includes any garage door accessory mode.
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.



Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” 6. Press and release the same
button. It can usually be found button again. The garage door
where the hanging antenna wire should move, confirming that
is attached to the motor-head programming is successful and
unit and may be a colored complete.
button. Press this button. After To program another Rolling Code
pressing this button, complete device such as an additional garage
the following steps in less than door opener, a security device,
30 seconds. or home automation device, repeat
4. Immediately return to the Steps 1 through 6, choosing a
vehicle. Press and hold the different function button in Step 4
2. From inside the vehicle, Universal Home Remote button than what was used for the garage
press the two outside buttons that will be used to control the door opener.
at the same time for one to garage door until the garage If these instructions do not work,
two seconds, and immediately door moves. The indicator light, the garage door opener is probably
release them. above the selected button, a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
should slowly blink. This button programming instructions that follow
may need to be held for up to for a Fixed Code garage door
20 seconds. opener.
5. Immediately, within one second,
release the button when the
garage door moves. The
indicator light blinks rapidly until
programming is complete.

3. Locate in the garage,
the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit).



Programming Universal Home The hand-held transmitter can
Remote — Fixed Code have between eight and
12 dip switches depending on
For questions or help programming the brand of transmitter.
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or The garage door opener receiver
go to www.learcar2u.com. (motor head unit) could also
have a row of dip switches that
Most garage door openers sold can be used when programming
before 1996 are Fixed Code units. the Universal Home Remote.
Programming a garage door opener If the total number of switches
involves time-sensitive actions, so on the motor head and
read the entire procedure before hand-held transmitter is different,
starting. Otherwise, the device will 2. To verify that the garage door or if the dip switch settings are
time out and the procedure will have opener is a Fixed Code unit, different, use the dip switch
to be repeated. remove the battery cover on the settings on the motor head unit
hand-held transmitter supplied to program the Universal Home
To program up to three devices:
by the manufacturer of the Remote. The motor head dip
1. Press START or put the vehicle garage door opener motor. switch settings can also be used
in accessory mode. See Ignition If there is a row of dip switches when the original hand-held
Positions on page 9‑20 for similar to the graphic above, transmitter is not available.
additional information. the garage door opener is a
Programming can only occur Fixed Code unit. If you do not
when the vehicle is running or in see a row of dip switches,
accessory mode. return to the previous section,
“Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.”



The switch positions on the
. If a switch is set between
hand-held transmitter could be the up and down position,
labeled as follows: write “Middle.”
. A switch in the up position The switch settings
could be labeled as “Up,” written down in Step 3 now
“+,” or “On.” become the button strokes
Example of Eight Dip Switches to be entered into the
. A switch in the down Universal Home Remote in
with Two Positions position could be labeled Step 5. Be sure to enter the
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.” switch settings written down
. A switch in the middle in Step 3, in order from left
position could be labeled as to right, into the Universal
“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.” Home Remote, when
completing Step 5.
3. Write down the eight to 12 switch
settings from left to right as 4. From inside the vehicle, first
Example of Eight Dip Switches firmly press all three buttons
follows:
with Three Positions at the same time for about
. When a switch is in the up
The panel of switches might not three seconds. Release the
position, write “Left.”
appear exactly as they do in the buttons to put the Universal
examples above, but they . When a switch is in the Home Remote into
should be similar. down position, write “Right.” programming mode.



Now press one button on the 8. Immediately release the button
Universal Home Remote for when the garage door moves.
each switch setting as follows: The indicator light blinks rapidly
. If you wrote “Left,” press until programming is complete.
the left button (A) in the 9. Press and release the same
vehicle. button again. The garage door
. If you wrote “Right,” press should move, confirming that
the right button (C) in the programming is successful and
vehicle. complete.
. If you wrote “Middle,” press To program another Fixed Code
the middle button (B) in the device such as an additional garage
vehicle. door opener, a security device,
A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)
or home automation device, repeat
B. Middle Button (Middle, 0, 6. After entering all of the switch Steps 1 through 9, choosing a
or Neutral) positions, again, firmly press and different button in Step 7 than what
release all three buttons at the was used for the garage door
C. Right Button (Down, -, or Off)
same time. The indicator lights opener.
5. The indicator lights blink slowly. turn on.
Enter each switch setting from
7. Press and hold the button that
Step 3 into the vehicle's
will be used to control the
Universal Home Remote.
garage door until the garage
You have two and one-half
door moves. The indicator light
minutes to complete Step 5.
above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to
55 seconds.



Universal Remote System Reprogramming Universal For help or information on the
Home Remote Buttons Universal Home Remote System,
Operation call the customer assistance phone
Press and hold the appropriate Any of the three buttons can be number under Customer Assistance
button for at least one-half second. reprogrammed by repeating the Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
The indicator light comes on while instructions. page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
the signal is being transmitted. Erasing Universal Home Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑6.
Operation can occur: Remote Buttons
. If the vehicle is in The programmed buttons should be
accessory mode. erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
. If the vehicle is running.
To erase either Rolling Code or
. If the vehicle is in Retained
Fixed Code on the Universal Home
Accessory Mode (RAP).
Remote device:
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑24 for more 1. Press and hold the two outside
information. buttons at the same time for
approximately 20 seconds, until
. Up to an additional 10 minutes
the indicator lights, located
after RAP finishes.
directly above the buttons, begin
. Up to 10 minutes after any door to blink rapidly.
is opened.
2. Once the indicator lights begin
to blink, release both buttons.
The codes from all buttons are
erased.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting Exterior Lighting To override AUTO mode, turn the
control to off.
Exterior Lamp Controls To reset to AUTO mode, turn the
Exterior Lighting control to exterior lamps and then
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 back to AUTO. Automatic mode also
Exterior Lamps Off resets when the vehicle is turned off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 and then back on again if the control
Headlamp High/Low-Beam is left in the AUTO position.
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 the parking lamps together with the
Daytime Running following:
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 The exterior lamp control is located
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 to the left of the steering wheel on . Sidemarker Lamps
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 the multifunction lever. . Taillamps
Turn and Lane-Change O (Exterior Lamp Control):
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Turn the band with this symbol on it
. License Plate Lamps
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 to operate the exterior lamps. . Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Lighting The exterior lamp band has four The parking brake indicator light
Instrument Panel Illumination positions: comes on and stays on when the
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 O (Off): Turns off all lamps. parking lamps are on with the
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 engine off and the ignition to
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 AUTO (Automatic): Sets the ACC/ACCESSORY.
exterior lamps to automatic mode.
Lighting Features AUTO mode turns the exterior 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 lamps on and off depending on how headlamps, together with the
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7 much light is available outside the previously listed lamps and lights.
Exterior Lighting Battery vehicle.
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7


6-2 Lighting
. The transmission is not in
Exterior Lamps Off Flash-to-Pass P (Park) or the parking brake
Reminder To use the flash-to-pass feature, is off.
A warning chime will sound if the briefly pull the turn signal lever . The parking brake is off or the
exterior lamp control is left on in toward you. The high-beam
vehicle speed is greater than
either the headlamp or parking lamp indicator flashes to indicate to the
13 km/h (8 mph).
position and the driver door is other driver that you intend to pass.
opened with the ignition off. If the low-beam headlamps are off When DRL are on, only the front
and the fog lamps are on, the fog turn signal lamps will be on.
lamps flash. The parking lamps, taillamps,
Headlamp High/ instrument panel lights, or other
Low-Beam Changer Daytime Running exterior lamps will not be on when
the DRL are being used.
To change the headlamps from low Lamps (DRL)
beam to high, push the turn signal When it is dark enough outside, the
lever all the way forward. To change Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can front turn signal lamps turn off and
from high to low beam, pull the lever make it easier for others to see the the normal low-beam headlamps
rearward. front of your vehicle during the day. turn on.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles When it is bright enough outside,
first sold in Canada. the regular lamps go off, and the
front turn signal lamps will take over.
The DRL system makes the front If the vehicle is started in a dark
turn signal lamps come on when the garage, the automatic headlamp
following conditions are met: system comes on immediately.
While the high beams are on, this . It is still daylight and the ignition Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
light on the instrument cluster will is on. it takes approximately one minute
also be lit. for the automatic headlamp system
. The exterior lamp control is in
to change to DRL if it is light
the AUTO position.


Lighting 6-3

outside. During that delay, the To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior AUTO: Activates the system.
instrument panel cluster may not be lamp control to the off position or If the band is already in the AUTO
as bright as usual. Make sure the shift into P (Park). The DRL will position when you start your vehicle,
instrument panel brightness knob stay off until the control is toggled Twilight Sentinel is automatically
is in the full bright position. See again or the vehicle is shifted out enabled.
Instrument Panel Illumination of P (Park).
Control on page 6‑6 for more If it is dark outside, your vehicle
This procedure applies only to headlamps and parking lamps will
information. vehicles first sold in the United turn on automatically.
If it is dark enough outside and States.
the exterior lamp control is off, Once it is bright enough outside,
a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED Twilight Sentinel the headlamps and parking lamps
message will display on the Driver will automatically turn back off.
Information Center (DIC). See Lamp Twilight Sentinel® is an automatic
headlamp system. When activated, Twilight Sentinel may also turn on
Messages on page 5‑43. when you drive through a dimly
this feature turns your headlamps
Turning the exterior lamp control and parking lamps on and off by lit area.
to off a second time, or turning on sensing how dark it is outside. Once you leave the dimly lit area, it
the headlamps will remove the may take about one minute before
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED the Twilight Sentinel turns off.
message in the DIC. If the parking During this brief delay, the
lamps or the fog lamps were turned instrument cluster may not be as
on instead, the HEADLAMPS bright as usual. Make sure the
SUGGESTED message will instrument panel dimmer is set to
continue to be displayed. full brightness. See Instrument
The regular headlamp system Panel Illumination Control on
should be turned on when needed. page 6‑6.
Be sure not to cover the light sensor
on the top of the instrument panel.


6-4 Lighting

To temporarily disable Twilight Hazard Warning Flashers When the hazard warning flashers
Sentinel, turn the band to O. are on, the turn signals will
not work.
To turn Twilight Sentinel back on,
turn the band to O again, then Turn and Lane-Change
release it. Signals
If the Twilight Sentinel has the
headlamps turned on and you turn
the ignition off, the headlamps will
stay on for a period of time while
you leave the vehicle.
Use the Driver Information Center to
turn Twilight Sentinel on or off and
to increase or decrease the length
of the delayed illumination period. The hazard warning flashers warn An arrow on the instrument panel
See “Personal Options” under others that you have a problem. cluster flashes in the direction of the
Vehicle Personalization on The button is located near the turn or lane change.
page 5‑54. center of the instrument panel. Move the lever all the way up or
The regular headlamp system | (Hazard Warning Flashers): down to signal a turn.
should be turned on when needed. Press to make the front and rear Raise or lower the lever until the
turn signal lamps flash on and off. arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
Press again to turn the flashers off. change. Release the lever and the
The hazard warning flashers work turn signal automatically flashes
no matter what mode the ignition is three times. If more flashes are
in, even if the ignition is turned off. desired, continue to hold the lever.


Lighting 6-5

The lever returns to its starting Fog Lamps If you turn the high-beam
position when it is released. headlamps on, the fog lamps will
If after signaling a turn or lane turn off. They will turn on again
change the arrows flash rapidly or when you switch to low-beam
do not come on, a signal bulb may headlamps.
be burned out. The ignition must be on for the
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb fog lamps to operate.
is not burned out, check the fuse. Some localities have laws that
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on require the headlamps to be on
page 10‑47. Use fog lamps for better vision in along with the fog lamps.
foggy or misty conditions.
Turn Signal on Chime
The fog lamps control is located on
A chime sounds if the turn signal the multifunction lever next to the
has been on for more than 1.2 km exterior lamp control.
(0.75 miles) of driving.
# (Fog Lamps): Turning the band
If you need to leave the turn to this position will turn the fog
signal on for more than 1.2 km lamps on.
(0.75 miles), turn off the signal and
then turn it back on. When you turn the fog lamps on,
the fog lamp light will appear on the
instrument panel cluster to indicate
that the fog lamps and the parking
lamps are on.


6-6 Lighting

Interior Lighting Be sure not to have this knob turned
all the way down with the lamps
Lighting Features
on during the day. The Driver
Instrument Panel Information Center (DIC) may not Entry/Exit Lighting
Illumination Control be visible. With entry lighting, the interior
lamps will come on when entering
Courtesy Lamps the vehicle. To illuminate your exit,
the interior lamps come on for about
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid
20 seconds when the engine is
is opened, the interior lamps will go
turned off.
on unless it is bright outside.
To turn the entry and exit lighting off,
You can also turn the courtesy
quickly turn the courtesy lamps on
The knob for this feature is located lamps on and off by pressing the
and off by pressing the instrument
on the left side of the instrument instrument panel brightness knob.
panel brightness knob.
panel.
Reading Lamps
Push the knob in to turn on the
interior lights. The inside rearview mirror includes
two reading lamps. The lamps will
Turn and hold the knob clockwise go on when a door is opened.
to brighten the lights or
When the doors are closed, press
counterclockwise to dim them. each lamp switch to turn them on
During the day, this knob will adjust individually.
the instrument panel brightness
and at night will adjust all interior
lighting.


Lighting 6-7

Battery Power Protection Exterior Lighting Battery
This vehicle has a feature to help Saver
prevent the battery from being If the manual parking lamps or
drained in case any of the following headlamps have been left on,
lamps are left on: the underhood the exterior lamps will turn off as
lamp, if your vehicle has this soon as the ignition is turned off or
feature, vanity mirror lamps, Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
cargo lamps, reading lamps, center is active. This protects against
console, or glove box lamps. If any draining the battery in case you
of these lamps are left on, they will have accidentally left the headlamps
automatically time-out after about or parking lamps on. The battery
10 minutes. To reset it, all of the saver does not work if the
above lamps must be turned off or headlamps are turned on after the
the ignition key on. ignition switch is turned to off.
If you need to leave the lamps on,
use the exterior lamp control to turn
the lamps back on.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

Infotainment Introduction To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
System Infotainment
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
Determine which radio the vehicle operation and controls of the
Introduction has and read the following pages to audio system.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 become familiar with its features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 { WARNING stations.
Radio Taking your eyes off the road for For more information, see Defensive
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 extended periods could cause a Driving on page 9‑3.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 crash resulting in injury or death
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Notice: Contact your dealer
to you or others. Do not give before adding any equipment.
Diversity Antenna System . . . . 7-11
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-11 extended attention to infotainment
tasks while driving. Adding audio or communication
Audio Players equipment could interfere with
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 the operation of the engine, radio,
This system provides access to or other systems, and could
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
many audio and non‐audio listings. damage them. Follow federal
Phone rules covering mobile radio and
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 telephone equipment.
Trademarks and License The vehicle has Retained
Agreements Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
Trademarks and License the audio system can be played
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 even after the ignition is turned off.


7-2 Infotainment System

See Retained Accessory Power Operation
(RAP) on page 9‑24 for more
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate and
LOCKED displays if the radio is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
When the when the ignition is in the Radio with CD, Six Disc Radio Similar
off position, a blinking red light on
the upper left side of the radio
The vehicle has one of these radios For more information, see
indicates that TheftLock® is armed.
as its audio system. Theft-Deterrent Feature on
An indicator light on the upper page 7‑2.
left side of the radio flashes when
the ignition is off, to indicate the
theft deterrent feature is set.



Playing the Radio Audio Settings Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press and hold O / e when no
Press to turn the system on and off. tone or speaker control is displayed O / e (Balance/Fade): To adjust
Turn to increase or decrease the to adjust all tone and speaker the Balance:
volume. controls to the middle position. Press and release O / e until
MUTE: Press to silence the AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED
BALANCE displays.
system. Press again to turn the displays.
sound on. . Turn the O / e knob to move
Adjusting the Tone
This button is not available on the the sound toward the right or the
(Bass/Treble)
Six-Disc CD Radio. left speakers.
O / e (Bass/Treble): To adjust
V (Information): Press until the the bass or treble:
. Press and hold the O / e knob
desired display is shown, then hold until the level changes to the
for two seconds until the radio Press and release O / e until middle position.
beeps once to change the default BASS or TREBLE displays.
To adjust the Fade:
display. The selected display is . Turn the O / e knob to
now the default.
increase or to decrease the
Press and release O / e until
For RDS: FADE displays
level.
Press V to change the display.
. Turn the O / e knob to move
. Press and hold the O / e knob
The display options are station the sound toward the front or the
until the level changes to the
name, RDS station frequency, rear speakers.
middle position.
PTY, and the name of the program . Press and hold the O / e knob
(if available).
until the level changes to the
middle position.



AUTO EQ (Automatic AUTO n (Automatic Volume): For vehicles with the Bose sound
Equalization): The radio saves Automatic volume automatically system:
separate AUTO EQ settings for adjusts the audio system to make Vehicles with the Bose sound
each preset and source. up for road and wind noise, by system include Bose AudioPilot®
For vehicles without the Bose sound increasing the volume as vehicle noise compensation technology.
system: speed increases. AudioPilot continuously adjusts the
. Press AUTO EQ to select For vehicles without the Bose sound audio system equalization to
equalization settings designed system: compensate for background noise.
for CLASSICAL, POP, ROCK, This feature is most effective at
1. Set the volume at the desired lower radio volume settings where
JAZZ, TALK, and COUNTRY. level. background noise can affect how
. Selecting CUSTOM or changing well the audio is heard. At higher
2. Press AUTO n to select
bass or treble, returns the EQ to volume settings, there may be little
the manual bass and treble AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum),
or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For
settings. AUTO VOLUME MED (medium),
additional information on AudioPilot,
or AUTO VOLUME MAX
For vehicles with the Bose sound visit bose.com/audiopilot.
(maximum). Each higher setting
system: provides more volume To use AudioPilot:
. Press AUTO EQ to select compensation at faster vehicle 1. Set the volume at the desired
equalization settings from EQ1 speeds. level.
through EQ6. 3. Press AUTO n until AUTO 2. Press AUTO n until AUTO
. Selecting CUSTOM or changing VOLUME OFF displays to turn VOLUME ON displays.
bass or treble, returns the EQ to automatic volume off.
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO
the manual bass and treble
settings. VOLUME OFF displays to turn
off AudioPilot.



Radio Messages Radio With RDS, the radio can:
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): . Seek to stations broadcasting
Displays if the radio is no longer AM-FM Radio the selected type of
configured properly for the vehicle. programming.
The vehicle must be returned to Radio Data System (RDS) . Receive announcements
your dealer for service. RDS features are available for use concerning local and national
LOC (Locked): Displays when the only on FM stations that broadcast emergencies.
TheftLock system has locked up. RDS information. The station name . Display messages from radio
The vehicle must be returned to or call letters display while the radio
stations.
your dealer for service. is tuned to an RDS station.
. Seek to stations with traffic
If any error occurs repeatedly or This system relies upon receiving
announcements.
cannot be corrected, contact your specific information from these
dealer. stations and works only when the . Provide the time of day.
information is available. In rare . Provide a program type (PTY)
cases, a radio station can broadcast for current programming.
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
. Provide the name of the program
If this happens, contact the radio being broadcast.
station.



RDS Messages To scroll through the message, Press TRAF to turn off the traffic
press and release . A new group of announcements if TA is on the
ALERT!: Alert warns of local
words displays after every press of display.
or national emergencies.
the button. Once the complete The radio plays the traffic
When an alert announcement
message has displayed, INFO announcement even if the volume
comes on the current radio
disappears from the display until is low. The radio interrupts the play
station, ALERT! displays.
another new message is received. of a CD if the last tuned station
The announcement is heard,
The last message can be displayed broadcasts traffic announcements.
even if the volume is low or a CD
by pressing this button. The last
is playing. If a CD is playing, play
stops during the announcement.
message is displayed until a new Finding a Station
message is received or the radio is
Alert announcements cannot be BAND: Press to switch between
tuned to a different station.
turned off. FM1, FM2, or AM.
NO INFO displays when a message
ALERT! is not affected by tests of
is not available from a station.
O / e (Tune): Turn to select radio
the emergency broadcast system. stations.
This feature is not supported by all TRAF (Traffic): TA (traffic) displays
RDS stations. when the station broadcasts traffic
t SEEK u : Press to go to the
previous or to the next station and
announcements.
4 (Information): If the current stay there.
station has a message, INFO Press TRAF and the radio seeks to
The radio only stops at stations with
displays. Press to see the a station that broadcasts traffic
a strong signal.
message. The message can display announcements. When a station is
the artist, song title, call in phone found, the radio stops seeking and t SCAN u : Press and hold t
numbers, etc. TA displays. NO TRAFFIC INFO or u for two seconds until
displays if a station that broadcasts FREQUENCY SCAN displays.
If the entire message is not
traffic announcements cannot be The radio goes to a station, plays
displayed, parts of the message
found. for a few seconds, then goes on to
appears every three seconds.
the next station. Press t or u
again to stop scanning.



To scan preset stations: Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, Satellite Radio
six AM, six M1, and six XM2), and
Press and hold t or u for equalization settings for each XM™ Satellite Radio Service
four seconds until PRESET SCAN station can be programmed on the
displays. The radio goes to the next XM is a satellite radio service
six numbered pushbuttons. To set based in the 48 contiguous United
preset station, plays for a few presets:
seconds, then goes to the next States and 10 Canadian provinces.
1. Turn the radio on. XM Satellite Radio has a wide
preset station. Press t or u again
variety of programming and
or press one of the pushbuttons to 2. Press BAND to select FM1,
FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2. commercial-free music, coast to
stop scanning presets. coast, and in digital-quality sound.
The radio only scans stations with a 3. Tune in the desired station. A service fee is required to receive
strong signal. 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the the XM service. If XM Service needs
equalization. to be reactivated, the radio will
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
display "No Subscription Please
Press to play stations that are 5. Press and hold one of the six Renew" on channel XM1.
programmed to the radio preset numbered pushbuttons until the For more information, contact
pushbuttons. radio beeps once. XM at www.xmradio.com or
Storing Radio Stations 6. Repeat the steps for each 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
pushbutton. and www.xmradio.ca or
Drivers are encouraged to store 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
radio station while the vehicle is
parked. See Defensive Driving on
page 9‑3. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.



Finding an XM Channel Press t or u again or press one of If the radio cannot find the desired
the pushbuttons to stop scanning category, NONE displays and the
BAND: Press to switch between
presets. radio returns to the last station
FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.
tuned.
O / e (Tune): Turn to manually 1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
SCAN: To scan the stations within
select an XM channel. Press to play channels that are
programmed to the radio preset a category:
t SEEK u : Press to go to the pushbuttons. 1. Press CAT. The last selected
previous or to the next XM channel.
category displays.
t SCAN u : Press and hold t Finding a Category (CAT)
Station 2. Turn the O / e knob to select
or u for two seconds until
To select an XM station by category: a category.
FREQUENCY SCAN displays.
The radio goes to a channel, plays 1. Press the CAT button. The last 3. Press and hold t or u until
for a few seconds, then goes on selected category displays. a beep sounds and SCAN
to the next station. Press t or u CATEGORY displays. The radio
again to stop scanning. 2. Turn the O / e knob to select begins scanning the stations in
a category. the category.
To scan preset stations:
3. Press t or u to go to a 4. Press t or u to stop scanning.
Press and hold t or u for category's station. SEEKING
four seconds until PRESET CATEGORY displays.
SCAN displays. The radio goes
to the next preset station, 4. To go to another station within
plays for a few seconds, then that category, press the CAT
goes to the next preset station. button to display the category,
then press t or u to go to
another station.



Storing XM Channels XM Radio Messages CH Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
Drivers are encouraged to store XL (Explicit Language
your XM Subscription package.
XM channels while the vehicle is Channels): These channels, or any
parked. See Defensive Driving on others, can be blocked by calling CH Unavail: This previously
page 9‑3. Tune to stored radio 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and assigned channel is no longer
stations using the presets, favorites 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. assigned. Tune to another station.
button, and steering wheel controls, If this station was one of the
Updating: The encryption code
if the vehicle has this feature. presets, choose another station
in the receiver is being updated,
for that preset button.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and no action is required.
and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2), This process should take no No Info: No artist, song title,
and equalization settings for each longer than 30 seconds. category, or text information is
station can be programmed on the available at this time on this
No Signal: The system is
six numbered pushbuttons. channel. The system is working
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
properly.
To set presets: is in a location that is blocking the
XM signal. When the vehicle is No Subscription Please Renew:
1. Tune to a channel.
moved into an open area, the signal XM subscription needs to be
2. Press AUTO EQ to select the should return. reactivated. Contact XM at
equalization. www.xmradio.com or call
Loading XM: The audio system is
3. Press and hold one of the six 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
acquiring and processing audio and
numbered pushbuttons until the www.xmradio.ca or call
text data. No action is needed.
radio beeps once. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
This message should disappear
4. Repeat the steps for each shortly. Not Found: There are no channels
pushbutton. available for the selected category.
CH Off Air: This channel is not
The system is working properly.
currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.



XM Locked: The XM receiver in Radio Reception FM Stereo
the vehicle may have previously
Frequency interference and static FM signals only reach about
been in another vehicle. For security
can occur during normal radio 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
reception if items such as cell phone the radio has a built-in electronic
swapped between vehicles. If this
chargers, vehicle convenience circuit that automatically works to
message is received after having
accessories, and external electronic reduce interference, some static
the vehicle serviced, check with
devices are plugged into the can occur, especially around tall
your dealer.
accessory power outlet. If there is buildings or hills, causing the sound
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, interference or static, unplug the to fade in and out.
this message will alternate with the item from the accessory power
XM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. XM™ Satellite Radio Service
outlet.
This label is needed to activate the XM Satellite Radio Service gives
service. AM digital radio reception from coast to
Unknown: If this message is The range for most AM stations is coast in the 48 contiguous United
received when tuned to channel 0, greater than for FM, especially at States, and in Canada. Just as
there may be a receiver fault. night. The longer range can cause with FM, tall buildings or hills can
Consult with your dealer. station frequencies to interfere interfere with satellite radio signals,
with each other. For better radio causing the sound to fade in and
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does out. In addition, traveling or standing
reception, most AM radio stations
not clear within a short period of under heavy foliage, bridges,
time, the receiver may have a fault. boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels garages, or tunnels may cause loss
Consult with your dealer. of the XM signal for a period of time.
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and Cellular Phone Usage
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try Cellular phone usage may cause
reducing the treble on the radio. interference with the vehicle's
radio. This interference may occur



when making or receiving phone Audio Players Care of CDs
calls, charging the phone's battery,
Store CDs in their original cases or
or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an CD Player other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust.
increased level of static while Care of the CD Player The CD player scans the bottom of
listening to the radio. If static is
Do not add labels to a CD; it could the disc. If the bottom of a CD is
received while listening to the
get caught in the CD player. Use a damaged it may not play properly or
radio, unplug the cellular phone
marking pen to write on the top of at all. Do not touch the bottom of a
and turn it off.
the CD if a description is needed. CD while handling it. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the
Diversity Antenna System Do not use CD lens cleaners, they edge of the hole and the outer edge.
The AM-FM antenna is a hidden could damage the CD player.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a
self‐tuning system. It optimizes the Notice: If a label is added to a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen a
AM and FM signals relative to CD, more than one CD is inserted clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
the vehicle's position and radio into the slot at a time, or an detergent solution mixed with water,
station source. No maintenance or attempt is made to play scratched and clean it. Make sure the wiping
adjustments are needed. or damaged CDs, the CD player process starts from the center to
could be damaged. While using the edge.
Satellite Radio Antenna the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label, Using the CD Player
For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio load one CD at a time, and keep
Service, the antenna is located on The CD player can play smaller
the CD player and the loading slot 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an
the roof or on the trunk lid of the free of foreign materials, liquids,
vehicle. Keep the antenna clear adapter ring.
and debris.
of obstructions for clear radio
reception. If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.



A CD in the player stays in the Playing a CD AUTO EQ (Automatic
player when the ignition is turned Equalization): Press to select the
off. When the ignition or radio is
O / e (Tune): Turn to go to the equalization setting while playing a
next or previous track.
turned on, the CD starts to play CD. The equalization is stored
where it stopped, if it was the last { (Reverse): Press and hold to when a CD is played. For more
selected audio source. reverse within the current track. information on AUTO EQ, see
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this
Loading a CD section.
to fast forward through the current
Insert the CD partway into the slot, track. BAND: Press to listen to the radio
label side up, until the player pulls when a CD is playing. The inactive
the CD in. The CD begins playing t SEEK u : Press the left arrow
to go to the start of the current track CD remains inside the radio for
automatically. future listening.
if more than eight seconds have
The CD symbol displays when a CD played. Press the right arrow to go CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
is inserted, and the track number to the start of the next track. If either a CD when listening to the radio.
displays when each new track starts arrow is held or pressed more than CD displays when a CD is in the
to play. once, the player continues moving player. If your system has a remote
M (Load): Press to load CD into backward or forward through playback device, pressing this
the CD player. the CD. button a second time allows the
To insert CD: t SCAN u : To scan one CD, remote device to play.
1. Press M. press and hold either arrow for X (Eject): Press to eject a CD
more than two seconds until SCAN from the CD Radio.
2. Load a CD and insert the CD displays and a beep sounds.
partway into the slot, label side The radio goes to the next track, CD Radio: Press X to eject a CD.
up when INSERT CD displays. plays for 10 seconds, then goes to RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a
The player pulls the CD in. the next track. Press either arrow track or an entire CD over again.
again to stop scanning.



Single CD Radio: 3. Press and hold R until a beep After a track has been deleted, the
Press RPT to hear a track over sounds and ADDED SONG remaining tracks are moved up the
again; REPEAT displays. Press displays. list. When another track is added to
again to turn off repeat; REPEAT the song list, the track is added to
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to save the end of the list.
OFF displays. other selections.
RDM (Random): Press to hear the To delete the entire song list:
SONGLIST FULL displays if more
tracks in random, rather than than 20 selections are stored. 1. Press R to turn song list on.
sequential order. S-LIST displays.
To play tracks:
CD Radio:
1. Press R. One beep sounds and 2. Press and hold R for more than
Press and release RDM until S-LIST displays. The recorded four seconds. One beep sounds
RANDOM DISC PLAY displays. tracks begin to play in the order and SONGLIST EMPTY displays
Press and release RDM until they were saved. to confirm that the song list has
RANDOM OFF displays to turn off been deleted.
random play. 2. Press t or u to go back or
forward within the saved tracks. If a CD is ejected, and the song
R (Song List): The Song List list contains saved tracks from
feature can save 20 track selections. To delete tracks: that CD, those tracks are
To save tracks: 1. Press R to turn song list on. automatically deleted from the
S-LIST displays. song list. Any tracks saved to the
1. If S-LIST is displayed, press R song list again are added to the
to turn it off. 2. Press t or u , and use bottom of the list.
2. Select the desired CD by the O / e knob to select the To end song list mode, press R.
pressing the numbered desired track to be deleted. One beep sounds and S-LIST is
pushbutton and then use u 3. Press and hold R until SONG removed from the display.
or O / e knob to select the REMOVED displays.
track to be saved.



MP3 Format Empty Folder: Playlists
Radios with the MP3 feature can Folders that do not contain files are Playlists that do not have a .m3u
only play CD-R discs. Do not mix skipped, and the player advances to or .wpl extension may not work.
standard audio and MP3 files on the the next folder that contains files. Preprogrammed playlists created by
same disc. WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Supported Bit Rates
Supported File Structure Jukebox™ software are supported
The following bit rates are and cannot be edited using the
Radios with the MP3 feature support supported: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, radio.
up to: 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, Playing an MP3
. 50 folders
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
. 11 folders in depth Insert a CD partway into the slot,
320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
label side up. The player pulls it in,
. 50 playlists File Naming and READING displays. The CD
. 255 files ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags are should begin playing and the CD
symbol displays.
. 10 sessions supported. The track name
contained in the ID3 tag is shown If the ignition or radio is turned off
Root Directory: on the display. The display only with a CD-R in the player, it stays
The root directory is treated as a shows up to 32 characters for track in the player. When the ignition or
folder. Files are stored in the root and file names. radio is turned on, the CD-R starts
directory when the disc or storage If the track name is not contained in to play where it stopped, if it was
device does not contain folders. the ID3 tag, the display shows the the last selected audio source.
Files accessed from the root file name without the file extension. As each new track starts to play,
directory display as F1 ROOT. the track number displays.



Order of Play Press and release RDM until: t SEEK u : Press t to go to the
Tracks are played sequentially in . RANDOM DISC PLAY displays start of the current track, if more
the following order: to play the tracks on the CD in than eight seconds have played.
1. Playlists. random order. Press u to go to the next track.
. RANDOM FOLDER displays to Press t or u more than once to
2. Files contained in the root
play the tracks in the folder in continue moving backward or
directory.
random order. forward through the CD.
3. Files contained in folders. . RANDOM OFF displays to turn V (Information): Press to display
O / e (Tune): Turn to go to the off random play. the artist name and album contained
next or previous track. in the ID3 tag.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a
{ (Previous Folder): Press to go track, CD, or folder over again. BAND: Press to listen to the radio
to the first track in the previous when a CD is playing. The inactive
folder. Press and hold to reverse Press and release RPT until:
CD remains inside the radio for
through the current track. . REPEAT displays to repeat a future listening.
| (Next Folder): Press to go to track.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
the first track in the next folder. . REPEAT ONE DISC displays to a CD when listening to the radio.
Press and hold to fast forward the repeat a CD. The CD symbol displays when a
current track. . REPEAT FOLDER displays to CD is loaded.
RDM (Random): Press to hear the repeat a folder.
tracks in random, rather than . REPEAT OFF displays to turn off
sequential order. repeated play.



Auxiliary Devices Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn Phone
to increase or decrease the volume
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack of the portable player. Additional Bluetooth
The radio system has an auxiliary volume adjustments can be made
from the portable device. For vehicles equipped with
input jack located on the right side
Bluetooth capability, the system can
of the faceplate. This is not an audio BAND: Press to listen to the radio interact with many cell phones,
output; do not plug the headphone while a portable audio device is allowing:
set into the front auxiliary input jack. playing. The portable audio device
An external audio device can be continues playing. . Placement and receipt of calls in
connected to the auxiliary input jack a hands-free mode.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
for use as another source for audio . Sharing of the cell phone’s
play a CD while a portable audio
listening. address book or contact list with
device is playing. Press again and
Drivers are encouraged to set up the system begins playing audio the vehicle.
any auxiliary device while the from the connected portable audio To minimize driver distraction,
vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive player. If a portable audio player is before driving, and with the vehicle
Driving on page 9‑3. connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE parked:
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to displays. If a portable audio player
is not connected, AUX INPUT
. Become familiar with the
the radio’s front auxiliary input jack features of the cell phone.
to use a portable audio player. DEVICE does not display.
Organize the phone book and
The radio displays AUX INPUT contact lists clearly and delete
DEVICE when a device is duplicate or rarely used entries.
connected and begins playing If possible, program speed dial
audio from that device. or other shortcuts.
. Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.


. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. A Bluetooth system can use a When to Speak: A short tone
The system may not work with Bluetooth‐capable cell phone with a sounds after the system responds
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in Hands‐Free Profile to make and indicating when it is waiting for a
this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system voice command. Wait until the tone
. If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the and then speak.
dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth calm and natural voice.
address book or contact list. system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
See “Voice Pass-Thru” in this Not all phones support all functions, Audio System
section for more information. and not all phones work with the
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone system, sound comes through
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
Numbers” in this section for the vehicle's front audio system
information on compatible phones.
more information. speakers and overrides the audio
Voice Recognition system. Use the audio system
{ WARNING The Bluetooth system uses voice
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
recognition to interpret voice adjusted volume level remains in
When using a cell phone, it can commands to dial phone numbers
be distracting to look too long or memory for later calls. To prevent
and name tags. missed calls, a minimum volume
too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment For additional information, say level is used if the volume is turned
(navigation) system. Taking your “Help” while you are in a voice down too low.
eyes off the road too long or recognition menu.
too often could cause a crash Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
resulting in injury or death. a minimum. The system may not
Focus your attention on driving. recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.



Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information Pairing a Phone
Use the buttons located on the . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press and hold b / g for
steering wheel to operate the capability cannot be paired to two seconds.
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. the vehicle as an MP3 player. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
See Steering Wheel Controls on . Up to five cell phones can be can be skipped.
page 5‑3 for more information. paired to the Bluetooth system. 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to . The pairing process is disabled with instructions and a four‐digit
answer incoming calls, confirm when the vehicle is moving. Personal Identification Number
system information, and start (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
speech recognition.
. Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the 4. Start the pairing process on the
i (Phone On Hook): Press to pairing information on the cell cell phone that you want to pair.
end a call, reject a call, or cancel an phone changes or the cell phone For help with this process, see
operation. is deleted from the system. the cell phone manufacturer's
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can user guide.
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone be connected to the Bluetooth 5. Locate the device named “Your
must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time. Vehicle” in the list on the cell
system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are phone. Follow the instructions
vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the on the cell phone to enter the
the cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first PIN that was provided in Step 3.
guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the After the PIN is successfully
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired entered, the system prompts you
phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To connect to a to provide a name for the paired
made using OnStar Hands‐Free different paired phone, see cell phone. This name will be
Calling, if equipped. See OnStar “Connecting to a Different used to indicate which phones
Overview on page 14‑1 for more Phone” later in this section. are paired and connected to the
information. vehicle. The system responds



with “<phone name> has been 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks Storing and Deleting Phone
successfully paired” after the which phone to delete. Numbers
pairing process is complete. 4. Say the name of the phone you The system can store up to
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair want to delete. 30 phone numbers as name tags in
additional phones. the Hands‐Free Directory that is
Connecting to a Different Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected shared between the Bluetooth and
To connect to a different cell phone, OnStar systems, if equipped.
Phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
The system can list all cell phones next available cell phone in the The following commands are used
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is order in which all the available cell to delete and store phone numbers.
also connected to the vehicle, the phones were paired. Depending on Store: This command will store a
system responds with “is connected” which cell phone you want to phone number, or a group of
after that phone name. connect to, you may have to use numbers as a name tag.
this command several times.
1. Press and hold b / g for Digit Store: This command allows
two seconds. 1. Press and hold b / g for a phone number to be stored as a
two seconds. name tag by entering the digits one
2. Say “Bluetooth.” at a time.
3. Say “List.” 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Delete: This command is used to
3. Say “Change phone.” delete individual name tags.
Deleting a Paired Phone
. If another cell phone is Delete All Name Tags: This
If the phone name you want to
found, the response will be command deletes all stored
delete is unknown, see “Listing All “<Phone name> is now
Paired and Connected Phones.” name tags in the Hands‐Free
connected.” Calling Directory and the OnStar
1. Press and hold b / g for . If another cell phone is not Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
two seconds. found, the original phone if equipped.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” remains connected.



Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time, To delete all name tags:
that you want to store. After
1. Press and hold b / g for each digit is entered, the system 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard two seconds.
2. Say “Store.” followed by a tone. After the last 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
digit has been entered, say
3. Say the phone number or group “Store,” and then follow the Listing Stored Numbers
of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
at once with no pauses, then The list command will list all stored
save a name tag for this number. numbers and name tags.
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for Using the “Delete” Command Using the “List” Command
this number.
1. Press and hold b / g for 1. Press and hold b / g for
Using the “Digit Store” Command two seconds. two seconds.
If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Delete.” 2. Say “Directory.”
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the 3. Say the name tag you want to 3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
last number. delete.
4. Say “List.”
To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command Making a Call
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored Calls can be made using the
name tags in the Hands‐Free following commands.
1. Press and hold b / g for Calling Directory and the OnStar
two seconds. Dial or Call: The dial or call
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, command can be used
2. Say “Digit Store.” if equipped. interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.



Digit Dial: This command allows a If an unwanted number is Once connected, the person called
phone number to be dialed by recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio
entering the digits one at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the speakers.
Re‐dial: This command is used to last number.
Receiving a Call
dial the last number used on the cell To hear all of the numbers
When an incoming call is received,
phone. recognized by the system, say
the audio system mutes and a ring
“Verify” at any time.
Using the “Dial” or “Call” tone is heard in the vehicle.
Command 1. Press and hold b / g for . Press b / g to answer the call.
two seconds.
1. Press and hold b / g for . Press i to ignore a call.
two seconds. 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
Call Waiting
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each Call waiting must be supported on
3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system the cell phone and enabled by the
pausing, or say the name tag. repeats back the digit it heard wireless service carrier.
Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the last . Press b / g to answer an
will be heard through the audio digit has been entered, incoming call when another call
speakers. say “Dial.” is active. The original call is
Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called placed on hold.
The digit dial command allows a
will be heard through the audio . Press b / g again to return to
speakers. the original call.
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time. Using the “Re‐dial” Command . To ignore the incoming call, no
After each digit is entered, the 1. Press and hold b / g for action is required.
system repeats back the digit it
two seconds. . Press i to disconnect the
heard followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” current call and switch to the call
on hold.



Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call Transferring Audio from the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside
supported on the cell phone and the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the
enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call vehicle:
carrier. cannot hear them.
1. Press b / g.
1. While on a call, press b / g. . To mute a call, press b / g , and 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
2. Say “Three‐way call.” then say “Mute call.”
Transferring Audio to the
3. Use the dial or call command to . To cancel mute, press b / g , Bluetooth System from a Cell
dial the number of the third party and then say “Un‐mute call.” Phone
to be called. During a call with the audio on the
Transferring a Call
4. Once the call is connected, cell phone, press b / g. The audio
Audio can be transferred between
press b / g to link all callers the Bluetooth system and the cell transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
together. phone. does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on the
Ending a Call The cell phone must be paired and cell phone. See your cell phone
connected with the Bluetooth manufacturer's user guide for more
Press i to end a call. system before a call can be information.
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.



Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency This includes all saved name tags in
(DTMF) Tones the phone book and phone pairing
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
information. For information on how
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send to delete this information, see the
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as previous section “Deleting a Paired
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can Phone” and the previous sections
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a on deleting name tags.
To access contacts stored in the menu‐driven phone system.
cell phone: Account numbers can also be Other Information
stored for use.
The Bluetooth® word mark and
1. Press and hold b / g for Sending a Number or Name Tag logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
two seconds. SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
During a Call
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command by General Motors is under license.
can be skipped. 1. Press b / g. The system Other trademarks and trade names
responds “Ready,” followed by are those of their respective owners.
3. Say “Voice.” The system a tone.
responds “OK, accessing See Radio Frequency Statement on
<phone name>.” 2. Say “Dial.” page 13‑21 for information
The cell phone's normal prompt 3. Say the number or name tag regarding Part 15 of the Federal
messages will go through their cycle to send. Communications Commission (FCC)
according to the phone's operating rules and Industry Canada
Clearing the System Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
instructions.
Unless information is deleted out
of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
it will be retained indefinitely.



Trademarks and
License Agreements

Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license
under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and the Symbol
are registered trademarks and “Made for iPod” means that an
DTS Digital Surround and the DTS electronic accessory has been
logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. designed to connect specifically to
All Rights Reserved. iPod and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
iPod is a trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

A. Driver Temperature Controls F. Air Conditioning
B. Display G. Fan Control
C. Passenger Temperature Control H. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. AUTO I. Defrost
E. Recirculation J. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

When the vehicle is first started, After a 10 second display of the available. The system starts out
the display shows the driver's current settings, the word AUTO, blowing air at the floor but may
temperature setting, the outside the driver's temperature setting and change modes automatically as
temperature, the fan speed, and the the outside temperature will be the vehicle warms up to maintain
air delivery, for about 10 seconds. shown. The system operates to the chosen temperature setting.
The outside temperature is shown reach the set temperature as quickly The length of time needed for
in the center of the display. as possible. The AUTO control warm up depends on the outside
The digital display will show the system works best with the windows temperature and the length of
readings in Fahrenheit or Celsius. up and the removable roof installed time that has elapsed since the
See “Personal Options” under or the convertible top up. vehicle was last driven.
Vehicle Personalization on 1. Press the AUTO button. 3. Wait for the system to regulate.
page 5‑54 for information on 2. Adjust the temperature to a This may take from 10 to
changing your display. comfortable setting between 30 minutes. Then adjust the
16°C (60°F) and 32°C (90°F). temperature, if necessary.
Automatic Operation
Choosing the coldest or warmest Do not cover the solar sensor
AUTO (Automatic): Press the temperature setting will not located in the center of the
AUTO button to place the entire cause the system to heat or cool instrument panel, near the
system in the automatic mode. any faster. A setting of 23°C windshield. For more information
When automatic operation is active, (73°F) is suggested. on the solar sensor, see “Sensors”
the system automatically controls later in this section.
the inside temperature, the air In cold weather, the system will
delivery mode, and the fan speed. start at reduced fan speeds to
avoid blowing cold air into
your vehicle until warmer air is



Manual Operation Pressing the arrows will delete To change the current mode, select
AUTO from the digital display. one of the following:
Driver Power/Temperature: Press
The fan graphics with the fan speed H (Vent): Air is directed to the
the driver temperature knob to turn
bars will be shown. The AUTO instrument panel outlets, with some
the climate control system off. This
button must be pressed to return air directed to the floor outlets.
is the only setting that completely
to the automatic fan control.
shuts off the fan. The digital display % (Bi-Level): Air is divided
shows only the outside temperature. If the airflow seems low when the between the instrument panel and
The driver and the passenger set fan speed is at the highest setting, floor outlets.
temperature and the air intake mode the passenger compartment air filter
can still be adjusted when the may need to be replaced. For more 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
climate control is off. information, see Passenger floor outlets, with some air directed
Compartment Air Filter on page 8‑7. to the windshield and side window
Passenger Power/Temperature: defogger outlets.
Press the passenger temperature N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
knob to turn the passenger's climate Press this button to manually lock in - (Floor/Defog): This mode clears
control system on or off. Turn the the current air delivery setting and the windows of fog or moisture.
knob to increase or decrease the to stop the automatic mode control. Air is directed to the windshield
temperature for the passenger. If the Pressing N deletes AUTO from and the floor outlets, with a small
passenger's climate control system the digital display and the mode amount to the side window
is off, the driver's temperature knob graphics will be shown. To change outlets. In this mode, the system
will control the temperature for the automatically turns off the
the setting, press N again. recirculation and runs the air
entire vehicle.
The AUTO button must be pressed conditioning compressor unless the
x 9 w (Fan): Press to increase to return to the automatic mode outside temperature is at or below
or decrease the fan speed. The fan selection. freezing. The recirculation mode
speed setting will appear in the cannot be selected while in the
display. defog mode.



1 (Defrost): This mode clears the ^ (Air Conditioning Off): Press to On hot days, open the windows to
windows of fog or frost more quickly. turn the air conditioning compressor let hot inside air escape; then close
Air is directed to the windshield, with off. Press AUTO to return to them. This helps to reduce the time
a small amount directed to the side automatic operation. When in it takes for the vehicle to cool down.
window outlets. The indicator light AUTO, the air conditioning It also helps the system to operate
comes on and the digital display will compressor comes on automatically, more efficiently.
show the defrost mode symbol and as needed. For quick cool down on hot days
fan speed when the front defrost Air conditioning does not operate press the AUTO button and
mode is being used. In this mode, at temperatures below about adjust the temperature to a cool,
the system automatically turns off 2°C to 4°C (35°F to 40°F). comfortable setting. To achieve
the recirculation and runs the air In temperatures above 4°C (40°F), maximum cool down, do the
conditioning compressor, unless the the air conditioning cannot be following:
outside temperature is at or below turned off in defrost and defog,
freezing. Recirculation cannot be as it helps to remove moisture from
1. Select H mode.
selected while in the defrost mode. the vehicle. It also helps to keep the 2. Press ?.
Pressing 1 again will return the windows clear.
system to the last operating mode. 3. Select the a/c on.
You may notice a slight change in
For severe ice conditions, turn the engine performance when the air 4. Select the coolest temperature.
driver's temperature knob to 32°C conditioning compressor shuts off 5. Select the highest fan speed.
(90°F) while in defrost mode. and turns on again. This is normal.
Using these settings together for
Do not drive the vehicle until all the The system is designed to make
long periods of time may cause
windows are clear. adjustments to help with fuel
the air inside of your vehicle to
economy while still maintaining the
become too dry. To prevent this
selected temperature.



from happening, after the air in Sensors If the outside temperature goes up,
the vehicle has cooled, turn the the displayed temperature will not
The solar sensor on the vehicle
recirculation mode off. change until:
monitors the solar heat and uses
The air conditioning system the information to maintain the . The vehicle's speed is above
removes moisture from the air, so a selected temperature when 19 km/h (12 mph) for
small amount of water might drip operating in AUTO mode by five minutes.
under the vehicle while idling or automatically adjusting the . The vehicle's speed is above
after turning off the engine. This is temperature, fan speed, and air 52 km/h (32 mph) for two and
normal. delivery system. The system may one‐half minutes.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn also supply cooler air to the side
of the vehicle facing the sun. These delays prevent false
the recirculation mode on or off. readings. If the temperature goes
An indicator light comes on to show The recirculation mode will also be
activated, as necessary. Do not down, the outside temperature
that recirculation is on. This mode will be shown when you start the
prevents outside air from entering cover the solar sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel near vehicle. If it has been turned off
your vehicle. It can be used to for less than three hours, the
prevent outside air and odors from the windshield or the system will not
work properly. temperature will be recalled from the
entering your vehicle and to help previous vehicle operation.
cool the air inside your vehicle more There is also a sensor located
quickly. Recirculation mode is not behind the front bumper. This There is also an inside temperature
available in defrost or defog mode. sensor reads the outside air sensor located to the left of the
temperature and helps to maintain ignition switch. The automatic
the temperature inside the vehicle. climate control system uses this
Any cover on the front of the vehicle sensor to receive information, so if
could give a false reading in the you block or cover it, the system will
temperature. not function properly.



Rear Window Defogger The vehicle has heated outside Air Vents
rearview mirrors. The mirrors will
The rear window defogger uses a Use the tab located on the air
heat to help clear fog or frost from
warming grid to remove fog or frost outlets to change the direction of
the surface of the mirrors when the
from the rear window. the airflow.
rear window defogger button is
The rear window defogger only pressed.
Operation Tips
works when the engine is running.
For vehicles with a power . Clear away any ice, snow,
= (Rear Window Defogger): convertible top, the rear window
or leaves from the air inlets at
Press to turn the rear window defogger and heated mirrors are
the base of the windshield that
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear automatically disabled when the
may block the flow of air into the
as much snow from the rear window power convertible top is moving
vehicle.
as possible. An indicator light or down.
comes on to show that the rear . Use of non-GM approved hood
Notice: Do not use anything
window defogger is on. deflectors may adversely affect
sharp on the inside of the rear
the performance of the system.
The rear window defogger turns off window. If you do, you could cut
about 10 minutes after the button is or damage the warming grid, and . Keep the area around the base
pressed when traveling less than the repairs would not be covered of the center stack console and
48 km/h (30 mph). If turned on by the vehicle warranty. Do not air path under the seats clear of
again, the defogger only runs for attach a temporary vehicle objects to help circulate the air
about five minutes before turning license, tape, a decal, or anything inside of the vehicle more
off. The defogger can also be turned similar to the defogger grid. effectively.
off by turning off the engine.



Maintenance The passenger compartment air
filter is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment
Passenger Compartment near the battery. See Engine
Air Filter Compartment Overview on
page 10‑8.
The passenger compartment air
filter removes certain particles from To check or replace the air filter:
the air including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow,
which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the
filter may need to be replaced.
See Maintenance Schedule on 3. Remove the filter and install the
page 11‑3. new air filter.
Notice: Driving without a 4. Replace the filter cover.
passenger compartment air filter
in place can cause water and 5. Attach the retainer clips.
small particles, like paper and
leaves, to be pulled into your
climate control system which may
cause damage to it. Make sure 1. Remove the cover retainer
you always replace the old filter clips (A) from the passenger
with a new one. compartment air filter cover.
2. Remove the cover.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving and Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-18
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-32
Operating Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-19
9-20 Brakes
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Antilock Brake
Retained Accessory System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Driving Information Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Shifting Into Park Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 (Automatic Ride Control Systems
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Traction Control
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parking (Manual Active Handling System . . . . . 9-38
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Parking over Things Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-43
Racing or Other Competitive That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-43
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Engine Exhaust
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Cruise Control
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Running the Vehicle While
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-10 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13 Automatic Transmission
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-27
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29


9-2 Driving and Operating

Fuel
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48 distractions.
Gasoline Specifications Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-49 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
California Fuel and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 activities divert your attention Program all trip information into
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 away from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Filling a Portable Fuel governments have enacted laws driving.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 regarding driver distraction. . Wait until the vehicle is parked
Become familiar with the local laws
Towing to retrieve items that have fallen
in your area.
General Towing to the floor.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
Conversions and Add-Ons to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Add-On Electrical . Keep pets in an appropriate
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.



Defensive Driving Drunk Driving
{ WARNING
Defensive driving means “always Death and injury associated with
Taking your eyes off the road too expect the unexpected.” The first drinking and driving is a global
long or too often could cause a step in driving defensively is to wear tragedy.
crash resulting in injury or death. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
Focus your attention on driving. page 3‑8. { WARNING
. Assume that other road users
Refer to the infotainment section (pedestrians, bicyclists, and Drinking and then driving is
for more information on using that other drivers) are going to be very dangerous. Your reflexes,
system, including pairing and using careless and make mistakes. perceptions, attentiveness, and
a cell phone. Anticipate what they might do judgment can be affected by
and be ready. even a small amount of alcohol.
If equipped, refer to the navigation You can have a serious — or
manual for information on that . Allow enough following distance
even fatal — collision if you drive
system, including pairing and using between you and the driver in
front of you. after drinking.
a cell phone.
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.



Control of a Vehicle Helpful braking tips to keep in mind Steering
include:
Braking, steering, and accelerating Magnetic Effort Steering
are important factors in helping to
. Keep enough distance between
control a vehicle while driving. you and the vehicle in front This system continuously adjusts
of you. the effort felt when steering at all
vehicle speeds. It provides ease
Braking . Avoid needless heavy braking.
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel
Braking action involves perception . Keep pace with traffic. at highway speeds.
time and reaction time. Deciding to If the engine ever stops while the
push the brake pedal is perception Hydraulic Power Steering
vehicle is being driven, brake
time. Actually doing it is normally but do not pump the Your vehicle has hydraulic
reaction time. brakes. Doing so could make the power steering. It may require
Average driver reaction time is pedal harder to push down. If the maintenance. See Power Steering
about three-quarters of a second. engine stops, there will be some Fluid Power Steering Fluid on
In that time, a vehicle moving at power brake assist but it will be page 10‑32.
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m used when the brake is applied. If power steering assist is lost
(66 ft), which could be a lot of Once the power assist is used up, because the engine stops or the
distance in an emergency. it can take longer to stop and the power steering system is not
brake pedal will be harder to push. functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but may required increased
effort. See your dealer if there is a
problem.



Curve Tips Off-Road Recovery 2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
. Take curves at a reasonable
right front tire contacts the
speed.
pavement edge.
. Reduce speed before entering
3. Then turn the steering wheel to
a curve.
go straight down the roadway.
. Maintain a reasonable steady
speed through the curve Loss of Control
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
Skidding
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway. There are three types of skids that
correspond to the vehicle's three
Steering in Emergencies control systems:
. There are some situations when . Braking Skid — wheels are
The vehicle's right wheels can
steering around a problem may drop off the edge of a road onto not rolling.
be more effective than braking.
the shoulder while driving. . Steering or Cornering
. Holding both sides of the Follow these tips: Skid — too much speed or
steering wheel allows you to turn 1. Ease off the accelerator and steering in a curve causes tires
180 degrees without removing to slip and lose cornering force.
then, if there is nothing in the
a hand.
way, steer the vehicle so that it . Acceleration Skid — too much
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) straddles the edge of the throttle causes the driving
allows steering while braking. pavement. wheels to spin.



Defensive drivers avoid most skids
. Try to avoid sudden steering, Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport
by taking reasonable care suited to acceleration, or braking, Coupe manual transmission only:
existing conditions, and by not including reducing vehicle speed Be sure to check the oil level
overdriving those conditions. by shifting to a lower gear. often during racing or other
But skids are always possible. Any sudden changes could competitive driving and keep the
cause the tires to slide. level at or near the upper mark
If the vehicle starts to slide,
follow these suggestions: Remember: Antilock brakes help that shows the proper operating
avoid only the braking skid. range on the engine oil dipstick.
. Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly Except Z06, ZR1, and Grand
steer the way you want the
Racing or Other Sport Coupe manual
vehicle to go. The vehicle may Competitive Driving transmission: Be sure to check
straighten out. Be ready for a the oil level often during racing or
Racing or competitive driving other competitive driving and
second skid if it occurs. may affect the vehicle warranty. keep the level at or near 1 L (1 qt)
. Slow down and adjust your See the warranty book before above the upper mark that shows
driving according to weather using the vehicle for racing or other the proper operating range on
conditions. Stopping distance competitive driving. the engine oil dipstick. After the
can be longer and vehicle Notice: If you use the vehicle competitive driving, remove
control can be affected when for racing or other competitive excess oil so that the level on the
traction is reduced by water, driving, the engine may use more dipstick is not above the upper
snow, ice, gravel, or other oil than it would with normal use. mark that shows the proper
material on the road. Learn to Low oil levels can damage the operating range.
recognize warning clues — such engine. For information on how
as enough water, ice, or packed to add oil, see Engine Oil on
snow on the road to make a page 10‑14.
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.



Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport If the vehicle is a Z06, ZR1, Proper procedures for performing
Coupe manual transmission Only: or Grand Sport Coupe manual these services can be found in the
For racing or competitive driving, it transmission model, it has service manual. See Service
is recommended that the brake fluid greaseable outer ends on Publications Ordering Information
be replaced with a high performance both of the rear toe‐links. on page 13‑18.
brake fluid that has a dry boiling Under normal use, lubrication If the vehicle is used for racing or
point greater than 279°C (534°F). should be performed as described other competitive driving, the rear
After conversion to the high in the maintenance schedule. axle fluid temperatures may be
performance brake fluid, See Maintenance Schedule on higher than would occur in normal
follow the brake fluid service page 11‑3 and Recommended driving. We recommend that the
recommendations outlined by the Fluids and Lubricants on rear axle fluid be drained and
fluid manufacturer. Do not use page 11‑12. If using the vehicle refilled with new fluid after every
silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids. for racing, lubrication should be 24 hours of racing or competitive
Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport performed at the end of each driving. See Recommended Fluids
Coupe manual transmission Only: racing day. See your dealer for and Lubricants on page 11‑12 for
For racing or competitive driving, it lubrication and make sure any what fluid to use.
is recommended that the loading of needed repairs are made at once.
the vehicle be limited to the driver
only, with no other cargo, and that
tires be inflated to 180 kPa (26 psi)
for a maximum speed of 230 km/h
(143 mph).



ZR1 and Z06 with Z07 Street High Performance Brake Racing/Track Brake Burnish
Performance Package Brake Burnishing Procedure Procedure
Burnish Procedure Run this procedure in a safe To prepare the ZR1 and Z06 with
Notice: These procedures are manner and in compliance with all Z07 Performance Package brake
specific to the ZR1 and Z06 local and state ordinances/laws system for track events and racing,
Performance Package with regarding motor vehicle operation. the Street High Performance Brake
ceramic brake rotors. These Run this procedure only on dry Burnish as described previously
procedures should not be run on pavement. should be completed.
other Corvette models as damage 1. From a stop, accelerate as In addition to completing the Street
may result. rapidly as possible without High Performance Brake Burnishing
Notice: The new vehicle break‐in activating traction control to a Procedure, the following procedure
period should be completed speed of 97 kph (60 mph). needs to be completed to make the
before performing the brake 2. Use enough pedal force to ZR1 and Z06 with Z07 Performance
burnish procedure or damage completely stop the vehicle in Package brake system ready for
may occur to the powertrain/ four to five seconds. If ABS track events and racing.
engine. See New Vehicle Break-In activates, braking is too hard. This procedure should only be
on page 9‑18. run on a track and only on dry
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2,
When performed as instructed, five times. This should take pavement.
these procedures will not damage about 10 minutes.
the brakes. During the burnishing
4. After completing the 50 stops,
procedure, the brake pads will
cool the brakes by driving for
smoke and produce an odor.
8 km (5 mi) at 97 kph (60 mph).
The braking force and pedal travel
may increase. After the procedure is As with all high performance brake
complete, the brake pads may systems, some amount of brake
appear white at the rotor contact. squeal is normal.



Notice: Brake pedal fade will Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)
occur during this track burnish
procedure and can cause brake Rain and wet roads can reduce
pedal travel and force to increase. vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates
This could extend stopping ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through
distance until the brakes are fully Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the
burnished. of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this
driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
1. Drive a normal first lap and not deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not
too aggressive.
ignore police warnings and be
2. Laps 2 and 3 should be
gradually driven faster and more
{ WARNING very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
aggressive, while allowing for Wet brakes can cause crashes.
reduced brake output and They might not work as well in a
increased stopping distance quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning
due to brake fade. pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous.
3. Lap 4 as near to full speed, lose control of the vehicle. Water can build up under the
while allowing for reduced brake After driving through a large vehicle's tires so they actually ride
output and increased stopping puddle of water or a car/vehicle on the water. This can happen if the
distance due to brake fade. wash, lightly apply the brake road is wet enough and you are
4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cool pedal until the brakes work going fast enough. When the
down laps normally. vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little
or no contact with the road.
5. Lap 7 should be normal driving (Continued)
or an easy out lap. There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.



Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep the interior
temperature cool. transmission.
. Have good tires with proper . Shift to a lower gear when going
. Keep your eyes moving — scan
tread depth. See Tires on down steep or long hills.
page 10‑54. the road ahead and to the sides.
. Turn off cruise control.
. Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.



Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
{ WARNING on page 9‑35 improves vehicle
Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) slippery roads, but apply the brakes
or with the ignition off is Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the sooner than when on dry pavement.
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on
and they could get so hot that Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can
they would not work well.
fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in
You would then have poor braking
Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a
or even none going down a hill. freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy
You could crash. Always have the treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are
engine running and the vehicle in clear. Avoid sudden steering
gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while
traction is not lost. Accelerating too on ice.
. Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control on slippery
center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the surfaces.
speeds that let you stay in your tires slick, so there is even less
own lane. traction.
. Be alert on top of hills; Try not to break the fragile traction.
something could be in your lane If you accelerate too fast, the drive
(stalled car, accident). wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
. Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.



Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑26.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑10. To get help and keep . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
everyone in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does Monoxide) gas to get inside.
not collect there. CO could overcome you and kill
. Turn on the hazard warning
you. You cannot see it or smell it,
flashers. . Open a window about
5 cm (2 in) on the side of the so you might not know it is in your
. Tie a red cloth to an outside vehicle. Clear away snow from
vehicle that is away from the
mirror. around the base of your vehicle,
wind to bring in fresh air.
especially any that is blocking the
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
under the vehicle. This may Run the engine for short periods
. Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm,
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that
inside. Engine exhaust contains but be careful.
circulates the air inside the
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan
cannot be seen or smelled. It can speed to the highest setting.
cause unconsciousness and even See Climate Control System
death. in the Index.
(Continued) (Continued)



To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle Is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to
short periods as needed to warm Get it Out
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the
until help arrives but only when you front wheels. Turn off any traction
If stuck too severely for the traction
feel really uncomfortable from the system. Shift back and forth
system to free the vehicle, turn the
cold. Moving about to keep warm between R (Reverse) and a forward
traction system off and use the
also helps. gear, or with a manual transmission,
rocking method.
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
If it takes some time for help to R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING as little as possible. To prevent
the engine, push the accelerator transmission wear, wait until the
pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high wheels stop spinning before shifting
faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and gears. Release the accelerator
keeps the battery charged to restart you or others could be injured. pedal while shifting, and press
the vehicle and to signal for help The vehicle can overheat, lightly on the accelerator pedal
with the headlamps. Do this as little causing an engine compartment when the transmission is in gear.
as possible to save fuel. fire or other damage. Spin the Slowly spinning the wheels in the
wheels as little as possible and forward and reverse directions
avoid going above 55 km/h causes a rocking motion that could
(35 mph). free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries,
it might need to be towed out.
For information about using tire
If the vehicle does need to be towed
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
out, see Towing the Vehicle on
Chains on page 10‑76.
page 10‑82.



Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
It is very important to know how attached to the center pillar
much weight your vehicle can This can cause systems to (B-pillar) of your vehicle.
carry. This weight is called the break and change the way the With the driver door open,
vehicle capacity weight and vehicle handles. This could you will find the label attached
includes the weight of all cause loss of control and a below the door latch. This label
occupants, cargo and all crash. Overloading can also shows the number of occupant
nonfactory‐installed options. shorten the life of the vehicle. seating positions (A), and the
Two labels on your vehicle maximum vehicle capacity
show how much weight it may Tire and Loading Information weight (B) in kilograms and
properly carry, the Tire and Label pounds.
Loading Information label and
the Certification label. The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
{ WARNING size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended
Do not load the vehicle any cold tire inflation pressures (D).
heavier than the Gross For more information on tires
Vehicle Weight Rating and inflation see Tires on
(GVWR), or either the page 10‑54 and Tire Pressure
maximum front or rear Gross on page 10‑62.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
(Continued)
Label Example



There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined 6. If your vehicle will be towing
information on the vehicle weight of the driver and a trailer, the load from your
Certification label. It tells you passengers from XXX kg or trailer will be transferred to
the Gross Vehicle Weight XXX lbs. your vehicle. Consult this
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross 4. The resulting figure equals manual to determine how this
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the available amount of cargo reduces the available cargo
the front and rear axle. See and luggage load capacity. and luggage load capacity of
“Certification Label” later in this For example, if the “XXX” your vehicle.
section. amount equals 1400 lbs and Your vehicle is neither
Steps for Determining Correct there will be five 150 lb designed nor intended to
Load Limit passengers in your vehicle, tow a trailer.
1. Locate the statement the amount of available cargo
“The combined weight of and luggage load capacity is
occupants and cargo should 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
never exceed XXX kg or = 650 lbs).
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's 5. Determine the combined
placard. weight of luggage and cargo
2. Determine the combined being loaded on the vehicle.
weight of the driver and That weight may not safely
passengers that will be riding exceed the available cargo
in your vehicle. and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.



Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = (400 kg) (181 lbs) Example 2 = 181 kg (400 lbs) Example 3 = 181 kg (400 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 1 = 68 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 181 kg
(150 lbs) (300 lbs) (400 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo C. Available Cargo Weight = 45 kg C. Available Cargo Weight =
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs) (100 lbs) 0 kg (0 lbs)



Refer to your vehicle's Tire and It tells you the gross weight
Loading Information label for capacity of your vehicle, called { WARNING
specific information about your the Gross Vehicle Weight Do not load the vehicle any
vehicle's capacity weight and Rating (GVWR). The GVWR heavier than the Gross
seating positions. The combined includes the weight of the Vehicle Weight Rating
weight of the driver, passengers vehicle, all occupants, fuel and (GVWR), or either the
and cargo should never exceed cargo. Never exceed the GVWR maximum front or rear Gross
your vehicle's capacity weight. for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Certification Label
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for This can cause systems to
either the front or rear axle. break and change the way the
Do not load your vehicle with vehicle handles. This could
more weight than it was cause loss of control and a
designed to carry. See “Steps crash. Overloading can also
for Determining Correct Load shorten the life of the vehicle.
Limit” earlier in this section.
Notice: Overloading the
vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Do not overload the vehicle.
A vehicle-specific Certification
label is attached to the rear
edge of the driver door.



If you put things inside your Starting and
vehicle — like suitcases, WARNING (Continued)
tools, packages or anything Operating
. Never stack heavier
else — they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to things, like suitcases, New Vehicle Break-In
stop or turn quickly, or if there is inside the vehicle so that Follow these recommended
a crash, they will keep going. some of them are above guidelines during the first 2414 km
the tops of the seats. (1500 mi) of driving this vehicle.
{ WARNING . Do not leave an Parts have a break-in period and
performance will be better in the
unsecured child restraint
Things you put inside your long run.
in your vehicle.
vehicle can strike and injure For the first 322 km (200 mi):
people in a sudden stop or
. When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
. To break in new tires, drive at
turn, or in a crash. moderate speeds and avoid hard
it whenever you can.
. Put things in the rear area cornering for the first 322 km
of your vehicle. Try to (200 mi).
spread the weight evenly. . New brake linings also need a
(Continued) break- in period. Avoid making
hard stops during the first
322 km (200 mi). This is
recommended every time
brake linings are replaced.



For the first 800 km (500 mi): For the first 2414 km (1500 mi):
. Avoid full throttle starts and . Do not participate in track
{ WARNING
abrupt stops. events, sport driving schools, ZR1s, and Z06s with RPO CFZ,
. Do not exceed 4000 rpm. or similar activities during the contain parts made from carbon
first 2414 km (1500 mi). fiber.
. Avoid driving at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
. Check engine oil with every When damaged, the exposed
including the use of cruise refueling and add if necessary. edges can be very sharp.
control. Oil and fuel consumption may be A person could be injured by
higher than normal during the
. Avoid downshifting to brake or these sharp edges. Use caution
first 2414 km (1500 mi).
slow the vehicle when the when washing the vehicle,
engine speed will exceed coming in contact with,
Front Air Dam or removing damaged carbon
4000 rpm.
The vehicle is equipped with a front fiber parts. See your dealer for
. Do not let the engine labor. air dam which has minimal ground replacement.
Never lug the engine in high clearance.
gear at low speeds. With a
manual transmission, shift to Vehicles with the ZR1 package, Under normal operation, these
the next lower gear. This rule or Z06 vehicles with RPO CFZ, components will occasionally
applies at all times, not just also come with a splitter made from contact some road surfaces (speed
during the break-in period. carbon fiber. bumps, driveway ramps, etc.). This
can be heard inside the vehicle as a
scraping noise. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem.
Use care when approaching bumps
or objects on road surfaces and
avoid them when possible.



Ignition Positions / (START): Press this button If the vehicle must be shut off in an
while your foot is on the brake for emergency:
an automatic transmission, or while 1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressing in the clutch for a manual pressure. Do not pump the
transmission, to start the engine. brakes repeatedly. This may
If the vehicle is in OFF or Retained deplete power assist, requiring
Accessory Power (RAP) mode, the increased brake pedal force.
transmitter must be inside the 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral.
vehicle to start the engine. This can be done while the
vehicle is moving. After shifting
9 Acc. (STOPPING THE to neutral, firmly apply the
ENGINE/OFF/ACCESSORY): brakes and steer the vehicle to
When the vehicle is stopped with a safe location.
the engine on, press the button
once to turn the engine off. 3. Come to a complete stop.
The vehicle has an electronic Shift to P (Park) with an
keyless ignition with a push-button Do not turn the engine off when the automatic transmission,
start. vehicle is moving. This will cause a or Neutral with a manual
In order to shift out of P (Park), loss of power assist in the brake transmission. Turn the ignition
the vehicle must be running or in and steering systems and disable to OFF.
Acc. mode and the regular brake the airbags.
4. Set the parking brake. See
pedal must be applied. Parking Brake on page 9‑36



If an automatic vehicle is not Service Only Mode
{ WARNING correctly placed in P (Park) a SHIFT This power mode is available for
TO PARK message will display on service and diagnostics, and to
Turning off the vehicle while the Driver Information Center (DIC).
moving may cause loss of power verify the proper operation of the
assist in the brake and steering For more information, see malfunction indicator lamp as may
systems and disable the airbags. Transmission Messages on be required for emission inspection
While driving, only shut the page 5‑52. purposes. With the vehicle off,
vehicle off in an emergency. When the engine is off, press this pressing and holding the bottom
button to place the vehicle in of the button for more than
accessory mode. ACCESSORY five seconds will place the vehicle in
If the vehicle cannot be pulled Service Only Mode. The instruments
MODE ON will display on the Driver
over, and must be shut off while and audio systems will operate as
Information Center (DIC). This mode
driving, turn the ignition to they do when the engine is running,
allows you to use things like the
ACC/ACCESSORY. but the vehicle will not be able to be
radio and the power windows while
When the engine is on or the the engine is off. Use accessory driven. The engine will not start in
vehicle is in accessory power mode if you must have the vehicle Service Only Mode. Push the button
mode, it is recommended that a in motion while the engine is off, for again to turn the vehicle off.
manual transmission be placed example, if the vehicle is being
in R (Reverse). An automatic pushed or towed.
transmission must be placed in
After being in accessory mode for
P (Park). Then press the Acc. button
about 10 minutes, the vehicle will
to turn the engine off and place the
automatically enter RAP or OFF,
vehicle in RAP. See Retained
depending on if the doors are
Accessory Power (RAP) on
opened or closed.



Starting the Engine To start the vehicle, do the following: See “Battery Replacement”
1. For vehicles with an automatic under Remote Keyless Entry
Move the shift lever to P (Park) (RKE) System Operation on
or N (Neutral) for an automatic transmission, with your foot on
the brake pedal, press the page 2‑3 for more information.
transmission. For a manual If the fob battery is dead, you
transmission the vehicle can be START button located on the
instrument panel. For vehicles need to insert the fob into the
started in Neutral or any other gear fob slot to enable engine
as long as the clutch pedal is with a manual transmission, you
must also press in the clutch starting. See “NO FOBS
pressed. To restart a vehicle with a DETECTED” under Key and
manual transmission when you are pedal while pressing the START
button. Lock Messages on page 5‑42.
already moving, use the Neutral
position only. To restart a vehicle If there is not an RKE transmitter 3. Do not race the engine
with an automatic transmission in the vehicle or if there is immediately after starting it.
when you are already moving, something causing interference Operate the engine and
use N (Neutral). with it, the DIC will display transmission gently until the oil
NO FOBS DETECTED. warms up and lubricates all
Notice: Do not try to shift to moving parts.
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. See Key and Lock Messages on
If you do, you could damage the page 5‑42 for more information. 4. If the engine does not start and
transmission. Shift to P (Park) 2. When the engine begins no DIC message is displayed,
only when the vehicle is stopped. cranking, let go of the button and wait 15 seconds before trying
the engine cranks automatically again to let the cranking motor
The RKE transmitter must be inside cool down.
the vehicle for the ignition to work. until it starts. If the battery in the
RKE transmitter is weak, the If the engine does not start after
Cell phone chargers can interfere DIC displays FOB BATTERY five to 10 seconds, especially in
with the operation of the Keyless LOW. You can still drive the very cold weather (below −18°C
Access System. Battery chargers vehicle. or 0°F), it could be flooded with
should not be plugged in when
starting or turning off the engine.



too much gasoline. Try pushing The vehicle has a Computer- Stopping the Engine
the accelerator pedal all the way Controlled Cranking System.
If the vehicle has an automatic
to the floor while cranking for up This feature assists in starting the
transmission, move the shift lever
to 15 seconds maximum. Wait at engine and protects components.
to P (Park) and press and hold the
least 15 seconds between each Once cranking has been initiated,
Acc. (Off/Accessory) button, located
try, to allow the cranking motor the engine continues cranking for a
on the instrument panel, until the
to cool down. When the engine few seconds or until the vehicle
engine shuts off. If the shift lever is
starts, let go of the accelerator. starts. If the engine does not start,
not in P (Park), the engine shuts off
If the vehicle starts briefly but cranking automatically stops after
and the vehicle goes into the
then stops again, repeat these 15 seconds to prevent cranking
accessory mode. The DIC displays
steps. This clears the extra motor damage. To prevent gear
SHIFT TO PARK. Once the shifter is
gasoline from the engine. damage, this system also prevents
moved to P (Park), the vehicle turns
Notice: Cranking the engine for cranking if the engine is already
off. If the vehicle has a manual
long periods of time, by pressing running.
transmission, it is recommended
the START button immediately Notice: The engine is designed that you move the shift lever to
after cranking has ended, can to work with the electronics in R (Reverse) and set the parking
overheat and damage the the vehicle. If electrical parts or brake after you turn off the engine
cranking motor, and drain the accessories are added, you by pressing and holding the Acc.
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds could change the way the engine (Off/Accessory) button.
between each try, to allow the operates. Before adding electrical
If the RKE transmitter is not
cranking motor to cool down. equipment, check with your
detected inside the vehicle when it
dealer. If you do not, the engine
is turned to off, the DIC displays
might not perform properly.
NO FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
Any resulting damage would
not be covered by the vehicle See Key and Lock Messages on
warranty. page 5‑42 for more information.



Retained Accessory WARNING (Continued)
Leaving the Vehicle with
Power (RAP) the Engine Running
(Automatic Transmission)
These vehicle accessories can be brake firmly set. The vehicle can
used for up to 10 minutes after the roll. If you have left the engine
engine is turned off: running, the vehicle can move { WARNING
. Audio System suddenly. You or others could be It can be dangerous to leave the
injured. To be sure the vehicle will vehicle with the engine running.
. Power Windows not move, even when you are on The vehicle could move suddenly
These features continue to work up fairly level ground, use the steps if the shift lever is not fully in
to 10 minutes after the engine is that follow. P (Park) with the parking brake
turned off or until either door is firmly set. And, if you leave the
opened. If a door is opened, the 1. Hold the brake pedal down vehicle with the engine running,
power windows and audio system and set the parking brake. it could overheat and even catch
will shut off. See Parking Brake on page 9‑36 fire. You or others could be
for more information. injured. Do not leave the vehicle
Shifting Into Park with the engine running.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
(Automatic Transmission) by holding in the button on the
lever and pushing the lever all If you have to leave the vehicle with
{ WARNING the way toward the front of the the engine running, be sure the
vehicle. vehicle is in P (Park) and the
It can be dangerous to get out of parking brake is firmly set before
the vehicle if the shift lever is not 3. Press the Acc. button (ignition
switch) to turn the engine off. you leave it. After you have moved
fully in P (Park) with the parking the shift lever into P (Park), hold
(Continued) down the regular brake pedal.



See if you can move the shift lever When you are ready to drive, move To shift out of P (Park) use the
away from P (Park) without first the shift lever out of P (Park) before following:
pushing the button on the lever. you release the parking brake. 1. Apply the brake pedal.
If you can, it means that the shift If torque lock does occur, you may
lever was not fully locked into 2. Release the parking brake.
need to have another vehicle push See Parking Brake on
P (Park). yours a little uphill to take some of page 9‑36.
Torque Lock the pressure from the transmission
parking pawl, so you can pull the 3. Press the shift lever button.
(Automatic Transmission)
shift lever out of P (Park). 4. Move the shift lever to the
If you are parking on a hill and you
desired position.
do not shift the transmission into Shifting out of Park
P (Park) properly, the weight of the If you still are unable to shift out
vehicle may put too much force Shift lock release prevents shifting of P (Park):
on the parking pawl in the out of P (Park) unless the vehicle is
1. Fully release the shift lever
transmission. You may find it running or in accessory mode and
button.
difficult to pull the shift lever out of the brake pedal is applied.
P (Park). This is called “torque lock.” 2. While holding down the brake
The shift lock release is always
To prevent torque lock, set the pedal, press the shift lever
functional except in the case of an
parking brake and then shift into button again.
uncharged or low voltage (less than
P (Park) properly before you leave 9‐volt) battery. See Jump Starting 3. Move the shift lever to the
the driver seat. To find out how, see on page 10‑78 for more information. desired position.
“Shifting Into P (Park)” previously in
this section. If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.



Parking (Manual Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)
Transmission)
Before you get out of the vehicle, { WARNING . The vehicle exhaust system
move the shift lever into R (Reverse) has been modified, damaged
and firmly apply the parking brake. Engine exhaust contains carbon or improperly repaired.
Once the shift lever has been monoxide (CO) which cannot be . There are holes or openings
placed into R (Reverse) with the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
in the vehicle body from
clutch pedal pressed in, you can can cause unconsciousness and damage or aftermarket
turn the ignition off and release the even death. modifications that are not
clutch. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed.
. The vehicle idles in areas If unusual fumes are detected or
Parking over Things with poor ventilation (parking if it is suspected that exhaust is
That Burn garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle:
that may block underbody . Drive it only with the windows
{ WARNING airflow or tail pipes). completely down.
. The exhaust smells or . Have the vehicle repaired
Things that can burn could touch
sounds strange or different. immediately.
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park . The exhaust system leaks
Never park the vehicle with the
over papers, leaves, dry grass, due to corrosion or damage.
engine running in an enclosed
or other things that can burn. (Continued) area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.



Running the Vehicle Automatic
While Parked
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out
Transmission
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have of the vehicle if the automatic
to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
{ WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when the
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground,
and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and There are several different positions
engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park). for the shift lever.
has no fresh air ventilation.
P (Park): This position locks the
For more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure rear wheels. It is the best position
Exhaust on page 9‑26. the vehicle will not move. See to use when starting the engine
Shifting Into Park (Automatic because the vehicle cannot move
Transmission) on page 9‑24. easily.



brakes and then press the shift lever N (Neutral): In this position, the
{ WARNING button before you can shift from engine does not connect with the
P (Park) when the vehicle is wheels. To restart the engine when
It is dangerous to get out of the running. If you cannot shift out of the vehicle is already moving, use
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully P (Park), ease pressure on the shift N (Neutral) only. If the vehicle needs
in P (Park) with the parking brake lever and push the shift lever all the towing, see Towing the Vehicle on
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. way into P (Park) as you maintain page 10‑82.
Do not leave the vehicle when the brake application. Then press the
engine is running unless you shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting
{ WARNING
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can out of Park on page 9‑25. Shifting into a drive gear while the
move suddenly. You or others R (Reverse): Use this gear to engine is running at high speed is
could be injured. To be sure the back up. dangerous. Unless your foot is
vehicle will not move, even when firmly on the brake pedal, the
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) vehicle could move very rapidly.
you are on fairly level ground, while the vehicle is moving
always set the parking brake and You could lose control and hit
forward could damage the
move the shift lever to P (Park). people or objects. Do not shift
transmission. The repairs would
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic not be covered by the vehicle into a drive gear while the engine
Transmission) on page 9‑24. warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only is running at high speed.
after the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in To rock the vehicle back and forth to Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
P (Park) before starting the engine. get out of snow, ice, or sand without or N (Neutral) with the engine
damaging the transmission, see running at high speed may
The vehicle has an automatic damage the transmission.
transmission shift lock control If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑13.
system. You have to fully apply the



The repairs would not be Manual Mode When accelerating the vehicle from
covered by the vehicle warranty. a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
Be sure the engine is not running Manual Paddle Shift you may want to shift to 2 (Second)
at high speed when shifting the While in S (Sport Mode), the paddles or 3 (Third) gear. A higher gear
vehicle. located on the steering wheel can allows you to gain more traction on
D (Drive): This position is for be used to manually up-shift or slippery surfaces. If traction control
normal driving. It provides the best down-shift the transmission. is active, upshifts are delayed to
fuel economy. If you need more increase your control of the vehicle.
power for passing, push the pedal See Traction Control System (TCS)
down to achieve the desired level of on page 9‑36 Traction Control
acceleration. System (TCS).

Downshifting the transmission in The Manual Paddle Shift system
slippery road conditions could result can be deactivated by moving the
in skidding. See “Skidding” under shift lever from S (Sport Mode)
Loss of Control on page 9‑5. back to D (Drive), or by holding
either up‐shift paddle for more than
S (Sport Mode): When in one second.
S (Sport Mode), the transmission will
work as an automatic until you use The driver may choose to briefly
the Manual Paddle Shift Controls, activate the Manual Paddle Shift
which activates driver manual gear system while in D (Drive). Tapping
selection. See Manual Mode on The Manual Paddle Shift system is either the upshift or downshift
page 9‑29. While in S (Sport Mode), activated from S (Sport Mode) by controls will place the transmission
the transmission will have more pushing the paddle, above the in Manual Paddle Shift mode.
noticeable upshifts for sportier steering wheel spokes, to up-shift
vehicle performance. to the next gear, or pulling on the
paddle, behind the steering wheel
spokes, to down-shift to the
next gear.



The driver may then exit Manual When the transmission gear does
Paddle Shift mode by holding not respond to a shift change, the
either upshift control for more than DIC will show an X over the gear
one second. The system will display.
return to automatic shifting after
10 seconds of cruising at a steady
speed and no manual shifts, When using the Manual Paddle
or when the vehicle comes to Shift feature while in S (Sport Mode),
a stop. the current gear will be displayed in
While the Manual Paddle Shift gear the Driver Information (DIC), or the
selection system is active, the Head-Up Display (HUD), if the When a requested shift is denied
transmission will automatically vehicle has either of these features. due to the speed restrictions shown,
downshift through the gears as the the DIC will momentarily show an X
If the vehicle has a Head-Up
vehicle slows. The transmission will over the gear display and a chime
Display (HUD), see Head-Up
select 2 (Second) gear as the will sound.
Display (HUD) on page 5‑31.
vehicle stops. From a stop, the If the vehicle has a HUD, and the
vehicle will start from and hold The Manual Paddle Shift system
transmission gear does not respond
2 (Second) gear unless the driver will not allow either an up-shift or a
to a shift change, a chime will sound
manually paddle shifts into a down-shift if the vehicle speed is too
and the HUD will momentarily show
different gear or selects D (Drive). fast or too slow, nor will it allow a
an X over the gear display.
The driver can select 1 (First) gear start from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear.
for maximum acceleration from Manual Paddle Shift operation is
If up-shifting does not occur when
a stop. available for use with Cruise
needed, vehicle speed will be
Control. See Cruise Control on
limited to protect the engine.
page 9‑45 Cruise Control for more
information.



The vehicle speeds required for The maximum speed allowed for To prevent damage to the
Manual Paddle Shift up-shifts downshifting of gears 1 (First) powertrain, Manual Paddle
depend on several vehicle inputs, through 4 (Fourth) are: downshifts to a lower gear cannot
which will vary the allowed up-shift . Into 4 (Fourth) gear over be done above certain speeds.
speed by a few km/h (mph). 250 km/h (155 mph). The maximum speed allowed for
downshifting of gears 1 (First)
For vehicles with a 2.56:1 Axle . Into 3 (Third) gear over through 4 (Fourth) are:
Ratio (RPO GM8) 188 km/h (117 mph). . Into 4 (Fourth) gear over
. Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear . Into 2 (Second) gear over 234 km/h (145 mph).
require approximately 35 km/h 120 km/h (75 mph).
(22 mph). . Into 3 (Third) gear over
. Into 1 (First) gear over 176 km/h (109 mph).
. Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require 68 km/h (42 mph).
approximately 45 km/h (28 mph). . Into 2 (Second) gear over
For vehicles with a 2.73:1 Axle 113 km/h (70 mph).
. Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear Ratio (RPO GU2)
require approximately 65 km/h . Into 1 (First) gear over
. Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear 64 km/h (40 mph).
(41 mph).
require approximately 31 km/h
To prevent damage to the If the driver does not request an
(19 mph). upshift as the engine speed
powertrain, Manual Paddle
downshifts to a lower gear cannot . Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require approaches fuel shut off rpm, the
be done above certain speeds. approximately 39 km/h (24 mph). engine speed will be limited to
. Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear protect the engine. See Tachometer
require approximately 57 km/h on page 5‑12 for more information.
(35 mph).



Manual Transmission You can shift into 1 (First) when Neutral: Use this position when
you are going less than 64 km/h you start or idle the engine.
(40 mph). If you come to a complete The shift lever is in Neutral when
stop and it is hard to shift into it is centered in the shift pattern,
1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral not in any gear.
and let up on the clutch. Press the R (Reverse): To back up, press
clutch pedal back down. Then shift down the clutch pedal and shift into
into 1 (First). R (Reverse). Just apply pressure to
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal get the lever past 5 (Fifth) and
as you let up on the accelerator 6 (Sixth) into R (Reverse). Let up on
pedal and shift into 2 (Second). the clutch pedal slowly while
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pressing the accelerator pedal.
pedal as you press the accelerator The six-speed manual transmission
pedal. has a feature that allows you to
This is the shift pattern for the
six-speed manual transmission. 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and safely shift into R (Reverse) while
6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third), the vehicle is rolling at less than
Here is how to operate the 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the 5 km/h (3 mph). You will be
transmission: same way you do for 2 (Second). locked out if you try to shift into
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly you press the accelerator pedal. moving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph).
let up on the clutch pedal as you To stop, let up on the accelerator
press the accelerator pedal. pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.



Shift Speeds This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear for the best fuel
(Manual Transmission) economy.
Manual Transmission Recommended
{ WARNING Shift Speeds in km/h (mph)
If you skip a gear when you Acceleration Shift Speed
Engine
downshift, you could lose control 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift All Engines 24 (15) 40 (25) 64 (40) 72 (45) 80 (50)
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
If the engine speed drops below Notice: When shifting gears, do
900 rpm, or if the engine is not not move the shift lever around
running smoothly, you should unnecessarily. This may damage
downshift to the next lower gear. the transmission. Shift directly
You may have to downshift two or into the next gear.
more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good engine
performance.



One to Four Shift Light Downshifting The six-speed transmission has a
(Manual Transmission) (Manual Transmission) spring that centers the shift lever
near 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth).
Do not downshift into the gear This spring helps you know which
shown below at a speed greater gear you are in when you are
than shown in the table: shifting. Be careful when shifting
from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or
1 (First) 80 km/h (50 mph)
downshifting from 6 (Sixth) to
2 (Second) 119 km/h (74 mph) 5 (Fifth). The spring will try to pull
When this light comes on, you can the shift lever toward 4 (Fourth) and
only shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) 3 (Third) 163 km/h (101 mph)
3 (Third). Make sure you move the
instead of 1 (First) to 2 (Second). 4 (Fourth) 209 km/h (130 mph) lever into 2 (Second) or 5 (Fifth).
See One-to-Four Shift Light (Manual If you let the shift lever move in the
Transmission) on page 5‑22 for Notice: If you skip more than one direction of the pulling, you may end
more information. gear when you downshift, or if up shifting from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)
you race the engine when you or from 6 (Sixth) to 3 (Third).
release the clutch pedal while If the driver does not upshift as
downshifting, you could damage the engine speed approaches fuel
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or shut off RPM, the engine speed will
the transmission. Do not skip be limited to protect the engine.
gears or race the engine when See Tachometer on page 5‑12 for
downshifting. more information.



Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it apply the brakes if that vehicle
becomes necessary to slam on the suddenly slows or stops. Always
brakes and continue braking to leave enough room up ahead to
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a stop, even with ABS.
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the Using ABS
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the the brake pedal down firmly and let
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. ABS work. You might hear the ABS
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure pump or motor operating and feel
When the engine is started and the the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS normal.
than any driver could. This can help
checks itself. A momentary motor or
the driver steer around the obstacle Braking in Emergencies
clicking noise might be heard while
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might ABS allows the driver to steer and
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the brake at the same time. In many
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates emergencies, steering can help
on wheel speed and controls more than even the very best
braking pressure accordingly. braking.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑22.



Parking Brake Brake Assist Ride Control Systems
The parking brake lever is located This vehicle has a brake assist
to the right of the center console. feature designed to assist the driver Traction Control
To set the parking brake, hold the in stopping or decreasing vehicle System (TCS)
brake pedal down. Pull the parking speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the The vehicle has a Traction Control
brake lever up. If the ignition is on, System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
the brake system warning light will stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the This is especially useful in slippery
come on. road conditions. The system
power brake system under
To release the parking brake, hold conditions where the driver has operates only if it senses that the
the brake pedal down. Then push quickly and forcefully applied the rear wheels are spinning too much
the release button in as you move brake pedal in an attempt to quickly or are beginning to lose traction.
the parking brake lever all the stop or slow down the vehicle. When this happens, the system
way down. The stability system hydraulic brake works the rear brakes and reduces
control module increases brake engine power (by closing the throttle
Notice: Driving with the parking
pressure at each corner of the and managing engine spark) to limit
brake on can overheat the brake
vehicle until the ABS activates. wheel spin.
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system Minor brake pedal pulsation or The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
parts. Make sure that the parking pedal movement during this time message displays on the Driver
brake is fully released and the is normal and the driver should Information Center (DIC) when TCS
brake warning light is off before continue to apply the brake pedal is limiting wheel spin. See Ride
driving. as the driving situation dictates. Control System Messages on
The brake assist feature will page 5‑44. The system may be
automatically disengage when heard or felt while it is working, but
the brake pedal is released or this is normal.
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.



If cruise control is being used when TCS automatically comes on The system can be turned on or off
TCS begins to limit wheel spin, the whenever the vehicle is started. at any time by pressing the Active
cruise control will automatically To limit wheel spin, especially in Handling button. The DIC will
disengage. Cruise control may be slippery road conditions, the system display the appropriate message
reengaged when road conditions should always be left on. TCS can when the button is pushed.
allow. See Cruise Control on be turned off if needed. Notice: When traction control is
page 9‑45. turned off, or Competitive Driving
Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to
shift with the drive wheels
spinning with a loss of traction,
it is possible to cause damage to
the transmission. Do not attempt
To turn the system off, press the to shift when the drive wheels do
The SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM Active Handling button located on not have traction. Damage caused
message and the Active Handling the center console. by misuse of the vehicle is not
System light will come on if there is covered. See the warranty book
a problem with TCS. See Ride for additional information.
Control System Messages on
Adding non-dealer accessories can
page 5‑44.
affect the vehicle's performance.
When this light and the SERVICE See Accessories and Modifications
TRACTION SYSTEM message on page 10‑3 for more information.
are on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving The Traction Off light comes on.
accordingly.



Active Handling System System light comes on, and a sound
is heard if there is a problem with
The Active Handling System is a the system.
computer controlled system that
helps the driver maintain directional See Ride Control System Messages
control of the vehicle in difficult on page 5‑44 for more information.
driving conditions. This is When this light and the SERVICE
accomplished by selectively To turn the system off, press the
ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM
applying any one of the vehicle's Active Handling button on the
message are on, the system is not
brakes. center console until TRACTION
operational. Adjust your driving
SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING
The ACTIVE HANDLING message accordingly.
SYSTEM — OFF is displayed on
will come on when the system is The Active Handling System the DIC.
operating. See Ride Control System comes on automatically whenever
Messages on page 5‑44 for more the vehicle is started. To help
information. The system may be maintain directional control of the
heard or felt while it is working. vehicle, the system should always
This is normal. be left on. The system can be
turned off if needed. If the Active
Handling System is turned off, the
Traction Control System will also The StabiliTrak Off light will
be turned off. Adjust your driving come on.
accordingly. The system can be turned back on
at any time by pressing the Active
The SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING Handling button. The DIC will
SYSTEM message is displayed on display the appropriate message
the DIC, the Active Handling when the button is pushed.



If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Competitive Driving Mode Notice: Do not attempt to shift
system detects a flat tire and the when the drive wheels are
Driver Information Center (DIC) Competitive Driving Mode, spinning and do not have
displays TIRE FLAT, or if the TPM Performance Traction Management, traction. This may cause damage
system is malfunctioning and the and Launch Control are systems to the transmission. Damage
DIC displays SERVICE TIRE designed to allow increased caused by misuse of the vehicle
MONITOR, the Active Handling performance while accelerating is not covered by the vehicle
System will be affected as follows: and/or cornering. This is warranty. See the warranty book
accomplished by regulating and for additional information.
. The Active Handling System optimizing the engine, brakes, and
cannot be turned off by the suspension performance. These Competitive Driving Mode
driver. modes are for use at a closed (Except ZR1)
. If the Active Handling System course race track and are not
Competitive Driving Mode allows
is off, it will be turned on intended for use on public roads.
full engine power while the Active
automatically. They will not compensate for a
Handling System helps maintain
driver’s inexperience or lack of
. Competitive Driving Mode or directional control of the vehicle
familiarity with the race track.
Performance Traction by selective brake application.
Drivers who prefer to allow the
Management is unavailable. In this mode, TCS is off and
system to have more control of
Launch Control is available.
. The Active Handling System will the engine, brake, and suspension
Adjust your driving style to account
feel different in aiding and are advised to turn the normal
for the available engine power.
maintaining directional control. traction control and active handling
See “Launch Control” later in this
systems on. See Racing or Other
section.
Competitive Driving on page 9‑6



Performance Traction To experience the performance
Management (Z06, ZR1) benefit of this system, after entering
a curve and at the point where the
Performance Traction Management driver would normally start to
integrates the Traction Control, increase acceleration, the
Active Handling, and Selective accelerator pedal can be fully
Ride Control systems to provide pressed. The Performance Traction
This light is on when the vehicle is improved and consistent
in the Competitive Driving Mode. Management system will modify the
performance when cornering. level of engine power for a smooth
This optional handling mode can be The amount of available engine and consistent corner exit.
selected by pressing the Active power is based on the mode
Handling button on the center selected, track conditions, driver
console quickly two times. skill, and the radius of each corner.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE
displays in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑44
When the Active Handling button
is pressed again, the Active This light is on when the vehicle is
Handling and TCS systems are on. in the Performance Traction
The TRACTION SYSTEM AND Management Mode.
ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message This optional handling mode can be
displays briefly in the DIC and a To select a mode while in
selected by pressing the Active
chime is heard. Performance Traction Management,
Handling button on the center
turn the knob located on the center
console quickly two times. PERF
console.
TRAC 1 - WET ACTIVE HANDLING
ON displays in the DIC.



The Performance Traction PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE
. Requires more driving skill than
Management system contains five HANDLING ON modes 2 or 3
modes. These modes are selected . Active Handling is off and
by turning the Selective Ride
. For use by less experienced
drivers or while learning a new available engine power is the
Control/Performance Traction same as mode 3
Management knob on the center track
console. The driver scrolls up or . Dry conditions only PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE
down through modes 1–5 by HANDLING OFF
. Active Handling is on and engine
rotating the knob to the right or left. . For use by experienced drivers
power is slightly reduced
The following is a DIC display who are familiar with the track
description and the recommended PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT
ACTIVE HANDLING ON
. Dry conditions only
usage of each mode:
. Requires more driving skill than
PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE
. For use by drivers who are
familiar with the track in other modes
HANDLING ON . Active Handling is off and engine
. Intended for all driver skill levels power is available for maximum
. Requires more driving skill than cornering speed
. Wet or damp conditions
mode 2
only — not intended for use in Press and release the ACTIVE
heavy rain or standing water . Active Handling is on and more HANDLING button to turn off
engine power is available than in Performance Traction Management
. Active Handling is on and engine
mode 2 and return to the Active Handling
power is reduced based on
conditions and Traction Control Systems.
PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT The TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING OFF ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message
. For use by drivers who are displays briefly in the DIC and a
familiar with the track chime is heard.



Launch Control Launch Control is only available A smooth, quick release of the
when the following criteria are met: clutch, while maintaining the fully
A Launch Control feature is
. Competitive Driving Mode is pressed accelerator pedal, will
available, within Competitive Driving
selected (except ZR1) or any manage wheel slip. Complete shifts
Mode (except ZR1) or Performance
of the Performance Traction as described in Manual
Traction Management (Z06, ZR1),
Management modes are Transmission on page 9‑32.
on vehicles with a manual
transmission to allow the driver to selected (Z06, ZR1). The TCS After the vehicle is launched, the
achieve high levels of vehicle light comes on the instrument system continues in Competitive
acceleration in a straight line. panel and the appropriate DIC Mode (except ZR1) or Performance
Launch Control is a form of traction message displays. Traction Management (Z06, ZR1).
control that manages tire spin while . The vehicle is not moving. Competitive Driving Mode,
launching the vehicle. This feature Performance Traction Management,
is intended for use during closed
. The steering wheel is pointing
straight. and Launch Control are systems
course race events where designed for a closed course race
consistent zero to sixty and . The clutch is pressed and the track and not intended for use on
quarter mile times are desirable. vehicle is in first gear. public roads. The systems are not
. The accelerator pedal is rapidly intended to compensate for lack of
applied to wide open throttle. driver experience or familiarity with
the race track.
The Launch Control feature will
initially limit engine speed as the
driver rapidly applies the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle.



Limited-Slip Rear Axle Except ZR1 The setting can be changed at any
time. Based on road conditions,
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle steering wheel angle, and the
can give more traction on snow, vehicle speed, the system
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works automatically adjusts to provide the
like a standard axle most of the best handling while providing a
time, but when traction is low, this smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
feature allows the drive wheel with modes will feel similar on a smooth
the most traction to move the road. Select a new setting whenever
vehicle. driving conditions change.

Selective Ride Control Three Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages (SERVICE
The vehicle may have a ride control RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
system called Magnetic Selective INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM
Ride Control. The system provides This knob is located on the center SPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) display
the following performance benefits: console. Turn it to select the when a malfunction occurs with the
. Reduced Impact Harshness suspension of your choice. Selective Ride Control system.
Refer to Ride Control System
. Improved Road Isolation TOUR: Use for normal city and Messages on page 5‑44 for more
highway driving. This setting information.
. Improved High-Speed Stability
provides a smooth, soft ride.
. Improved Handling Response
SPORT: Use where road conditions
. Better Control of Body Ride or personal preference demand
Motions more control. This setting provides
more “feel,” or response to the road
conditions.



ZR1 or Z06 with PTM TOUR: Use for normal city and When this mode is selected,
highway driving. This setting turning the Selective Ride knob
provides a smooth, soft ride. will change the Performance
SPORT: Use where road conditions Traction Management mode and
or personal preference demand the suspension setting will be
more control. This setting provides determined automatically.
more “feel,” or response to the road See Competitive Driving Mode on
conditions. page 9‑39 for more information.

The setting can be changed at any Three Driver Information Center
time. Based on road conditions, (DIC) messages (SERVICE
steering wheel angle, and the RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
vehicle speed, the system INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM
automatically adjusts to provide the SPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) display
best handling while providing a when a malfunction occurs with the
This knob is located on the center smooth ride. The Tour and Sport Selective Ride Control system.
console. Turn it to select the modes will feel similar on a smooth Refer to Ride Control System
suspension of your choice. road. Select a new setting whenever Messages on page 5‑44 for more
The knob will return to the driving conditions change. information.
center position when released.
The switch will illuminate the The Selective Ride knob will not
current suspension setting. display the Tour or Sport setting
when the Performance Traction
Management mode is selected.



Cruise Control If the vehicle is in cruise control,
and has the Traction Control
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
With cruise control, a speed of System (TCS), and it begins to limit use, it could get bumped and go into
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can wheel spin, the cruise control cruise when not desired. Keep the
be maintained without keeping your automatically disengages. See cruise control switch off when cruise
foot on the accelerator. Cruise Traction Control System (TCS) on is not being used.
control does not work at speeds page 9‑36. When road conditions
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). allow the cruise control to be safely 1. Move the cruise control switch
used again, it can be turned to on.
Cruise control will not work if the
parking brake is set, or if the master back on. 2. Get up to the speed desired.
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
3. Press T at the end of the lever
and release it.
{ WARNING 4. Take your foot off the accelerator
Cruise control can be dangerous pedal.
where you cannot drive safely at When the cruise control is
a steady speed. So, do not use engaged, the CRUISE SET TO
the cruise control on winding The vehicle has cruise control.
XXX MPH message displays on the
roads or in heavy traffic. 9 (Off): Turns the system off. Driver Information Center (DIC).
Cruise control can be dangerous R (On): Turns the system on. See Cruise Control Messages on
on slippery roads. On such roads, page 5‑38.
fast changes in tire traction can
S (Resume/Accelerate): Makes
the vehicle accelerate or resume a
cause excessive wheel slip, and previously set speed.
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads. T (Set): Press this button at the
end of the lever to set the speed.



Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Reducing Speed While Using
If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control Cruise Control
desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is If the cruise control system is
are applied, the cruise control is already activated, already activated,
disengaged without erasing the set . Use the accelerator pedal to get . Press and hold the set button
speed from memory. until the lower speed desired is
to the higher speed. Press J at
Once the vehicle speed reaches the end of the lever, then release reached, then release it.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, the button and the accelerator . To slow down in small amounts,
move the cruise control switch pedal. If the accelerator pedal is briefly press J. Each time this
briefly from R to S. The vehicle held longer than 60 seconds, is done, the vehicle goes about
returns to the previous set speed cruise control will turn off. 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
and stays there. . Move the cruise switch
Passing Another Vehicle While
If the switch is held at resume/ from R to S. Hold it there until Using Cruise Control
accelerate, the vehicle keeps going desired speed is reached, and
faster until the switch is released or then release the switch. Use the accelerator pedal to
the brake is applied. Do not hold the increase the vehicle speed.
switch at resume/accelerate, unless
. To increase the vehicle speed in When you take your foot off the
you want the vehicle to go faster. small amounts, move the switch pedal, the vehicle will slow down to
briefly to S. Each time this is the previous set cruise speed.
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.



Using Cruise Control on Hills When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and Ending Cruise Control
How well the cruise control works the manual paddle shift controls are . To disengage cruise control,
on hills depends upon the vehicle being used, cruise control operates step lightly on the brake pedal.
speed, load, and the steepness of as follows: If the vehicle has a manual
the hills. When going up steep hills, . If cruise control is active and a transmission, lightly tap the
you might want to step on the gear is selected with the manual clutch to end the cruise control
accelerator pedal to maintain paddle shift controls, the vehicle session.
the vehicle speed. When going speed is maintained in the driver . To turn off the cruise control
downhill, you might have to brake or selected gear and will not system, move the cruise control
shift to a lower gear to keep the automatically up-shift or
vehicle's speed down. When the down-shift the transmission switch to 9.
brakes are applied the cruise control while the driver’s gear selection When cruise control is disengaged,
is disengaged. is active. the CRUISE DISENGAGED
Cruise Control in Sport and . If driving in hilly terrain, cruise message displays on the Driver
Manual Paddle Shift Gear control may not be able to Information Center (DIC). See
Selection maintain vehicle speed if an Cruise Control Messages on
up-shift or down-shift is not page 5‑38.
When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and
selected by the driver. While Erasing Speed Memory
the manual paddle shift controls are
driving on hilly terrain and cruise
not being used, cruise control The cruise control set speed is
control is active with a manual
operates in the same manner as erased from memory by moving
paddle shift gear selection, the
D (Drive). the switch to 9 or if the ignition is
driver must select the proper
gear for the terrain or select turned off.
D (Drive) on the gear range
selector for full automatic
transmission operation.



Fuel Recommended Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
an important part of the proper (VIN Code W), use premium
maintenance of this vehicle. To help unleaded gasoline with a posted
keep the engine clean and maintain octane rating of 91 or higher.
optimum vehicle performance, we You can also use regular unleaded
recommend the use of gasoline gasoline rated at 87 octane or
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent higher, but the vehicle's acceleration
Gasoline. could be slightly reduced, and a
slight audible knocking noise,
Look for the TOP TIER label on the commonly referred to as spark
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets knock, might be heard. If the octane
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle is less than 87, a heavy knocking
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows noise might be heard when driving.
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
Detergent Gasoline can be found at identifies the vehicle's engine. at 87 octane or higher as soon as
www.toptiergas.com. The VIN is at the top left of the possible. Otherwise, you could
instrument panel. See Vehicle damage the engine. If heavy
Identification Number (VIN) on knocking is heard when using
page 12‑1. gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code T) or the 7.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code E), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher.



For best performance, use premium Some gasolines contain an See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane-enhancing additive called page 5‑19. If this occurs, return to
octane rating of 93. In an methylcyclopentadienyl manganese your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
emergency, you can use regular tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend If it is determined that the condition
unleaded gasoline with an octane against the use of gasolines is caused by the type of fuel used,
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane containing MMT. See Fuel Additives repairs might not be covered by the
fuel is used, do not perform any on page 9‑50 for additional vehicle warranty.
aggressive driving maneuvers such information.
as wide open throttle applications. Fuels in Foreign
You might also hear audible spark California Fuel Countries
knock during acceleration. Refill the
tank with premium fuel as soon as
Requirements Never use leaded gasoline or any
possible to avoid damaging the If the vehicle is certified to meet other fuel not recommended in the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard California Emissions Standards, previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
when using gasoline rated at it is designed to operate on fuels caused by use of improper fuel
91 octane or higher, the engine that meet California specifications. would not be covered by the vehicle
needs service. See the underhood emission control warranty.
label. If this fuel is not available in To check the fuel availability, ask an
Gasoline Specifications states adopting California Emissions auto club, or contact a major oil
Standards, the vehicle will operate
(U.S. and Canada Only) satisfactorily on fuels meeting
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
At a minimum, gasoline should federal specifications, but emission
meet ASTM specification D 4814 control system performance might
in the United States or CAN/ be affected. The malfunction
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.



Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel
in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can
required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, corrode metal parts in the fuel
help prevent engine and fuel system can help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic
deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage
emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the
properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty.
should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at
However, some gasolines contain Some gasolines that are
your dealer. not reformulated for low
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an
Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, octane-enhancing additive called
regulations. To help keep fuel and reformulated gasolines methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
injectors and intake valves clean might be available in your area. tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
and avoid problems due to dirty We recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the
injectors or valves, look for gasoline gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
that is advertised as TOP TIER specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines.
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to other fuels containing more than spark plug life and affect emission
ensure gasoline meets enhanced 15% ethanol must not be used in control system performance.
detergency standards developed vehicles that were not designed for The malfunction indicator lamp
by the auto companies. A list of those fuels. might turn on. If this occurs, return
marketers providing TOP TIER to your dealer for service.
Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. The tethered fuel cap is located The fuel door release button is
Keep sparks, flames, and behind a hinged fuel door on the located on the instrument panel
smoking materials away from driver side of the vehicle. to the left of the steering wheel.
fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump Push the button to release the
unattended when refueling the fuel door.
vehicle. This is against the law in
some places. Do not re-enter the
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep
children away from the fuel pump;
never let children pump fuel.



When replacing the fuel cap,
{ WARNING turn it clockwise until it clicks.
Make sure the cap is fully installed.
Fuel can spray out on you if you The diagnostic system can
open the fuel cap too quickly. determine if the fuel cap has been
If you spill fuel and then left off or improperly installed.
something ignites it, you could be This would allow fuel to
badly burned. This spray can evaporate into the atmosphere.
happen if the tank is nearly full, See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
and is more likely in hot weather. page 5‑19.
Open the fuel cap slowly and
The CHECK GAS CAP message
wait for any hiss noise to stop. displays on the Driver Information
Then unscrew the cap all the way. Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
There is also a manual fuel door
release tab. It is located against the properly installed. See Fuel System
upper trim in the rear compartment Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Messages on page 5‑41 for more
on the driver side of the vehicle. top off or overfill the tank and wait a information.
Pull the tab to release the fuel door. few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
slowly counterclockwise.
surfaces as soon as possible.
While refueling, let the cap hang by See Exterior Care on page 10‑82.
the tether below the fuel fill opening.



Filling a Portable Fuel
{ WARNING Container
WARNING (Continued)
If a fire starts while you are . Bring the fill nozzle in contact
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
by shutting off the pump or by Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be
notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is
Leave the area immediately. electricity discharge from the complete.
container can ignite the fuel . Do not smoke while
Notice: If you need a new fuel vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
cap, be sure to get the right type. and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
. Do not use a cellular phone
Your dealer can get one for you. while pumping fuel.
If you get the wrong type, it may and others:
not fit properly. This may cause . Dispense fuel only into
the malfunction indicator lamp to approved containers.
light and may damage the fuel
tank and emissions system.
. Do not fill a container while
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp it is inside a vehicle, in a
on page 5‑19. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)



Towing Conversions and The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
Add-Ons electrical to the vehicle, see
General Towing Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Information Add-On Electrical Vehicle on page 3‑26 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
The vehicle is neither designed nor Equipment Vehicle on page 3‑27.
intended to tow a trailer.
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-22
Cooling System (Engine) . . . 10-25
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Cooling System Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
(Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 High Intensity Discharge
General Information Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-30 Headlamps, Front Turn
California Proposition Overheated Engine Signal and Parking
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Protection Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
California Perchlorate Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-32 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Accessories and Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Electrical System
Vehicle Checks Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Electrical System
Doing Your Own Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-41 Fuses and Circuit
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Automatic Transmission Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Shift Lock Control Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Park Brake and P (Park) Instrument Panel Fuse
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-42 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-19
Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade Wheels and Tires
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Manual Transmission Windshield Replacement . . . 10-43
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Headlamp Aiming Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57


10-2 Vehicle Care

Sport Cup Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Wheel Alignment and Tire General Information
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-58 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-74 For service and parts needs,
Tire Terminology and Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 visit your dealer. You will receive
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 and supported service people.
Tire Pressure for Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Genuine GM parts have one of
High-Speed Operation . . . . 10-64 these marks:
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Tire Pressure Monitor Recreational Vehicle
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Appearance Care
When It Is Time for New Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with
65 Warning Modifications other systems on the vehicle.
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories or See your dealer to accessorize
one, contain and/or emit chemicals making modifications to the vehicle the vehicle using genuine GM
known to the State of California to can affect vehicle performance and Accessories installed by a dealer
cause cancer and birth defects or safety, including such things as technician.
other reproductive harm. Engine airbags, braking, stability, ride and Also, see Adding Equipment to the
exhaust, many parts and systems, handling, emissions systems, Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
many fluids, and some component aerodynamics, durability, and page 3‑27.
wear by-products contain and/or electronic systems like antilock
emit these chemicals. brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
California Perchlorate modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty.
Certain types of automotive
Damage to vehicle components
applications, such as airbag
resulting from modifications or the
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
installation or use of non‐GM
and lithium batteries contained in
certified parts, including control
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
module or software modifications, is
may contain perchlorate materials.
not covered under the terms of the
Special handling may be necessary.
vehicle warranty and may affect
For additional information, see
remaining warranty coverage for
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
affected parts.
perchlorate.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Lifting the Vehicle Notice: Lifting your vehicle
{ WARNING improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly
{ WARNING Getting under a vehicle when it repairs not covered by your
is lifted on a jack is dangerous. warranty. To lift your vehicle
Lifting a vehicle can cause an If the vehicle slips off the jack, properly, follow the advice in
injury. The vehicle can slip off the you could be badly injured or this part.
jack and roll over you or other killed. Never get under a vehicle
people. You and they could be when it is supported only by To help prevent vehicle damage:
badly injured. Find a level place a jack. . Be sure to place a block or
to lift your vehicle. To help pad between the jack and the
prevent the vehicle from moving: vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
{ WARNING . Make sure the jack you are
using spans at least two
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in Raising the vehicle with the crossmember ribs.
P (Park), or shift a manual jack improperly positioned can . Lift only in the areas shown
transmission to 1 (First) damage the vehicle or the vehicle in the following pictures.
or R (Reverse). may fall and cause you or others
For additional information, see
3. Turn off the engine. injury. your dealer and the Chevrolet
To be even more certain the Corvette service manual.
vehicle won't move, put blocks in If you ever use a jack to lift your
front of and behind the wheels. vehicle, follow the instructions that
came with the jack, and be sure to
use the correct lifting points to avoid
damaging your vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Lifting From the Front

1. Locate the front lifting points (A), 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
according to the illustration making sure the jack spans at
The front lifting points can be shown. least two of the crossmember
accessed from either side of your 2. Be sure to place a block or pad ribs (B).
vehicle, behind the front tires. between the jack and the
vehicle.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Lifting From the Rear

1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
according to the illustration making sure the jack spans at
The rear lifting points can be shown. least two of the crossmember
accessed from the rear of the 2. Be sure to place a block or pad ribs (B).
vehicle, on either the driver's or between the jack and the For more information, see Doing
passenger's side. vehicle. Your Own Service Work on
page 10‑7.


Vehicle Care 10-7

Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Service Work page 3‑26.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
{ WARNING and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
It can be dangerous to work on See Maintenance Records on
your vehicle if you do not have page 11‑15.
the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always Hood
follow owner manual procedures 2. Go to the side of the vehicle and
and consult the service manual To open the hood: pull up on the rear edge of the
for your vehicle before doing any hood, near the windshield.
service work. Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
If doing some of your own service Then, just pull the hood down and
work, use the proper service close it firmly.
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle 1. Pull the hood release lever
than this manual can. To order the with this symbol on it. It is
proper service manual, see Service located inside the vehicle below
Publications Ordering Information the instrument panel on the
on page 13‑18. driver side.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine (Without dry sump engine oil tank)


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Clutch Master Cylinder E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on J. Passenger Compartment
Reservoir (If Equipped). page 10‑22. Air Filter (Out of View).
See Hydraulic Clutch on F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Passenger Compartment
page 10‑21. See Power Steering Fluid on Air Filter on page 8‑7.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid page 10‑32. K. Battery on page 10‑40.
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When If the vehicle has the 6.2L LS3
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on to Add Engine Oil” under Brake V8 engine (without the dry sump
page 10‑34. Fluid on page 10‑38. engine oil tank) and you are facing
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See the front of the vehicle.
“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on “Checking Engine Oil” under
page 10‑34. Engine Oil on page 10‑14.
D. Coolant Surge Tank and I. Engine Compartment Fuse
Pressure Cap. See Engine Block on page 10‑48.
Coolant on page 10‑26.


10-10 Vehicle Care

6.2L LS9 V8 Engine (Without engine cover)


Vehicle Care 10-11

A. Intercooler. See Cooling System F. Clutch Master Cylinder K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
(Engine) on page 10‑25 or Reservoir (If Equipped). “Checking Engine Oil” under
Cooling System (Intercooler) on See Hydraulic Clutch on Engine Oil on page 10‑14.
page 10‑26. page 10‑21. L. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. (Out of View). See Jump
page 10‑22. See “Brake Fluid” under Starting on page 10‑78.
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Brakes on page 10‑34. M. Engine Compartment Fuse
and Cap. See Power Steering H. Passenger Compartment Block on page 10‑48.
Fluid on page 10‑32. Air Filter (Out of View). If the vehicle has the 6.2L LS9
D. Coolant Surge Tank and See Passenger Compartment Supercharged V8 engine and you
Pressure Cap. See Engine Air Filter on page 8‑7. are facing the front of the vehicle.
Coolant on page 10‑26. I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
E. Windshield Washer Fluid to Add Engine Oil” under
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Engine Oil on page 10‑14.
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on J. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank.
page 10‑34. See “Changing Engine Oil
and Filter” Brake Fluid on
page 10‑38.


10-12 Vehicle Care

6.2L LS3 V8 Engine (With dry sump engine oil tank) or 7.0L LS7 V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-13

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. J. Brake Fluid Reservoir.
page 10‑22. See “Changing Engine Oil and See “Brake Fluid” under
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. Filter” under Engine Oil on Brake Fluid on page 10‑38.
See Power Steering Fluid on page 10‑14. K. Clutch Master Cylinder
page 10‑32. G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When Reservoir. See Hydraulic
C. Engine Compartment Fuse to Add Engine Oil” under Clutch on page 10‑21.
Block on page 10‑48. Engine Oil on page 10‑14. If the vehicle has the 6.2L LS3
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal H. Coolant Surge Tank and V8 engine with the manual
(Out of View). See Jump Pressure Cap. See Engine transmission (with the dry sump
Starting on page 10‑78. Coolant on page 10‑26. engine oil tank) or the 7.0L LS7
I. Windshield Washer Fluid V8 engine and you are facing the
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See driver side of the vehicle.
“Checking Engine Oil” under Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Engine Oil on page 10‑14. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑34.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil Obtaining an accurate oil level
(Except Z06, ZR1, and reading is essential:
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
Grand Sport) 1. If the engine has been running
attention must be paid to engine oil. If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message recently, turn off the engine and
Following these simple, but displays on the Driver Information allow several minutes for the oil
important steps will help protect Center (DIC), check the engine to drain back into the oil pan.
your investment: oil level right away. For more Checking the oil level too soon
information, see Engine Oil after engine shutoff will not
. Always use engine oil approved provide an accurate oil level
to the proper specification and Messages on page 5‑40. Check the
engine oil level regularly; this is an reading.
of the proper viscosity grade.
See “Selecting the Right Engine added reminder. 2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with
Oil” in this section. It is a good idea to check the a paper towel or cloth, then push
engine oil level at each fuel fill. it back in all the way. Remove it
. Check the engine oil level again, keeping the tip down, and
regularly and maintain the In order to get an accurate
reading, the vehicle must be on check the level.
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add level ground. The engine oil dipstick
Engine Oil” in this section. handle is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
. Change the engine oil at the page 10‑8 for the location of the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil engine oil dipstick.
Life System on page 10‑19.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-15

When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. Checking Engine Oil
(Except Z06, ZR1, and Grand Oil levels above or below the (Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport)
Sport) acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
If the oil is below the cross-hatched be damaged. You should drain
area at the tip of the dipstick, add out the excess oil or limit driving
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended of the vehicle and seek a service
oil and then recheck the level. professional to remove the
See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” excess amount of oil. A. Engine Oil Dipstick
in this section for an explanation of B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
See Engine Compartment Overview
what kind of oil to use. For engine
on page 10‑8 for the location of the It is a good idea to check the engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
engine oil fill cap. oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2. Add enough oil to put the level get an accurate reading, the vehicle
somewhere in the proper operating must be on level ground.
See Racing or Other Competitive
range . Push the dipstick all the way The engine oil dipstick handle is a
Driving on page 9‑6 for additional
back in when through. yellow loop. The dipstick is located
information on engine oil.
on the dry sump engine oil tank.
on page 10‑8 for the location of the
dry sump engine oil tank.


10-16 Vehicle Care

These vehicles have a racetrack‐ This is normal since the dipstick is 4. Remove the dipstick from the
ready dry sump engine lubrication designed to read engine oil level external engine oil tank and
system. This high‐performance only after the engine has run long clean it with a lint‐free paper
system operates differently than a enough to reach normal operating towel or a cloth. Re‐insert the
standard engine lubrication system temperature. Do not add engine oil dipstick into the external oil tank,
and requires a special procedure based on cold engine dipstick pushing it all the way in until it
when checking the engine oil level. readings. The engine oil level on the stops.
Follow this procedure closely when dipstick will also be inaccurate if 5. Remove the dipstick from the oil
checking the engine oil level. checked while the engine is running. tank and read the level on the
The engine oil level must be 1. To obtain an accurate engine cross‐hatched area. Oil levels
checked when the engine is warm. oil level reading, warm up the that fall in the cross‐hatched
Cold oil level in the dry sump tank engine to at least 80°C (175°F). area are normal.
may not indicate the actual amount Cold oil will not give a correct oil
of oil in the system. With this level reading. When to Add Engine Oil
system, engine oil is contained in an (Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport)
2. Once the engine is warm, turn
external tank, separate from the off the engine. Checking the oil
engine. Under normal operating while the engine is running will
conditions, the oil pan under the result in an incorrect oil level
engine does not store any oil. If the reading.
vehicle has been parked for an
extended period without the engine 3. Wait at least five minutes If the oil is below the cross-hatched
being started, some oil will seep (but not more than 20 minutes) area at the tip of the dipstick, add
back into the oil pan, reducing the to allow oil to drain and settle 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
amount of oil held in the dry sump in the engine. through the oil fill cap opening in the
tank and there could be no engine oil tank and then recheck the level.
oil at all showing on the dipstick.


Vehicle Care 10-17

See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” See Engine Compartment Overview
for an explanation of what kind of oil on page 10‑8 for the location of the
to use. For engine oil crankcase external engine oil tank and fill cap.
capacity, see Capacities and Add enough oil to put the level
Specifications on page 12‑2. somewhere in the proper operating
See Racing or Other Competitive range. Push the dipstick all the way
Driving on page 9‑6 for additional back into the oil tank when through.
information on engine oil.
Changing Engine Oil and Filter
Notice: Do not add too much oil. (Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport)
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range These vehicles have a racetrack‐
shown on the dipstick are harmful ready dry sump engine lubrication
system. This high‐performance Z06 Shown, ZR1 and
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the system operates differently than a Grand Sport Similar
operating range, i.e., the engine standard engine lubrication system A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs
has so much oil that the oil level and requires a special procedure B. Seals
gets above the cross-hatched when changing the engine oil and
area that shows the proper filter. Follow this procedure closely 1. Remove the two engine oil drain
operating range, the engine could when changing the engine oil and plugs from the bottom of the
be damaged. You should drain filter. engine oil pan. One drain plug
out the excess oil or limit driving drains the external oil tank via
of the vehicle and seek a service the oil transfer supply line.
professional to remove the The other drain plug drains
excess amount of oil. residual oil from the crankcase
sump. Allow the oil to drain.


10-18 Vehicle Care

2. Once the oil has been drained 8. Start the engine and let it run at This certification mark indicates
from the engine, remove the idle for at least 15 seconds. that the oil has been approved
engine oil filter and allow the oil This will circulate the fresh to the dexos1 specification.
to drain. engine oil through the lubrication Corvette recommends Mobil 1®
3. Re‐install both drain plugs and system. engine oils that meet the
tighten them to 25 Y (18 lb ft). 9. Shut off the engine and check requirements of the dexos1
the oil level as described under specification for its dry‐sump
4. Replace the oil filter and equipped engines.
tighten it to 30 Y (22 lb ft). “Checking Engine Oil (Z06, ZR1,
See Maintenance Replacement and Grand Sport).”
Parts on page 11‑14 for the Selecting the Right Engine Oil
correct filter.
Selecting the right engine oil
5. Oil is filled through the opening depends on both the proper oil
in the top of the external engine specification and viscosity grade.
oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap. See Recommended Fluids and
6. Add 9.9 L (10.5 quarts) of oil to Lubricants on page 11‑12. Notice: Failure to use the
the oil tank. See Capacities and recommended engine oil or
Specification equivalent can result in engine
Specifications on page 12‑2.
Use and ask for licensed engine damage not covered by the
7. Install the oil fill cap and insert oils with the dexos1™ approved vehicle warranty. Check with your
the dipstick, if removed. certification mark. Engine oils dealer or service provider on
meeting the requirements for the whether the oil is approved to the
vehicle should have the dexos1 dexos1 specification.
approved certification mark.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Viscosity Grade Engine oil system flushes are not Engine Oil Life System
SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscosity recommended and could cause
grade for the vehicle. Do not use engine damage not covered by the When to Change Engine Oil
other viscosity grade oils such as vehicle warranty. This vehicle has a computer that
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50. What to Do with Used Oil indicates when to change the
If in an area of extreme cold, where engine oil and filter. This is based
Used engine oil contains certain on a combination of factors which
the temperature falls below −20°F elements that can be unhealthy for
(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should include engine revolutions, engine
your skin and could even cause temperature, and miles driven.
be used. An oil of this viscosity cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
grade will provide easier cold Based on driving conditions, the
your skin for very long. Clean your mileage at which an oil change is
starting for the engine at extremely skin and nails with soap and water,
low temperatures. When selecting indicated can vary considerably.
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or For the oil life system to work
an oil of the appropriate viscosity properly dispose of clothing or rags
grade, always select an oil that properly, the system must be reset
containing used engine oil. See the every time the oil is changed.
meets the dexos1 specification or manufacturer's warnings about the
equivalent. See “Specification” for use and disposal of oil products. Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport models
more information. have a racetrack‐ready dry sump
Used oil can be a threat to the engine lubrication system. This
Engine Oil Additives/Engine environment. If you change your high‐performance system operates
Oil Flushes own oil, be sure to drain all the oil differently than a standard engine
from the filter before disposal. Never lubrication system and requires a
Do not add anything to the oil.
dispose of oil by putting it in the special procedure when changing
The recommended oils with the
trash or pouring it on the ground, the engine oil and filter. See Engine
dexos specification and displaying
into sewers, or into streams or Oil on page 10‑14.
the dexos certification mark are all
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
that is needed for good performance
it to a place that collects used oil.
and engine protection.


10-20 Vehicle Care

When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil Automatic Transmission
that oil life has been diminished, Life System
it indicates that an oil change is
Fluid
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the How to Check Automatic
OIL message comes on. Change Transmission Fluid
the oil as soon as possible within system can calculate the next
the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is engine oil change. To reset the It is not necessary to check
possible that, if driving under the system: the transmission fluid level.
best conditions, the oil life system 1. Press the TRIP button so A transmission fluid leak is the only
might indicate that an oil change is the OIL LIFE percentage is reason for fluid loss. If a leak
not necessary for up to a year. displayed. occurs, take the vehicle to the
The engine oil and filter must be dealer and have it repaired as soon
2. Press RESET and hold for as possible.
changed at least once a year and,
two seconds. OIL LIFE
at this time, the system must be The vehicle is not equipped with a
REMAINING 100% will
reset. Your dealer has trained transmission fluid level dipstick.
appear.
service people who will perform this There is a special procedure for
work and reset the system. It is also If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL checking and changing the
important to check the oil regularly message comes back on when the transmission fluid. Because this
over the course of an oil drain vehicle is started, the engine oil life procedure is difficult, this should be
interval and keep it at the proper system has not reset. Repeat the done at the dealer. Contact the
level. procedure. dealer for additional information or
If the system is ever reset the procedure can be found in the
accidentally, the oil must be service manual. To purchase a
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) service manual, see Service
since the last oil change. Publications Ordering Information
Remember to reset the oil life on page 13‑18.
system whenever the oil is changed.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Notice: Use of the incorrect Hydraulic Clutch Refer to the Maintenance
automatic transmission fluid may Schedule for the proper fluid to use.
damage the vehicle, and the It is not necessary to regularly See Recommended Fluids and
damages may not be covered by check clutch fluid unless you Lubricants on page 11‑12. The fluid
the vehicle warranty. Always use suspect there is a leak in the requires changing every two years.
the automatic transmission fluid system. Adding fluid will not correct See Maintenance Schedule on
listed in Recommended Fluids a leak. A fluid loss in this system page 11‑3.
and Lubricants on page 11‑12. could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired. How to Check and Add Fluid
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Maintenance When to Check and What Visually check the clutch fluid
Schedule on page 11‑3, and to Use reservoir to make sure the fluid level
be sure to use the fluid listed in is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
Recommended Fluids and side of the reservoir. The hydraulic
Lubricants on page 11‑12. clutch fluid system should be closed
and sealed.
Manual Transmission Do not remove the cap to check
Fluid the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid
level. Remove the cap only when
It is not necessary to check the necessary to add the proper fluid
The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir
manual transmission fluid level. until the level reaches the MIN line.
cap has this symbol on it. See
A transmission fluid leak is the
Engine Compartment Overview on
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
page 10‑8 for reservoir location.
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12
for the proper fluid to use.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine To inspect or replace the engine air
Air Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter:
See Engine Compartment Overview 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
on page 10‑8 for the location of the Inspect the air cleaner/filter at
the scheduled maintenance page 10‑7.
engine air cleaner/filter.
intervals and replace them at the
Notice: If you spray water into first oil change after each
the engine air cleaner/filter intake 80 000 km (50,000 mi) interval.
and water enters the engine air See Maintenance Schedule on
cleaner/filter housing, you could page 11‑3 for more information.
damage your vehicle's engine. If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
The repairs would not be covered inspect the filter at each engine oil
by your warranty. Do not spray change.
water into the engine air cleaner/
filter intake and/or housing. How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
If cleaning the vehicle with the hood
open, take care not to spray water To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
directly near the filter opening of remove the filter from the vehicle 6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown,
the air cleaner, as shown in the and lightly shake the filter to release 6.2 L V8 Engine LS9 and
illustration, as this could damage loose dust and dirt. If the filter 7.0 L V8 Engine LS7 Similar
the vehicle's engine. remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required. A. Tube
B. Clamp
C. Duct
2. Remove the tube (A) from the
air cleaner assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-23

3. Loosen the clamp (B) at the 5. Press on the top and bottom of
throttle body and remove the the mass air flow sensor
duct (C). connector (A) and remove.

6.2 L V8 Engine LS9 Shown,
7.0 L V8 Engine LS7 Similar
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6. To access the air filter element,
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3
6.2 L V8 Engine LS9 and gently pull the air cleaner
7.0 L V8 Engine LS7 Similar assembly upward until the
A. Mass Air Flow Sensor fasteners are released from
Connector the retainer pins in the upper
radiator support.
B. Connector Lock
The LS3 engine has three
4. Remove the connector lock (B) retainer pins and the LS7 and
located at the bottom of LS9 engines have two.
the mass air flow sensor
connector (A).


10-24 Vehicle Care

7. To remove the filter from the
LS3 and LS7 engines, remove { WARNING
the six screws (A) securing the
filter cover (B) then pull away to Operating the engine with the air
gain access to the air filter (C). cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
To remove the filter assembly cleaner not only cleans the air; it
from the LS9 engine, remove the helps to stop flames if the engine
six screws securing the filter backfires. Use caution when
cover. The filter cover and the air
working on the engine and do not
filter are one piece.
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
8. Inspect or replace the filter
or filter cover assembly.
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
See Maintenance Replacement
6.2 L V8 Engine LS9 and Parts on page 11‑14. off, dirt can easily get into the
7.0 L V8 Engine LS7 Similar engine, which could damage it.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 7 to Always have the air cleaner/filter
A. Screw replace the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
B. Filter Cover cover.
C. Filter


Vehicle Care 10-25

Cooling System (Engine) Notice: Using coolant other
{ WARNING than DEX-COOL® can cause
The cooling system allows the premature engine, heater core,
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition,
working temperature. under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require
when the engine is not running changing sooner, at 50 000 km
and can cause injury. Keep (30,000 mi) or 24 months,
hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any
from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
7.0L Engine Shown,
6.2L Engine Similar Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan could lose all coolant. That could
B. Coolant Surge Tank with cause an engine fire, and you
Pressure Cap could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Cooling System Checking Coolant 4. Tighten the bleeder valve if there
is coolant flowing out of the
(Intercooler) bleeder valve.
The 6.2L LS9 supercharged 5. If there is no coolant flowing out
V8 engine has an intercooler of the bleeder valve, there could
cooling system. See Engine be a leak in the system. Tighten
Compartment Overview on the bleeder valve and contact
page 10‑8 for location of the the dealer for service.
intercooler.
The intercooler cooling system has Engine Coolant
a special procedure for draining and
adding coolant. Because this The cooling system in the vehicle
procedure is difficult, see the dealer is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
for service if the intercooler is low 1. Verify that the engine and coolant. This coolant is designed to
on coolant. The procedure can also intercooler are no longer hot. remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
be found in the service manual. 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
2. Place a cloth to absorb possible occurs first.
To purchase a service manual, coolant loss under the driver's
see Service Publications Ordering side bleeder valve (A). The following explains the cooling
Information on page 13‑18. system and how to check and add
3. Loosen, but do not completely coolant when it is low. If there is a
unscrew the bleeder valve to problem with engine overheating,
check for coolant in the system. see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑30.


Vehicle Care 10-27

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors
drinkable water and DEX-COOL and/or additives are used in the
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
vehicle cooling system, the
vehicle could be damaged.
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: Use only the proper mixture of
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down the engine coolant listed in this
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside manual for the cooling system.
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. See Recommended Fluids and
the proper coolant mixture will. Lubricants on page 11‑12 for
. Gives boiling protection more information.
The vehicle's coolant warning up to 129°C (265°F), engine
system is set for the proper temperature. Never dispose of engine coolant
coolant mixture. With plain water by putting it in the trash, pouring it
or the wrong mixture, the engine
. Protects against rust and on the ground, or into sewers,
could get too hot but you would corrosion. streams, or bodies of water.
not get the overheat warning. . Will not damage aluminum parts. Have the coolant changed by an
The engine could catch fire and authorized service center, familiar
. Helps keep the proper engine with legal requirements regarding
you or others could be burned. temperature.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, used coolant disposal. This will help
Notice: If an improper coolant protect the environment and your
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
mixture is used, the engine could health.
coolant.
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the
The vehicle must be on a level Coolant Surge Tank
surface when checking the coolant
level. { WARNING
Check to see if coolant is visible in You can be burned if you spill
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant The engine coolant surge tank is coolant on hot engine parts.
inside the coolant surge tank is located toward the rear of the Coolant contains ethylene glycol
boiling, do not do anything else until engine compartment on the driver and it will burn if the engine parts
it cools down. If coolant is visible side of the vehicle. See Engine are hot enough. Do not spill
but the coolant level is not at or Compartment Overview on
above the FULL COLD mark, add a coolant on a hot engine.
page 10‑8 for more information on
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable location.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
When the engine is cold, the coolant
coolant recovery tank, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before level should be at the FULL COLD { WARNING
this is done. See Engine Coolant on mark on the coolant surge tank. Steam and scalding liquids from a
page 10‑26 for more information. When the engine is hot, the level hot cooling system can blow out
could be higher than the FULL and burn you badly. They are
COLD line. If the coolant is below under pressure, and if you turn
the FULL COLD line when the the coolant surge tank pressure
engine is hot, there could be a leak cap — even a little — they
in the cooling system. can come out at high speed.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant (Continued)
or take the vehicle to a dealer for
service.


Vehicle Care 10-29

WARNING (Continued)

Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure
cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture directly 1. When the cooling system, 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
to the surge tank, but be sure the including the coolant surge tank the proper DEX-COOL coolant
cooling system is cool before this pressure cap and upper radiator mixture until the level inside
is done. hose, is no longer hot, remove stabilizes at the FULL COLD
the pressure cap. mark on the front of the
Turn the pressure cap slowly surge tank.
counterclockwise about
one-quarter turn and then stop.
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.


10-30 Vehicle Care

mixture to the coolant surge Engine Overheating
tank until the level stabilizes at
the FULL COLD mark on the The vehicle has several indicators
coolant surge tank. to warn of engine overheating.
5. Replace the pressure cap. There is an engine coolant
Be sure the pressure cap is temperature gauge on the
hand-tight and fully seated. instrument panel cluster.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Check the level in the surge tank Gauge on page 5‑16. The vehicle
when the system has cooled may also display a COOLANT
down. If the coolant is not at OVER TEMPERATURE
the proper level, repeat Steps 1 message on the Driver Information
through 4, then reinstall the Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap. If the coolant is
pressure cap off, start the System Messages on page 5‑39
not at the proper level when the for more information.
engine and let it run until the system cools down again, see
upper radiator hose can be felt the dealer. If the decision is made not to lift the
getting hot. Any time during this hood but to get service help right
procedure, watch out for the Notice: If the pressure cap is not away. See Roadside Assistance
engine cooling fan. tightly installed, coolant loss and Program (U.S. and Canada) on
possible engine damage may page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
By this time, the coolant level occur. Be sure the cap is properly
inside the coolant surge tank Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
and tightly secured.
may be lower. If the level is If the decision is made to lift the
lower, add more of the proper hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Then check to see if the engine If Steam is Coming from the
cooling fan is running. If the engine Engine WARNING (Continued)
is overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, do not continue See Overheated Engine
to run the engine and have the
{ WARNING Protection Operating Mode on
vehicle serviced. page 10‑32 for information on
Steam from an overheated engine
driving to a safe place in an
Notice: Engine damage from can burn you badly, even if you
emergency.
running your engine without just open the hood. Stay away
coolant is not covered by the from the engine if you see or hear
vehicle warranty. See Overheated steam coming from it. Turn it off If No Steam is Coming from
Engine Protection Operating and get everyone away from the the Engine
Mode for information on driving vehicle until it cools down. If an engine overheat warning is
to a safe place in an emergency. Wait until there is no sign of displayed but no steam can be seen
Notice: If the engine catches fire steam or coolant before you open or heard, the problem may not be
while driving with no coolant, the the hood. too serious. Sometimes the engine
vehicle can be badly damaged. If you keep driving when the can get a little too hot when the
The costly repairs would not be vehicles engine is overheated, vehicle:
the liquids in it can catch fire. . Climbs a long hill on a hot day
See Overheated Engine
You or others could be badly . Stops after high-speed driving
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑32 for information on burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the
. Idles for long periods in traffic
driving to a safe place in an
emergency. vehicle until the engine is cool.
(Continued)


10-32 Vehicle Care

If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle the Driving extended distances in the
with no sign of steam: engine for three minutes while overheat protection mode should be
1. Turn the air conditioning off. parked. If the warning is still avoided.
displayed, turn off the engine until it Notice: After driving in the
2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated
temperature and to the highest overheated engine protection
Engine Protection Operating Mode” operating mode, to avoid engine
fan speed. Open the windows next in this section.
as necessary. damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair.
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to Overheated Engine The engine oil will be severely
N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is Protection degraded. Repair the cause of
safe to do so, pull off the road, coolant loss, change the oil
shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral)
Operating Mode
and reset the oil life system.
and let the engine idle. This emergency operating mode See Engine Oil on page 10‑14.
If the temperature overheat gauge lets the vehicle be driven to a
is no longer in the overheat zone or safe place, up to 80 km (50 mi), Power Steering Fluid
an overheat warning no longer in an emergency situation. If an
displays, the vehicle can be driven. overheated engine condition exists
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly and the messages COOLANT
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe OVER TEMPERATURE and
vehicle distance from the vehicle in REDUCED ENGINE POWER are
front. If the warning does not come displayed, along with the check
back on, continue to drive normally. engine light, an overheat protection
mode which alternates firing groups
If the warning continues, pull over, of cylinders helps prevent engine See Engine Compartment Overview
stop, and park the vehicle damage. In this mode, there is a on page 10‑8 for reservoir location.
right away. significant loss in power and engine
performance.


Vehicle Care 10-33

When to Check Power Steering 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the When the engine compartment is
Fluid dipstick with a clean rag. cool, the level should be at the
4. Replace the cap and completely FULL COLD mark.
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless tighten it. What to Use
there is a leak suspected in the 5. Remove the cap again and look To determine what kind of fluid to
system or an unusual noise is at the fluid level on the dipstick. use, see Recommended Fluids
heard. A fluid loss in this system There are markings on both and Lubricants on page 11‑12.
could indicate a problem. Have the sides of the dipstick. Always use the proper fluid.
system inspected and repaired.
The level should be at the FULL Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
How to Check Power Steering COLD mark. If necessary, add only may damage the vehicle and the
Fluid enough fluid to bring the level up to damages may not be covered by
the mark. the vehicle's warranty. Always
Notice: Extremely small amounts
of contamination can cause use the correct fluid listed in
steering system damage and Recommended Fluids and
cause it to not work properly. Lubricants on page 11‑12.
Do not allow contaminants to
contact the fluid side of the
reservoir cap/dipstick or to enter
the reservoir.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the When the engine compartment
reservoir clean. is hot, the level should be at
the HOT mark.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid Notice Brakes
. When using concentrated
What to Use washer fluid, follow the
Brake Wear (Except ZR1, Z06,
When the vehicle needs windshield manufacturer's instructions and Grand Sport)
washer fluid, be sure to read the for adding water. This vehicle has disc brakes.
manufacturer's instructions before . Do not mix water with Disc brake pads have built-in wear
use. If the vehicle will be operating indicators that make a high-pitched
ready-to-use washer fluid.
in an area where the temperature warning sound when the brake pads
Water can cause the solution
may fall below freezing, use a fluid to freeze and damage the are worn and new pads are needed.
that has sufficient protection against washer fluid tank and other The sound can come and go or be
freezing. heard all the time the vehicle is
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as moving, except when applying the
Adding Washer Fluid brake pedal firmly.
well as washer fluid.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is { WARNING
very cold. This allows for The brake wear warning sound
fluid expansion if freezing means that soon the brakes will
occurs, which could not work well. That could lead to
damage the tank if it is
a crash. When the brake wear
Open the cap with the washer completely full.
warning sound is heard, have the
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Do not use engine coolant vehicle serviced.
the tank is full. See Engine (antifreeze) in the windshield
Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the
page 10‑8 for reservoir location. windshield washer system
and paint.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Notice: Continuing to drive with Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair. in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates . Make sure that the brakes have
can cause a brake squeal when the been given sufficient time to cool
brakes are first applied or lightly and then set the park brake.
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Wear (ZR1, Z06, and
Grand Sport Only) Front
The ZR1, Z06, and Grand Sport
. Brake pads can be visually
models do not have built-in brake inspected through the wheel by
pad wear indicators and periodic inspecting the outer brake pads
visual inspection of the brake pads at each wheel.
is required to determine when to . Brake pads should be replaced
replace the brake pads. Rear when worn to 2 mm of pad
thickness. New pads are 10 mm
thick.
. In addition, brake pad inspection
is required any time the tires are
removed.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Some driving conditions or climates Brake Rotor Protector
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
{ WARNING
something is wrong with the brakes. Ceramic rotors will be very hot
Brake linings should always be after operation and touching them
replaced as complete axle sets. may cause burns. Be sure brake
system is completely cool prior to
Brake Rotor Wear installation of protector, or coming
ZR1 models have, and Z06 and in contact with them.
Grand Sport models may have,
ceramic brake rotors. Rotors should Notice: Rotors may be chipped
The ZR1, Z06, and Grand Sport
be visually inspected whenever the if hard contact is made with the
models also have an electronic
brake pads are replaced. Rotors wheel during wheel installation or
brake pad wear sensor system.
also need to be weighed before removal. Always use the rotor
When pads are worn, the CHANGE
brake pads are replaced to confirm protectors. Be sure to carefully
BRAKE PADS message displays
that the rotor mass is greater than follow wheel removal and
in the Driver Information Center.
the wear‐out mass printed on the installation instructions.
See Brake System Messages on
rotor. The rotor can be reused if the
page 5‑36.
weight of the rotor is above the
mass limit. Rotor inspection and
weighing methods can be found in
the service manual. See Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑18.


Vehicle Care 10-37

A rotor protector should always be Replacing Brake System Parts
installed before any wheel removal.
The braking system on a vehicle
The protector can be installed by
is complex. Its many parts have to
feeding it through the wheel spokes
be of top quality and work well
and slipping it over the outer edge
together if the vehicle is to have
of the rotor. Leave the protector in
really good braking. The vehicle
place, over the rotor edge, until
was designed and tested with
the wheel is re‐installed. Rotor
top-quality brake parts. When
protectors are available through
parts of the braking system are
your dealer.
replaced — for example, when the
Brake Pedal Travel brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get
See your dealer if the brake pedal new approved replacement parts.
does not return to normal height, If this is not done, the brakes might
or if there is a rapid increase in not work properly. For example,
pedal travel. This could be a sign if someone puts in brake linings
that brake service might be that are wrong for the vehicle, the
required. balance between the front and rear
Brake Adjustment brakes can change — for the worse.
The braking performance expected
Every brake stop, the disc brakes can change in many other ways if
automatically adjust for wear. the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.


10-38 Vehicle Care
. A fluid leak in the brake
Brake Fluid hydraulic system can also cause WARNING (Continued)
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a You or others could be burned,
leak means that sooner or later and the vehicle could be
the brakes will not work well. damaged. Add brake fluid only
Do not top off the brake fluid. when work is done on the brake
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. hydraulic system. See “Checking
The brake master cylinder reservoir If fluid is added when the linings are Brake Fluid” in this section.
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. worn, there will be too much fluid
See Engine Compartment Overview when new brake linings are
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
on page 10‑8 for the location of the installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
to determine when to check the
reservoir. as necessary, only when work is
brake fluid. See Maintenance
done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the Schedule on page 11‑3.
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down: { WARNING
. The brake fluid level goes down If too much brake fluid is added,
because of normal brake lining it can spill on the engine and
wear. When new linings are burn, if the engine is hot enough.
installed, the fluid level goes
(Continued)
back up.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Checking Brake Fluid What to Add Notice
Check brake fluid by looking at the Use only new DOT 3 brake . Using the wrong fluid
brake fluid reservoir. See Engine fluid from a sealed container. can badly damage brake
Compartment Overview on See Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts.
page 10‑8. Lubricants on page 11‑12. For example, just a few
Always clean the brake fluid drops of mineral-based oil,
The fluid level should be above the
reservoir cap and the area such as engine oil, in the
MIN mark on the reservoir. If it is
around the cap before removing it. brake hydraulic system can
not, have the brake hydraulic
This helps keep dirt from entering damage brake hydraulic
system checked to see if there is
the reservoir. system parts so badly that
a leak.
they will have to be replaced.
After work is done on the brake Do not let someone put in
hydraulic system, make sure the { WARNING the wrong kind of fluid.
level is between the MIN and MAX
With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
marks.
brake hydraulic system, the vehicle's painted surfaces,
brakes might not work well. the paint finish can be
This could cause a crash. damaged. Be careful not to
Always use the proper brake fluid. spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Battery Vehicle Storage Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
Refer to the replacement number on
the original battery label when a { WARNING battery to keep the battery from
running down.
new battery is needed.
Batteries have acid that can burn See “Power Window Initialization”
For battery replacement, see your you and gas that can explode. in Power Windows on page 2‑18.
dealer or the service manual. You can be badly hurt if you are
To purchase a service manual, Extended Storage: Remove the
not careful. See Jump Starting on
see Service Publications Ordering black, negative (−) cable from the
page 10‑78 for tips on working
Information on page 13‑18. battery or use a battery trickle
around a battery without charger.
getting hurt.
{ WARNING Rear Axle
Battery posts, terminals, and Some vehicles have a battery
maintainer package. Follow the When to Check Lubricant
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals instructions provided with the It is not necessary to regularly
known to the State of California to battery maintainer package to check rear axle fluid unless a leak is
keep the battery charged when the suspected or an unusual noise is
cause cancer and reproductive
vehicle is not in use. For vehicles heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
harm. Wash hands after handling.
without a battery maintainer, see the problem. Have it inspected and
following information. repaired.


Vehicle Care 10-41

How to Check Lubricant What to Use 2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
To add lubricant when the level is
See Parking Brake on
low or to completely refill after
page 9‑36.
draining, see Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑12. Do not use the accelerator
Then fill to the bottom of the fill plug pedal, and be ready to turn off
hole with the required lubricant. the engine immediately if it
starts.
Starter Switch Check 3. For automatic transmission
vehicles, try to start the engine
{ WARNING in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in P (Park) or
When you are doing this N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
inspection, the vehicle could in any other position, contact
To get an accurate reading, the move suddenly. If the vehicle your dealer for service.
vehicle should be on a level moves, you or others could be
surface. For manual transmission
injured. vehicles, put the shift lever in
If the level is below the bottom of Neutral, push the clutch pedal
the fill plug hole, some lubricant will 1. Before starting this check, be down halfway, and try to start
need to be added. Add enough sure there is enough room the engine. The vehicle should
lubricant to raise the level to the around the vehicle. start only when the clutch pedal
bottom of the fill plug hole. is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer for service.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
ignition on, but do not start the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the your foot on the regular brake, set
Function Check regular brake, try to move the the parking brake.
shift lever out of P (Park) with . To check the parking brake's
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
When you are doing this your dealer for service. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
inspection, the vehicle could pressure from the regular brake
move suddenly. If the vehicle Park Brake and P (Park) pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
moves, you or others could be Mechanism Check held by the parking brake only.
injured. . To check the P (Park)
{ WARNING mechanism's holding ability:
1. Before starting this check, be With the engine running, shift to
sure there is enough room When you are doing this check, P (Park). Then release the
around the vehicle. It should be the vehicle could begin to move. parking brake followed by the
parked on a level surface. You or others could be injured regular brake.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. and property could be damaged.
Contact your dealer if service is
See Parking Brake on Make sure there is room in front required.
page 9‑36. of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle
brake immediately if the vehicle begin to move.
begins to move.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the windshield wiper 4. Remove the wiper blade.
blade: Allowing the wiper blade arm to
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking. 1. Pull the wiper assembly away touch the windshield when no
See Maintenance Schedule on from the windshield. wiper blade is installed could
page 11‑3 for more information. damage the windshield.
Any damage that occurs would
Replacement blades come in not be covered by the vehicle
different types and are removed warranty. Do not allow the wiper
in different ways. For proper blade to touch the windshield.
windshield wiper blade length
and type, see Maintenance 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 for
Replacement Parts on page 11‑14. wiper blade replacement.
Notice: Allowing the wiper arm to Windshield Replacement
touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could The windshield is part of the
damage the windshield. Any Head-Up Display (HUD) system.
damage that occurs would not be 2. Lift up on the plastic latch in the If you ever have to get the
covered by your warranty. Do not middle of the wiper blade where windshield replaced, get one that is
allow the wiper arm to touch the the wiper arm attaches. designed for HUD or the HUD
windshield. 3. With the latch open, pull the image may look out of focus.
wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge
Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
further adjustment. page 10‑46. { WARNING
However, if the vehicle is damaged For any bulb‐changing procedure The low beam high intensity
in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system
be affected. Aim adjustment to the your dealer.
operates at a very high voltage.
low-beam headlamps may be
If you try to service any of the
necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs system components, you could be
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim). seriously injured. Have your
{ WARNING dealer or a qualified technician
If the headlamps need to be service them.
re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized
the vehicle be taken to the dealer gas inside and can burst if you
for service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or The vehicle may have HID
others could be injured. Be sure headlamps. After an HID headlamp
to read and follow the instructions bulb has been replaced, you may
on the bulb package. notice that the beam is a slightly
different shade than it was originally.
This is normal.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Headlamps, Front Turn To replace a high-beam or front
parking/turn signal bulb:
Signal and Parking
Lamps 1. Turn the wheel to allow access
to the wheel well.

4. Remove the headlamp bulb by
releasing the outer tabs from the
socket.
5. Remove the front parking/turn
A. High-beam Headlamp signal bulb by turning the bulb
2. Remove the three outer socket counterclockwise.
B. Low-beam Headlamp fasteners to move the access 6. Replace the high-beam
C. Front Parking/Turn Signal panel back. headlamp bulb with a new bulb
If the low-beam headlamp needs 3. Remove the outer cover to and reattach to the bulb socket.
to be replaced, see your dealer. expose the high-beam headlamp Replace the front parking/turn
See High Intensity Discharge (HID) bulb socket. signal bulb by turning the bulb
Lighting on page 10‑44 for more socket clockwise.
information.
7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to
reinstall.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal, 5. Push the new bulb in the bulb Electrical System
socket until it snaps into place.
and Stoplamps
To replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by Electrical System
first lining up the tabs on the
signal bulb: bottom of the lamp assembly
Overload
1. Remove the screw from the top with the tabs in the vehicle, then The vehicle has fuses and circuit
of the lamp assembly. slide it in. breakers to protect against an
7. Replace the screw at the top of electrical system overload.
the lamp assembly. When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Replacement Bulbs and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
Bulb normal or the problem is fixed.
Exterior Lamp
Number This greatly reduces the chance of
Front Parking/ circuit overload and fire caused by
Turn Signal 5702KA electrical problems.
Headlamp, Fuses and circuit breakers protect
High‐Beam Lamp H9 power devices in the vehicle.
2. Tilt the lamp assembly Sidemarker Lamp 194LL (W3W) Replace a bad fuse with a new one
toward you. of the identical size and rating.
Stoplamp/Taillamp/
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter Turn Signal Lamp 3047K
turn counterclockwise and pull
it out. For replacement bulbs not listed
4. Pull the bulb straight out to here, contact your dealer.
remove it from the socket.


Vehicle Care 10-47

If there is a problem on the road Always clear ice and heavy snow If you ever have a problem on the
and a fuse needs to be replaced, from the windshield before using the road and do not have a spare fuse,
the same amperage fuse can be windshield wipers. you can borrow one that has the
borrowed. Choose some feature of If the overload is caused by an same amperage. Just pick some
the vehicle that is not needed to use electrical problem and not snow or feature of the vehicle that you can
and replace it as soon as possible. ice, be sure to get it fixed. get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,
Headlamp Wiring if it is the correct amperage.
An electrical overload may cause
Fuses and Circuit Replace it as soon as you can.
the lamps to go on and off, or Breakers Vehicles with the ZR1 package have
in some cases to remain off. The wiring circuits in the vehicle are an intercooler relay located on the
Have the headlamp wiring checked protected from short circuits by a fan shroud. See your dealer.
right away if the lamps go on and combination of J-Case fuses,
off or remain off. Vehicles with the ZR1 package also
mini-fuses and circuit breakers.
have a fuel system mini-fuse. It is
Windshield Wipers This greatly reduces the chance of
located near the battery in the
fires caused by electrical problems.
If the wiper motor overheats due to battery storage compartment in the
heavy snow or ice, the windshield Look at the silver-colored band rear of the vehicle.
wipers will stop until the motor cools inside the fuse. If the band is broken
and will then restart. or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
Although the circuit is protected one of the identical size and rating.
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
There is one fuse block in the
engine compartment located on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
on page 10‑8 for more information
on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.

For ZR1 models, the Fuel System Fuse Usage
fuse is located at the battery.
Transmission
The vehicle may not be equipped 1 Control Module/
with all of the fuses, relays, and Transmission
features shown.
Horn, Alternator
2
Sense


Vehicle Care 10-49

Fuse Usage Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
Antilock Brake Electronic 22 Front Fog Lamp
3 System (ABS)/Real 13 Suspension
Passenger Side
Time Damping Control (Option)
23 High-Beam
4 Wiper Canister Purge Headlamp
14 Solenoid, Mass Air
Stoplamps/ Driver Side
5 Flow Sensor
Back-Up Lamps 24 High-Beam
Air Conditioner Headlamp
6 Oxygen Sensor 15
Compressor
Engine Control
7 Battery Main 5
Even Numbered Module (ECM)/
16
8 Parking Lamps Fuel Injectors Transmission
56
Powertrain Relay Control
17 Windshield Washer
9 Input/Electronic Module (TCM)/
18 Headlamp Washer Easy Key Module
Throttle Control
Passenger Side
Manual
19 Low-Beam J-Style Usage
10 Transmission
Headlamp Fuses
Solenoids
Fuel Pump 25 Cooling Fan
Antilock Brake 20
11 (except ZR1) 26 Battery Main 3
System
Driver Side Antilock Brake
Odd Numbered 27
12 21 Low-Beam System
Fuel Injectors
Headlamp


10-50 Vehicle Care

J-Style Usage Micro- Usage Spare Fuses Usage
Fuses Relays
48 Spare
Heating/Ventilation/ High-Beam
39 49 Spare
28 Air Conditioning Headlamp
Blower 50 Spare
46 Headlamp Washer
29 Battery Main 2 51 Spare
Fuel Pump
55
30 Starter (except ZR1) 52 Spare
31 Audio Amplifier 53 Spare
Mini-Relays Usage
32 Intercooler Pump 54 Fuse Puller
40 Rear Defog
33 Battery Main 1
Windshield Wiper Diodes Usage
41
High/Low
Micro- Usage § Diode 1
Relays Windshield Wiper
42 § Wiper
Run/Accessory
34 Horn
§ Diode 2
43 Crank
Air Conditioning
35
Compressor Powertrain
44
Ignition 1
36 Windshield Washer
Windshield Wiper
Parking Lamps, 45
37 On/Off
Fog Lamps
Low-Beam
38 Front Fog Lamp 47
Headlamp


Vehicle Care 10-51

Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located on the passenger side of the
vehicle, under the instrument panel
and under the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board
covering to access the fuse block by
pulling at the top of each corner of
the panel. Open the fuse block
cover to access the fuses.
You can remove fuses using the
fuse puller.

The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. BCK/
Back-up Lamps
UP LAMP
BLANK Not Used
BLANK Not Used


10-52 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
Brake FUSE PLR Fuse Puller Rear Fog Lamp,
BTSI Transmission Assembly Line
GM LAN REAR FOG/
SOL/STR Shift Interlock, GM LAN Devices Diagnostic Link
RUN/CRNK ALDL/TOP
WHL LCK Steering Wheel Connector,
SWTCH
Column Lock HTD SEAT/ Heated Seat, Convertible Top
WPR RLY Wiper Relays Switch
Cluster,
CLSTR/HUD
Heads-Up Display Heating Ventilation/ REVERSE
HVAC/ Reverse Lamps
Air Conditioning, LAMPS
CRUISE Cruise Control PWR SND
Power Sounder
SWTCH Switch RUN CRNK Run/Crank Relay
IGN SWTCH/ Ignition Switch,
CTSY/LAMP Courtesy Lamp Sensing and
INTR SNSR Intrusion Sensor
SDM/AOS Diagnostic Module,
DR LCK Door Locks
Electric Inside SWTCH Automatic
DRIV DR Rearview Mirror, AIRBAG Occupant Sensing
Driver Door Switch
SWITCH ISRVM/HVAC Heating, Module, Airbag
Ventilation, Air
Engine Control SPARE Spare
ECM Conditioning
Module (ECM)
SPARE Spare
OnStar
Exhaust Module ONSTAR
(if equipped) SPARE Spare
(Z06 & ZR1),
EXH MDL
Spare (Coupe and RDO/ SPARE Spare
Radio, S-Band
Convertible) S-BAND
STOP LAMP Stop Lamp
Steering Wheel
SWC DM
Dimming


Vehicle Care 10-53

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
TELE Telescope Switch, AUX PWR Auxiliary Power PWR/
Power Windows,
SWTCH/ Memory Seat WNDWS/
BLANK Not Used Trunk, Fuel Door
MSM Module TRUNK/
Release Circuit
BLANK Not Used FUEL
TONNEAU Breaker
Tonneau Release RELSE CB
RELSE BLANK Not Used
TRUNK
Tonneau Pulldown BLANK Not Used Trunk Release
TPA RELSE
Actuator BLANK Not Used
WPR DWELL Wiper Dwell
BLANK Not Used
Fuses Usage Windshield
BLANK Not Used WPR/WSW
BLANK Blank Wiper/Washer
DRVR
BLANK Blank Driver Heated Seat
HTD SEAT
FUEL DR
Fuel Door Release LTR Cigarette Lighter
RELSE
PASS Passenger
REAR/FOG Rear Fog Lamps
HTD SEAT Heated Seat
TONNEAU
Tonneau Release Power Seats,
RELSE PWR
Memory Seat
TRUNK SEATS MSM
Trunk Release Module
RELSE


10-54 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Tires . Poorly maintained and . Overinflated tires are
improperly used tires are more likely to be cut,
Every new GM vehicle has dangerous. punctured, or broken by a
high-quality tires made by a sudden impact— such as
leading tire manufacturer.
. Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a when hitting a pothole. Keep
See the warranty manual for result of too much flexing. tires at the recommended
information regarding the tire There could be a blowout and pressure.
warranty and where to get a serious crash. See Vehicle . Worn or old tires can cause a
service. For additional Load Limits on page 9‑14. crash. If the tread is badly
information refer to the tire . Underinflated tires pose the worn, replace them.
manufacturer. same danger as overloaded . Replace any tires that have
tires. The resulting crash been damaged by impacts
could cause serious injury. with potholes, curbs, etc.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended . Improperly repaired tires can
pressure. Tire pressure cause a crash. Only the
should be checked when the dealer or an authorized tire
tires are cold. service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
(Continued)
the tires.
(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-55

WARNING (Continued)
Winter Tires See your dealer for details
regarding winter tire availability and
Consider installing winter tires on proper tire selection. Also, see
the vehicle if frequent driving on Buying New Tires on page 10‑70.
. Do not spin the tires in snow or ice covered roads is
excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) expected. All season tires provide If using snow tires:
on slippery surfaces such good overall performance on most . Use tires of the same brand and
as snow, mud, ice, etc. surfaces, but they may not offer tread type on all four wheel
Excessive spinning may the traction or the same level of positions.
cause the tires to explode. performance as winter tires on . Use only radial ply tires of the
snow or ice covered roads.
same size, load range, and
See Tire Pressure for Winter tires, in general, are speed rating as the original
High-Speed Operation on designed for increased traction on equipment tires.
page 10‑64 for inflation pressure snow and ice covered roads. With
Winter tires with the same speed
adjustment for high-speed winter tires, there may be decreased
dry road traction, increased road rating as the original equipment tires
driving. may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
noise, and shorter tread life. After
changing to winter tires, be alert for and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires with a lower speed rating are
changes in vehicle handling and
braking. chosen, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Run-Flat Tires If a tire goes flat, there is no need to To locate the nearest GM or run-flat
stop on the side of the road to servicing facility, call Roadside
This vehicle, when new, had run-flat change the tire. Continue driving, Assistance. See Roadside
tires. There is no spare tire, no tire however, do not drive too far or too Assistance Program (U.S. and
changing equipment, and no place fast. Driving on the tire may not be Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
to store a tire in the vehicle. possible if there is permanent Assistance Program (Mexico) on
The vehicle also has a Tire damage. The tire can be driven with page 13‑10 for details.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) no air pressure for up to 105 km The valve stems on run-flat
that indicates a loss of tire pressure (65 miles) at speeds slower than tires have sensors that are part of
in any of the tires. 90 km/h (55 mph). The shorter the the TPMS. See Tire Pressure
distance and the slower the speed, Monitor System on page 10‑64.
{ WARNING the greater the chance the tire will
not have to be replaced. As soon
These sensors contain batteries that
are designed to last for 10 years
If the low tire warning light as possible, contact the nearest under normal driving conditions.
displays on the instrument panel authorized GM or run-flat servicing See your dealer for wheel or sensor
cluster, the handling capabilities facility for inspection and repair or replacement.
will be reduced during severe replacement. When driving on a
deflated run-flat tire, avoid potholes Notice: Using liquid sealants can
maneuvers. Driving too fast could damage the tire valves and tire
and other road hazards that could
cause loss of control and you or pressure monitor sensors in the
damage the tire and/or wheel
others could be injured. Do not beyond repair. When a tire has been run-flat tires. This damage is not
drive over 90 km/h (55 mph) damaged, or if driven any distance covered by the vehicle warranty.
when the low tire warning light is on a deflated run-flat tire, check with Do not use liquid sealants in
displayed. Drive cautiously and an authorized run-flat tire service run-flat tires.
check the tire pressures as soon center to determine whether the
as possible. tire can be repaired or should be
replaced. To maintain the run-flat
feature, all replacement tires must
be run-flat tires.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Low-Profile Tires Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when { WARNING
Low‐Profile Performance Tire possible, avoid contact with Driving on wet roads, in heavy
The original equipment tires on curbs, potholes, and other rain, or through standing water
this vehicle are classified as road hazards. with Sport Cup tires may cause
low‐profile performance tires. hydroplaning and loss of control.
These tires are designed for Sport Cup Tires Use extreme caution and drive
very responsive driving on wet This vehicle may come with slowly on wet roads.
or dry pavement, however, may Michelin Pilot Sport Cup competition
produce more road noise and oriented tires that are DOT approved
tend to wear faster. for street use. These tires are
included on the Z06 model with the
{ WARNING
Notice: Low‐profile tires are Z07 Performance Package and on
more susceptible to damage Driving with Sport Cup tires on
the ZR1 model with the PDE High snow, ice, or cold road surfaces
from road hazards or curb Performance Package. Sport Cup
impact than standard profile can cause loss of control or an
tires use a special tread and
accident. Sport Cup tires are a
tires. Tire and/or wheel compound that provide more
summer season tires and are not
assembly damage can occur grip than normal road tires.
The minimum tread depth will be intended to be driven on snow,
when coming into contact ice, or road surfaces below
with road hazards like, reached earlier than typical tires,
resulting in reduced tire life. 10°C (50°F). Do not drive a
potholes, or sharp edged vehicle with Sport Cup tires in
This special tread and compound
objects, or when sliding into a these conditions.
will decrease performance in cold
curb. The warranty does not climates, heavy rain, and standing
cover this type of damage. water.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall Labeling (B) TPC Spec (Tire tire size, and date the tire was
Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is
Useful information about a tire Specification): Original molded onto both sides of the
is molded into its sidewall. equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may
The examples show a typical GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture.
passenger tire sidewall. criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in
GM's TPC specifications meet the sidewall and under the tread.
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines. (F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
(C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to
Transportation): The grade tires based on three
Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear,
(DOT) code indicates that traction, and temperature
the tire is in compliance with resistance. For more information
the U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality
Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 10‑72.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example Safety Standards.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is (G) Maximum Cold Inflation
(D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load
a combination of letters and (TIN): The letters and numbers
numbers used to define a that can be carried and the
following the DOT code are maximum pressure needed to
particular tire's width, height, the Tire Identification Number
aspect ratio, construction type, support that load.
(TIN). The TIN shows the
and service description. See the manufacturer and plant code,
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit capacity a tire is certified to
number that indicates the tire carry. The speed rating is the
Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. maximum speed a tire is
The following is an example For example, if the tire size certified to carry a load.
of a typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
tire size. item C of the illustration, it would Tire Terminology and
mean that the tire's sidewall is Definitions
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Air Pressure: The amount of
(D) Construction Code: air inside the tire pressing
A letter code is used to indicate outward on each square inch
the type of ply construction in of the tire. Air pressure is
the tire. The letter R means expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the or psi (pounds per square inch).
The United States version letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the Accessory Weight: The
of a metric tire sizing system. combined weight of optional
The letter P as the first letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction. accessories. Some examples of
character in the tire size optional accessories are
means a passenger vehicle (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of automatic transmission, power
tire engineered to standards the wheel in inches. steering, power brakes, power
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim (F) Service Description: windows, power seats, and air
Association. These characters represent conditioning.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit the load index and speed rating Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number indicates the tire of the tire. The load index of a tire's height to its width.
section width in millimeters represents the load carrying
from sidewall to sidewall.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Belt: A rubber coated layer of Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
cords that is located between motor vehicle with standard and Weight Rating for the front axle.
the plies and the tread. Cords optional equipment including the See Vehicle Load Limits on
may be made from steel or other maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9‑14.
reinforcing materials. and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle
Bead: The tire bead contains passengers and cargo. Weight Rating for the rear axle.
steel wires wrapped by steel DOT Markings: A code See Vehicle Load Limits on
cords that hold the tire onto molded into the sidewall of a page 9‑14.
the rim. tire signifying that the tire is in Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire compliance with the U.S. The side of an asymmetrical tire,
in which the plies are laid at Department of Transportation that must always face outward
alternate angles less than (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety when mounted on a vehicle.
90 degrees to the centerline of Standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
the tread. unit for air pressure.
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
Cold Tire Pressure: The designator which can also Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:
amount of air pressure in a tire, identify the tire manufacturer, A tire used on light duty trucks
measured in kPa (kilopascal) production plant, brand, and and some multipurpose
or psi (pounds per square inch) date of production. passenger vehicles.
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Load Index: An assigned
on page 10‑62. Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits number ranging from 1 to 279
on page 9‑14. that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
The maximum air pressure to The side of an asymmetrical tire tire in which the ply cords that
which a cold tire can be inflated. that has a particular side that extend to the beads are laid at
The maximum air pressure is faces outward when mounted on 90 degrees to the centerline of
molded onto the sidewall. a vehicle. The side of the tire the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: that contains a whitewall, Rim: A metal support for a tire
The load rating for a tire at the bears white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
pressure for that tire. model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same Sidewall: The portion of a tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall between the tread and the bead.
Weight: The sum of curb of the tire. Speed Rating: An alpha-
weight, accessory weight, numeric code assigned to a tire
vehicle capacity weight, and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars indicating the maximum speed
production options weight. at which a tire can operate.
and some light duty trucks
Normal Occupant Weight: and multipurpose vehicles. Traction: The friction between
The number of occupants a the tire and the road surface.
vehicle is designed to seat Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle The amount of grip provided.
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).
See Vehicle Load Limits on manufacturer's recommended Tread: The portion of a tire
page 9‑14. tire inflation pressure as shown that comes into contact with
on the tire placard. See Tire the road.
Occupant Distribution : Pressure on page 10‑62 and
Designated seating positions. Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑14.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: Tire Pressure
bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated
bars, that show across the seating positions multiplied by Tires need the correct amount
tread of a tire when only 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated of air pressure to operate
1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread cargo load. See Vehicle Load effectively.
remains. See When It Is Time Limits on page 9‑14. Notice: Neither tire
for New Tires on page 10‑69. Vehicle Maximum Load on underinflation nor
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality the Tire: Load on an individual overinflation is good.
Grading Standards): A tire tire due to curb weight, Underinflated tires, or tires
information system that accessory weight, occupant that do not have enough air,
provides consumers with weight, and cargo weight. can result in:
ratings for a tire's traction, Vehicle Placard: A label
. Tire overloading and
temperature, and treadwear. permanently attached to a overheating which could
Ratings are determined by vehicle showing the vehicle lead to a blowout.
tire manufacturers using capacity weight and the . Premature or
government testing procedures. original equipment tire size irregular wear.
The ratings are molded into and recommended inflation
the sidewall of the tire. . Poor handling.
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
See Uniform Tire Quality Information Label” under Vehicle . Reduced fuel economy.
Grading on page 10‑72. Load Limits on page 9‑14.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Overinflated tires, or tires Information label, see Vehicle Remove the valve cap from the
that have too much air, Load Limits on page 9‑14. tire valve stem. Press the tire
can result in: How the vehicle is loaded gauge firmly onto the valve to
. Unusual wear. affects vehicle handling and get the pressure measurement.
ride comfort. Never load the If the cold tire inflation pressure
. Poor handling. vehicle with more weight than matches the recommended
. Rough ride. it was designed to carry. pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
. Needless damage from When to Check
further adjustment is necessary.
road hazards. Check the tires once a month
If the inflation pressure is low,
The Tire and Loading or more.
add air until the recommended
Information label on the pressure is reached. If the
How to Check
vehicle indicates the original inflation pressure in high, press
equipment tires and the correct Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check the tire on the metal stem in the center
cold tire inflation pressures. of the tire valve to release air.
The recommended pressure is pressure. Proper tire inflation
cannot be determined by Re‐check the tire pressure with
the minimum air pressure the tire gauge.
needed to support the vehicle's looking at the tire. Check the tire
maximum load carrying capacity. inflation pressure when the tires Return the valve caps on the
are cold, meaning the vehicle valve stems to keep out dirt and
For additional information moisture and prevent leaks.
has not been driven for at least
regarding how much weight three hours or no more than
the vehicle can carry, and an
1.6 km (1 mi).
example of the Tire and Loading


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure for The tires require inflation pressure Racing or other competitive driving
adjustment when driving the vehicle may affect the warranty coverage of
High-Speed Operation at speeds of 282 km/h (175 mph) or the vehicle. See the warranty
higher, where it is legal. Set the cold booklet for more information.
{ WARNING inflation pressure to the maximum
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
inflation pressure shown on the Tire Pressure Monitor
tire sidewall, or 265 kPa (38 psi),
(100 mph) or higher, puts an whichever is lower. See the
System
additional strain on tires. example following. Return the tires The Tire Pressure Monitor System
Sustained high-speed driving to the recommended cold tire (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
causes excessive heat buildup inflation pressure when high-speed technology to check tire pressure
and can cause sudden tire failure. driving has ended. See Vehicle levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
You could have a crash and you Load Limits on page 9‑14. the air pressure in your tires and
or others could be killed. Some transmit tire pressure readings to a
Example:
high-speed rated tires require receiver located in the vehicle.
inflation pressure adjustment for The maximum load and inflation
Each tire, including the spare
high-speed operation. When pressure molded on the tire
(if provided), should be checked
speed limits and road conditions sidewall, in small letters,
monthly when cold and inflated to
near the rim flange. It will read
are such that a vehicle can be the inflation pressure recommended
something like this: Maximum load
driven at high speeds, make sure by the vehicle manufacturer on the
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)
the tires are rated for high-speed vehicle placard or tire inflation
Max. Press.
operation, in excellent condition, pressure label. (If your vehicle has
and set to the correct cold tire For this example, set the inflation tires of a different size than the size
inflation pressure for the pressure for high‐speed driving at indicated on the vehicle placard or
vehicle load. 265 kPa (38 psi). tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)


Vehicle Care 10-65

As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow
more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure the TPMS to continue to function
under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a properly.
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then Operation on page 10‑66 for
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. additional information.
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications
significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists. Commission (FCC) Rules and
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is with Industry Canada
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be Standards
also reduces fuel efficiency and able to detect or signal low tire See Radio Frequency Statement on
tire tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS page 13‑21 for information
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety regarding Part 15 of the Federal
ability. of reasons, including the installation Communications Commission (FCC)
Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or Rules and with Industry Canada
not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure Monitor pressure shown on the tire loading A Tire and Loading Information label
information label. See Vehicle Load shows the size of the original
Operation Limits on page 9‑14. equipment tires and the correct
This vehicle may have a Tire A message to check the pressure in inflation pressure for the tires when
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). a specific tire displays in the Driver they are cold. See Vehicle Load
The TPMS is designed to warn the Information Center (DIC). The low Limits on page 9‑14, for an example
driver when a low tire pressure tire pressure warning light and the of the Tire and Loading Information
condition exists. TPMS sensors DIC warning message appear at label and its location. Also see
are mounted onto each tire and each ignition cycle until the tires Tire Pressure on page 10‑62 for
wheel assembly on your vehicle. are inflated to the correct inflation additional information.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure. Using the DIC, tire The TPMS can warn about a
pressure in the tires and transmits pressure levels can be viewed. low tire pressure condition but it
the tire pressure readings to a For additional information and does not replace normal tire
receiver located in the vehicle. details about the DIC operation and maintenance. See Tire Inspection
displays see Driver Information on page 10‑68, Tire Rotation on
Center (DIC) on page 5‑26 and page 10‑68, When It Is Time for
Tire Messages on page 5‑49. New Tires on page 10‑69, and
The low tire pressure warning light Tires on page 10‑54.
may come on in cool weather when Notice: Tire sealant materials are
When a low tire pressure condition the vehicle is first started, and then not all the same. A non-approved
is detected, the TPMS illuminates turn off as the vehicle is driven. tire sealant could damage the
the low tire pressure warning light, This could be an early indicator that TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
located in the instrument cluster. the air pressure is getting low and damage caused by using an
If the warning light comes on, needs to be inflated to the proper incorrect tire sealant is not
stop as soon as possible and inflate pressure. covered by the vehicle
the tires to the recommended warranty. Always use only the


Vehicle Care 10-67

GM-approved tire sealant
. One or more TPMS sensors TPMS Sensor Matching
available through your dealer or are missing or damaged. The Process
included in the vehicle. malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the Each TPMS sensor has a unique
TPMS Malfunction Light and TPMS sensors are installed and identification code. The identification
Message the sensor matching process code needs to be matched to a new
is performed successfully. tire/wheel position after replacing
The TPMS will not function properly one or more of the TPMS sensors.
if one or more of the TPMS sensors See your dealer for service.
The malfunction light and the DIC
are missing or inoperable. When the . Replacement tires or wheels do message should go off at the next
system detects a malfunction, the not match the original equipment ignition cycle. The sensors are
low tire warning light flashes for tires or wheels. Tires and wheels matched to the tire/wheel positions,
about one minute and then stays on other than those recommended using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
for the remainder of the ignition could prevent the TPMS from following order: driver side front tire,
cycle. A DIC warning message functioning properly. See Buying passenger side front tire, passenger
also displays. The malfunction light New Tires on page 10‑70. side rear tire, and driver side rear.
and DIC warning message come on . Operating electronic devices or See your dealer for service.
at each ignition cycle until the being near facilities using radio
problem is corrected. Some of the wave frequencies similar to the
conditions that can cause these to TPMS could cause the TPMS
come on are: sensors to malfunction.
. The TPMS sensor matching If the TPMS is not functioning
process was not done or not properly, it cannot detect or signal a
completed successfully. low tire condition. See your dealer
The malfunction light and the for service if the TPMS malfunction
DIC message should go off after light and DIC message come on
successfully completing the and stays on.
sensor matching process.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Tire Inspection Tire Rotation indicating the proper direction of
rotation or will have“left” or“right”
We recommend that the tires, If the vehicle has non-directional molded on the sidewall.
including the spare tire, if the tires, they should be rotated
vehicle has one, be inspected every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Different tire sizes should not be
for signs of wear or damage at See Maintenance Schedule on rotated front to rear.
least once a month. page 11‑3.
Replace the tire if: Tires are rotated to achieve
. The indicators at three or uniform wear for all tires.
more places around the tire The first rotation is the most
can be seen. important.
. There is cord or fabric Any time unusual wear is
showing through the tire's noticed, rotate the tires as soon
rubber. as possible and check the
. The tread or sidewall is wheel alignment. Also check
for damaged tires or wheels.
cracked, cut, or snagged
See When It Is Time for New
deep enough to show cord or
Tires on page 10‑69 and Wheel Use this rotation pattern if the
fabric.
Replacement on page 10‑74. vehicle has different size tires
. The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split. Directional tires should not be on the front and rear and they
rotated. Each tire and wheel are non-directional.
. The tire has a puncture, cut, should be used only in the
or other damage that cannot position it is in. Directional tires
be repaired well because of will have an arrow on the tire
the size or location of the
damage.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Adjust the front and rear tires When It Is Time for
to the recommended inflation { WARNING New Tires
pressure on the Tire and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on
Loading Information label after Factors such as maintenance,
the parts to which it is fastened, temperatures, driving speeds,
the tires have been rotated. can make wheel nuts become vehicle loading, and road conditions
See Tire Pressure on loose after time. The wheel could affect the wear rate of the tires.
page 10‑62 and Vehicle Load come off and cause an accident.
Limits on page 9‑14. When changing a wheel, remove
Reset the Tire Pressure any rust or dirt from places where
Monitor System. See Tire the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, a cloth or a
Pressure Monitor Operation on
paper towel can be used;
page 10‑66.
however, use a scraper or wire
Check that all wheel nuts are brush later to remove all rust
properly tightened. See “Wheel or dirt.
Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on Lightly coat the center of the
page 12‑2. wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or Treadwear indicators are one way
tire rotation to prevent corrosion to tell when it is time for new tires.
or rust build-up. Do not get Treadwear indicators appear when
grease on the flat wheel the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
mounting surface or on the or less of tread remaining. See Tire
wheel nuts or bolts. Inspection on page 10‑68 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑68 for more
information.


10-70 Vehicle Care

The rubber in tires ages over time. Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling,
This also applies for the spare tire, cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire pressure
if the vehicle has one, even if it is may result in vibrations while monitoring performance. GM's TPC
never used. Multiple conditions driving. When storing a vehicle for Spec number is molded onto the
including temperatures, loading at least a month, remove the tires tire's sidewall near the tire size.
conditions, and inflation pressure or raise the vehicle to reduce the If the tires have an all‐season tread
maintenance affect how fast aging weight from the tires. design, the TPC Spec number will
takes place. Tires will typically be followed by MS for mud and
need to be replaced due to wear Buying New Tires snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
before they may need to be page 10‑58, for additional
replaced due to age. Consult the tire GM has developed and matched information.
manufacturer for more information specific tires for the vehicle.
The original equipment tires GM recommends replacing all the
on when tires should be replaced. tires at the same time. Uniform
installed were designed to meet
Vehicle Storage General Motors Tire Performance tread depth on all tires will help to
Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) maintain the performance of the
Tires age when stored normally vehicle. Braking and handling
mounted on a parked vehicle. system rating. When replacement
tires are needed, GM strongly performance may be adversely
Park a vehicle that will be stored for affected if all the tires are not
recommends buying tires with the
at least a month in a cool, dry, clean replaced at the same time.
area away from direct sunlight to same TPC Spec rating.
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑68
slow aging. This area should be GM's exclusive TPC Spec system and Tire Rotation on page 10‑68.
free of grease, gasoline, or other considers over a dozen critical
substances that can deteriorate specifications that impact the
rubber. overall performance of the
vehicle, including brake system


Vehicle Care 10-71

If the vehicle tires must be replaced
{ WARNING { WARNING with a tire that does not have a TPC
Spec number, make sure they are
Tires could explode during Mixing tires of different sizes the same size, load range, speed
improper service. Attempting (other than those originally rating, and construction (radial) as
to mount or dismount a tire installed on the vehicle), brands, the original tires.
could cause injury or death. or types may cause loss of
control of the vehicle, resulting in Vehicles that have a tire pressure
Only your dealer or authorized monitoring system could give an
tire service center should a crash or other vehicle damage.
inaccurate low‐pressure warning
mount or dismount the tires. Use the correct size, brand, and
if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are
type of tire on all four wheels.
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Winter tires with the same speed Operation on page 10‑66.
rating as the original equipment tires The Tire and Loading Information
may not be available for H, V, W, Y { WARNING label indicates the original
and ZR speed rated tires. Never equipment tires on the vehicle.
exceed the snow tire's maximum Using bias-ply tires on the See Vehicle Load Limits on
speed capability when using snow vehicle may cause the wheel page 9‑14, for the label location
tires with a lower speed rating. rim flanges to develop cracks and more information about the
after many miles of driving. Tire and Loading Information label.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires and Uniform Tire Quality
Wheels
{ WARNING Grading
If different sized wheels are used,
If wheels or tires are installed that Quality grades can be found
are a different size than the original there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety
where applicable on the tire
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle sidewall between tread shoulder
performance, including its braking, if tires not recommended for
those wheels are selected. and maximum section width.
ride and handling characteristics,
This increases the chance of a For example:
stability, and resistance to rollover
may be affected. If the vehicle has crash and serious injury. Only use Treadwear 200 Traction AA
electronic systems such as antilock GM specific wheel and tire Temperature A
brakes, rollover airbags, traction systems developed for the
control, and electronic stability vehicle, and have them properly The following information relates
control, the performance of these installed by a GM certified to the system developed by the
systems can also be affected. technician. United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
See Buying New Tires on (NHTSA), which grades tires
page 10‑70 and Accessories and by treadwear, traction, and
Modifications on page 10‑3 for temperature performance.
additional information. This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.


Vehicle Care 10-73

The grades are molded on the Treadwear Traction – AA, A, B, C
sidewalls of most passenger car The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality comparative rating based on the highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
Grading (UTQG) system wear rate of the tire when tested and C. Those grades represent
does not apply to deep tread, under controlled conditions on the tire's ability to stop on wet
winter-type snow tires, a specified government test pavement as measured under
space-saver, or temporary use course. For example, a tire controlled conditions on
spare tires, tires with nominal graded 150 would wear one and specified government test
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches a half (1½) times as well on the surfaces of asphalt and
(25 to 30 cm), or to some government course as a tire concrete. A tire marked C may
limited-production tires. graded 100. The relative have poor traction performance.
While the tires available on performance of tires depends Warning: The traction grade
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of assigned to this tire is based
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may on straight-ahead braking
respect to these grades, they depart significantly from the traction tests, and does not
must also conform to federal norm due to variations in include acceleration, cornering,
safety requirements and driving habits, service practices hydroplaning, or peak traction
additional General Motors Tire and differences in road characteristics.
Performance Criteria (TPC) characteristics and climate.
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Temperature – A, B, C performance on the laboratory basis. However, check the
test wheel than the minimum alignment if there is unusual tire
The temperature grades are A wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
(the highest), B, and C, required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire one side or the other. If the vehicle
representing the tire's resistance vibrates when driving on a smooth
to the generation of heat and its is established for a tire that is
road, the tires and wheels might
ability to dissipate heat when properly inflated and not need to be rebalanced. See your
tested under controlled overloaded. Excessive speed, dealer for proper diagnosis.
conditions on a specified indoor underinflation, or excessive
laboratory test wheel. Sustained loading, either separately or in Wheel Replacement
high temperature can cause combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure. Replace any wheel that is bent,
the material of the tire to cracked, or badly rusted or
degenerate and reduce tire life, corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
and excessive temperature can Wheel Alignment and Tire loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
lead to sudden tire failure. Balance wheel nuts should be replaced.
The grade C corresponds to a The tires and wheels were aligned If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
level of performance which all and balanced at the factory to Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
passenger car tires must meet provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to these conditions exist.
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B wheel alignment and tire balancing Your dealer will know the kind of
and A represent higher levels of will not be necessary on a regular wheel that is needed.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity, { WARNING { WARNING
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one Replacing a wheel with a used Rust or dirt on a wheel,
it replaces. one is dangerous. How it has or on the parts to which it is
been used or how far it has been fastened, can make wheel
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, driven may be unknown. It could
or wheel nuts with new GM original
nuts become loose after a
fail suddenly and cause a crash. time. The wheel could come
equipment parts. When replacing wheels, use a off and cause a crash.
new GM original equipment When changing a wheel,
{ WARNING wheel. remove any rust or dirt from
Using the wrong replacement places where the wheel
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Notice: The wrong wheel can attaches to the vehicle. In an
nuts can be dangerous. It could also cause problems with emergency, a cloth or a paper
affect the braking and handling of bearing life, brake cooling, towel can be used, however,
the vehicle. Tires can lose air, speedometer or odometer use a scraper or wire brush to
and cause loss of control, causing calibration, headlamp aim,
remove all rust or dirt.
a crash. Always use the correct bumper height, vehicle ground
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
nuts for replacement.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts Notice: Improperly tightened Tire Chains
wheel nuts can lead to brake
{ WARNING pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, { WARNING
Never use oil or grease on studs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in Do not use tire chains. There is
or the threads of the wheel nuts. the proper sequence and to the
not enough clearance. Tire chains
The wheel nuts might come loose proper torque specification.
used on a vehicle without the
and the wheel could fall off, proper amount of clearance can
causing a crash. cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
{ WARNING tire chains could cause loss of
control and a crash. Use another
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly type of traction device only if its
tightened wheel nuts can cause manufacturer recommends it for
the wheel to become loose and the vehicle's tire size combination
even come off. This could lead and road conditions. Follow that
to a crash. Be sure to use the manufacturer's instructions.
correct wheel nuts. If you have to To avoid vehicle damage, drive
replace them, be sure to get slowly and readjust or remove the
Tighten the wheel lug nuts firmly in
new GM original equipment a crisscross sequence. traction device if it contacts the
wheel nuts. vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install
them on the rear tires.


Vehicle Care 10-77

If a Tire Goes Flat straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout to a stop, well off the road,
while driving, especially if the tires if possible. Special tools and procedures are
are maintained properly. If air goes required to service a run-flat tire.
out of a tire, it is much more likely The vehicle has no spare tire, no If these special tools and
to leak out slowly. See Tires on tire changing equipment, and no procedures are not used, injury
page 10‑54 for additional place to store a tire. or vehicle damage may occur.
information. But if there ever is a The vehicle, when new, had run-flat Always be sure the proper tools
blowout, here are a few tips about tires. This type of tire can operate and procedures, as described in
what to expect and what to do: effectively with no air pressure so the service manual, are used.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire there is no need to stop on the side
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle of the road to change a flat tire.
If driving on a deflated run-flat tire To order a service manual, see
toward that side. Take your foot off Service Publications Ordering
the accelerator pedal and grip the for 40 km (25 mi) or less and at
speeds of 90 km/h (55 mph) or less, Information on page 13‑18.
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then there is a good chance the tire can
gently brake to a stop, well off the be repaired. The Tire Pressure
road, if possible. Monitor System (TPMS) will show
if a tire has lost pressure. See
A rear blowout, particularly on a Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑56 and
curve, acts much like a skid and Tire Pressure Monitor System on
may require the same correction as page 10‑64.
used in a skid. Stop pressing the
accelerator pedal and steer to


10-78 Vehicle Care

Jump Starting Notice: If you try to start your
vehicle by pushing or pulling it,
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
For more information about the you could damage your vehicle. brake firmly on both vehicles
vehicle battery, see Battery on Do not push or pull your vehicle involved in the jump start
page 10‑40. to start it; instead, use the jump procedure. Put an automatic
If your battery has run down, you starting procedure in this manual transmission in P (Park) or a
may want to use another vehicle to start your vehicle when the manual transmission in Neutral
and some jumper cables to start battery has run down. before setting the parking
your vehicle. Be sure to use the 1. Check the other vehicle. It must brakes.
following steps to do it safely. have a 12-volt battery with a Notice: If any accessories are left
negative ground system. on or plugged in during the jump
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would
has a 12-volt system with a
Batteries can hurt you. They can negative ground for jump not be covered by the vehicle
be dangerous because: starting. If the other vehicle does warranty. Whenever possible,
not have a 12-volt system with a turn off or unplug all accessories
. They contain acid that can on either vehicle when jump
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged. starting the vehicle.
. They contain gas that can 3. Turn off the ignition on both
2. Get the vehicles close enough
explode or ignite. vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
so the jumper cables can reach,
. They contain enough but be sure the vehicles are not accessories plugged into the
electricity to burn you. touching each other. If they are, cigarette lighter or the accessory
it could cause a ground power outlet. Turn off the radio
If you do not follow these steps and all lamps that are not
connection you do not want.
exactly, some or all of these needed. This will avoid sparks
You would not be able to start
things can hurt you. and help save both batteries.
your vehicle, and the bad
grounding could damage the And it could save the radio!
electrical systems.


Vehicle Care 10-79

4. Open the hoods and locate the The remote positive (+)
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal (A) can be accessed by { WARNING
terminal locations on each opening the cover of the engine
vehicle. compartment fuse block. Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
The remote negative (−) explode. People have been hurt
terminal (B) is located doing this, and some have been
underneath the engine cover, blinded. Use a flashlight if you
below the engine oil fill cap. need more light.
See Engine Compartment
Be sure the battery has enough
Overview on page 10‑8 for
water. You do not need to add
the location of the engine
compartment fuse block and water to the battery installed in
engine oil fill cap. your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
You will not need to access amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
the battery for jump starting. add water to take care of that
6.2 L LS3 shown, 7.0L LS7 and The remote terminals are for first. If you do not, explosive gas
that purpose.
6.2L LS9 similar could be present.
Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) terminal (A) and a
{ WARNING Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
remote negative (−) terminal (B), An electric fan can start up even you. If you accidentally get it in
as shown in the illustration, when the engine is not running your eyes or on your skin, flush
which should be used to jump and can injure you. Keep hands, the place with water and get
start your vehicle. clothing and tools away from any medical help immediately.
underhood electric fan.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) to Do not let the other end touch
{ WARNING negative (−) or you will get a anything until the next step.
short that would damage the The other end of the negative (−)
Fans or other moving engine battery and maybe other parts cable does not go to the dead
parts can injure you badly. Keep too. And do not connect the battery. It goes to a heavy,
your hands away from moving negative (−) cable to the unpainted metal engine part or
parts once the engine is running. negative (−) terminal on the to a remote negative (−) terminal
dead battery because this can on the vehicle with the dead
5. Check that the jumper cables cause sparks. battery.
do not have loose or missing 6. Connect the red positive (+) 9. Connect the other end of the
insulation. If they do, you could cable to the positive (+) terminal negative (−) cable at least 45 cm
get a shock. The vehicles could of the dead battery. Use a (18 inches) away from the dead
be damaged too. remote positive (+) terminal if the battery, but not near engine
Before you connect the cables, vehicle has one. parts that move. The electrical
here are some basic things you 7. Do not let the other end touch connection is just as good there,
should know. Positive (+) will go metal. Connect it to the and the chance of sparks getting
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal of the back to the battery is much less.
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle good battery. Use a remote Your vehicle has a remote
has one. Negative (−) will go to a positive (+) terminal if the vehicle negative (−) terminal for this
heavy, unpainted metal engine has one. purpose.
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.


Vehicle Care 10-81

10. Now start the vehicle with the To disconnect the jumper cables
good battery and run the from both vehicles, do the following:
engine for a while. 1. Disconnect the black
11. Try to start the vehicle that had negative (−) cable from the
the dead battery. If it will not vehicle that had the dead
start after a few tries, it battery.
probably needs service. 2. Disconnect the black
Notice: If the jumper cables are negative (−) cable from the
connected or removed in the vehicle with the good battery.
wrong order, electrical shorting 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
may occur and damage the cable from the vehicle with the
vehicle. The repairs would not be good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle.
order, making sure that the Terminal 5. Return the engine fuse block
cables do not touch each other or B. Good Battery or Remote cover to its original position.
other metal. Positive (+) and Negative (−) 6. You may also need to initialize
Terminals the power windows. See “Power
C. Dead Battery or Remote Window Initialize” under Power
Positive (+) Terminal Windows on page 2‑18 for more
information.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Towing Recreational Vehicle Appearance Care
Towing
Towing the Vehicle Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy Exterior Care
Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle may cause Washing the Vehicle
disabled vehicle should be damage because of reduced
towed with all four wheels off ground clearance. Always put the To preserve the vehicle's finish,
the ground. Care must be taken vehicle on a flatbed truck or wash it often and out of direct
with vehicles that have low trailer. sunlight.
ground clearance and/or special The vehicle was neither designed Notice: Do not use petroleum
equipment. Always flatbed on a nor intended to be towed with any based, acidic, or abrasive
car carrier. of its wheels on the ground. If the cleaning agents as they can
Consult your dealer or a vehicle must be towed, see Towing damage the vehicle's paint,
professional towing service if the the Vehicle on page 10‑82. metal, or plastic parts. If damage
disabled vehicle must be towed. occurs, it would not be covered
See Roadside Assistance Program by the vehicle's warranty.
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 Approved cleaning products
or Roadside Assistance Program can be obtained from your
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Notice: Avoid using high Finish Care Notice: Machine compounding
pressure washes closer than or aggressive polishing on a
Application of aftermarket clearcoat
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
sealant/wax materials is not
vehicle. Use of power washers may damage it. Use only
recommended. If painted surfaces
exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) non-abrasive waxes and polishes
are damaged, see your dealer to
can result in damage or removal that are made for a basecoat/
have the damage assessed and
of paint and decals. clearcoat paint finish on the
repaired. Foreign materials such as
Rinse the vehicle well, before vehicle.
calcium chloride and other salts, ice
washing and after, to remove all melting agents, road oil and tar, tree To keep the paint finish looking
cleaning agents completely. If they sap, bird droppings, chemicals from new, keep the vehicle garaged or
are allowed to dry on the surface, industrial chimneys, etc., can covered whenever possible.
they could stain. damage the vehicle's finish if they
Protecting Exterior Bright
Dry the finish with a soft, clean remain on painted surfaces. Wash Metal Parts
chamois or an all-cotton towel to the vehicle as soon as possible.
avoid surface scratches and water If necessary, use non-abrasive Regularly clean bright metal parts
cleaners that are marked safe for with water or chrome polish on
spotting.
painted surfaces to remove foreign chrome or stainless steel trim,
matter. if necessary.
Occasional hand waxing or mild For aluminum, never use auto or
polishing should be done to chrome polish, steam, or caustic
remove residue from the paint finish. soap to clean. A coating of
See your dealer for approved wax, rubbed to high polish, is
cleaning products. recommended for all bright
metal parts.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Convertible Top Care ZR1 Carbon Fiber Panels Windshield and Wiper Blades
Frequently hand wash convertible Carbon fiber panels can be washed Clean the outside of the windshield
tops with mild car wash soap. and waxed like any other panels. with glass cleaner.
Never use a stiff brush, steam, Use a clear or black pigmented wax Clean rubber blades using lint-free
bleach, or aggressive cleaners. on the inner hood carbon fiber cloth or paper towel soaked with
If necessary, a soft brush can be panel. windshield washer fluid or a mild
used to remove dirt. When finished detergent. Wash the windshield
cleaning, thoroughly rinse the fabric. ZR1 Hood Window thoroughly when cleaning the
Avoid automatic car washes with blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
The hood window on the ZR1 can
overhead brushes or very high and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
be cleaned in the same manner as
pressure sprays as they can cause treatments may cause wiper
the headlamp lenses. See "Cleaning
damage and leaking. streaking.
Exterior Lamps/Lenses" for more
Only lower the top when it is information. Replace the wiper blades if they
completly dry and avoid leaving the are worn or damaged. Damage can
top lowered for extended periods of Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses and Emblems be caused by extreme dusty
time to prevent excessive interior conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
weathering. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a snow and ice.
Avoid leaving large amounts of soft cloth, and a car washing soap
snow on the top for extended to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Weatherstrips
periords of time as damage may Follow instructions under "Washing Apply silicone grease on
also occur. the Vehicle" later in this section. weatherstrips to make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Tires Notice: Chrome wheels and other Steering, Suspension, and
chrome trim may be damaged if Chassis Components
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
the vehicle is not washed after
clean the tires. Visually inspect front and rear
driving on roads that have been
Notice: Using petroleum-based sprayed with magnesium, suspension and steering system for
tire dressing products on the calcium, or sodium chloride. damaged, loose, or missing parts or
vehicle may damage the paint These chlorides are used on signs of wear. Inspect the power
finish and/or tires. When applying roads for conditions such as steering for proper hook-up, binding,
a tire dressing, always wipe off ice and dust. Always wash the leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
any overspray from all painted chrome with soap and water after check constant velocity joints,
surfaces on the vehicle. exposure. rubber boots, and axle seals for
leaks.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum Notice: To avoid surface
or Chrome damage, do not use strong soaps, Body Component Lubrication
chemicals, abrasive polishes, Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
soap and water to clean the wheels. hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and
that contain acid on aluminum or steel fuel door hinge unless the
After rinsing thoroughly with clean chrome-plated wheels. Use only
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. components are plastic. Applying
approved cleaners. Also, never silicone grease on weatherstrips
A wax may then be applied. drive a vehicle with aluminum or with a clean cloth will make them
Keep the wheels clean using a soft, chrome-plated wheels through an last longer, seal better, and not stick
clean cloth with mild soap and automatic car wash that uses or squeak.
water. Rinse with clean water. silicone carbide tire cleaning
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a brushes. Damage could occur
soft, clean towel. A wax may then and the repairs would not be
be applied. covered by the vehicle warranty.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Underbody Maintenance material to parts repaired or Interior Care
replaced to restore corrosion
Use plain water to flush dirt and To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
protection.
debris from the vehicle's underbody. regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Your dealer or an underbody car Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils.
washing system can do this. If not parts will provide the corrosion Note that newspapers or dark
removed, rust and corrosion can protection while maintaining the garments that can transfer color
develop. vehicle warranty. to home furnishings can also
Fiberglass Springs Finish Damage permanently transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
(Composite Springs) Quickly repair minor chips and
scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove
Notice: Do not use acidic or dust from knobs and crevices on the
corrosive cleaning products, available from your dealer to avoid
corrosion. Larger areas of finish instrument cluster. Using a mild
engine degreasers, or aluminum soap solution, immediately remove
cleaning agents on fiberglass damage can be corrected in your
dealer's body and paint shop. hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
springs as it may cause damage. repellant from all interior surfaces or
The repairs would not be Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result.
covered by the vehicle's warranty.
Use only approved cleaners. Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for
and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
Sheet Metal Damage causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the
If the vehicle is damaged and discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent
requires sheet metal repair or dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. To prevent
replacement, make sure the body surface. overspray, apply all cleaners
repair shop applies anti-corrosion directly to the cleaning cloth.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Cleaners should be removed
. Do not use laundry detergents Notice: To prevent scratching,
quickly. Never allow cleaners to or dishwashing soaps with never use abrasive cleaners on
remain on the surface being degreasers. For liquid cleaners, automotive glass. Abrasive
cleaned for extended periods use approximately 20 drops cleaners or aggressive cleaning
of time. per 3.78 L (1 gal) of water. may damage the rear window
A concentrated soap solution defogger.
Cleaners may contain solvents that will leave a residue that creates
can become concentrated in the streaks and attracts dirt. Do not Fabric/Carpet
interior. Before using cleaners, read use solutions that contain strong
and adhere to all safety instructions Start by vacuuming the surface
or caustic soap. using a soft brush attachment. If a
on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate
. Do not heavily saturate the rotating brush attachment is being
ventilation by opening the doors upholstery when cleaning. used during vacuuming, only use it
and windows. on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
. Do not use solvents or cleaners
gently remove as much of the soil
To prevent damage, do not clean containing solvents.
as possible using one of the
the interior using the following Interior Glass following techniques:
cleaners or techniques:
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric . Gently blot liquids with a paper
. Never use a razor or any other dampened with water. Wipe droplets towel. Continue blotting until no
sharp object to remove a soil left behind with a clean dry cloth. more soil can be removed.
from any interior surface. Commercial glass cleaners may be . For solid soils, remove as much
. Never use a brush with stiff used, if necessary, after cleaning as possible prior to vacuuming.
bristles. the interior glass with plain water.
. Never rub any surface
aggressively or with excessive
pressure.


10-88 Vehicle Care

To clean: If the soil is not completely from these surfaces after
1. Saturate a clean lint-free removed, it may be necessary cleaning and allow them to dry
colorfast cloth with water or club to use a commercial upholstery naturally. Never use heat, steam,
soda. Microfiber cloth is cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small spot lifters or spot removers.
recommended to prevent lint hidden area for colorfastness Do not use cleaners that contain
transfer to the fabric or carpet. before using a commercial silicone or wax-based products.
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Cleaners containing these
2. Remove excess moisture by If ring formation occurs, clean the solvents can permanently
gently wringing until water does entire fabric or carpet. change the appearance and feel
not drip from the cleaning cloth. of leather or soft trim and are not
Following the cleaning process, a
3. Start on the outside edge of the paper towel can be used to blot recommended.
soil and gently rub toward the excess moisture. Do not use cleaners that increase
center. Rotate the cleaning cloth gloss, especially on the instrument
to a clean area frequently to Instrument Panel, Leather, panel. Reflected glare can decrease
prevent forcing the soil in to the Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces visibility through the windshield
fabric. Use a soft microfiber cloth under certain conditions.
4. Continue gently rubbing the dampened with water to remove Notice: Use of air fresheners may
soiled area until there is no dust and loose dirt. For a more cause permanent damage to
longer any color transfer from thorough cleaning, use a soft plastics and painted surfaces.
the soil to the cleaning cloth. microfiber cloth dampened with a If an air freshener comes in
mild soap solution. contact with any plastic or
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap Notice: Soaking or saturating painted surface in the vehicle,
solution followed by only club leather, especially perforated blot immediately and clean with a
soda or plain water. leather, as well as other interior soft cloth dampened with a mild
surfaces, may cause permanent soap solution. Damage caused
damage. Wipe excess moisture by air fresheners would not be


Vehicle Care 10-89

Cargo Cover and Floor Mats purchased. Non-GM floor mats
Convenience Net may not fit properly and may
interefere with the accelerator or
Wash with warm water and mild { WARNING brake pedal. Always check that
detergent, rinse with cold water and the floor mats do not interfere
tumble dry on low. Do not use If a floor mat is the wrong size or
with the pedals.
chlorine bleach. is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the pedals. . Use the floor mat with the
Care of Safety Belts Interference with the pedals can correct side up. Do not turn
Keep belts clean and dry. cause unintended acceleration it over.
and/or increased stopping . Do not place anything on top of
{ WARNING distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. mat does not interfere with the
the driver side.
It may severely weaken them. pedals.
In a crash, they might not be able . Do not place one floor mat on
to provide adequate protection. top of another.
Use the following guidelines for
Clean safety belts only with mild proper floor mat usage. The driver side floor mat is held in
soap and lukewarm water. place by two hook-type retainers
. The original equipment floor and the passenger side is held in
mats were designed for your place by one.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be


10-90 Vehicle Care

Installing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to remove it from the hook
retainers.
2. Reinstall by lining up the
openings in the floor mat over
the hook retainers and push
down into position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the
importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 help protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Notice: Damage caused by
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application improper maintenance can lead to
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 costly repairs and may not be
Your dealer has trained technicians covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additional Maintenance who can perform required Maintenance intervals, checks,
and Care maintenance using genuine inspections, recommended fluids,
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have and lubricants are important to
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up‐to‐date tools and equipment keep the vehicle in good working
for fast and accurate diagnostics. condition.
Recommended Fluids, Many dealers have extended
Lubricants, and Parts The Required Services are the
evening and Saturday hours,
Recommended Fluids and responsibility of the vehicle owner.
courtesy transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 It is recommended to have your
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement dealer perform these services
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.

Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Proper vehicle maintenance helps to The Additional Required
keep the vehicle in good working Services ‐ Severe are for { WARNING
condition, improves fuel economy, vehicles that are:
and reduces vehicle emissions. Performing maintenance work
. Mainly driven in heavy city can be dangerous and can
Because of the way people use traffic in hot weather. cause serious injury. Perform
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. . Mainly driven in hilly or maintenance work only if the
There may need to be more mountainous terrain. required information, proper tools,
frequent checks and services. and equipment are available.
The Additional Required . Frequently towing a trailer.
If they are not, see your dealer to
Services ‐ Normal are for . Used for high speed or have a trained technician do the
vehicles that: competitive driving. work. See Doing Your Own
. Carry passengers and cargo . Used for taxi, police, or delivery Service Work on page 10‑7.
within recommended limits on service.
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Refer to the information in the
on page 9‑14. Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
. Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
. Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑48.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.



Maintenance Engine Oil Change Required Services Every
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL 12 000 km/7,500 mi
Schedule SOON message displays, have the . Check engine oil level and oil
Owner Checks and Services engine oil and filter changed within life percentage. If needed,
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven change engine oil and filter, and
At Each Fuel Stop under the best conditions, the reset oil life system. See Engine
. Check the engine oil level. engine oil life system might not Oil on page 10‑14 and Engine
See Engine Oil on page 10‑14. indicate the need for vehicle service Oil Life System on page 10‑19.
for more than a year. The engine oil .
Once a Month Check engine coolant level.
and filter must be changed at least
See Engine Coolant on
. Check the tire inflation once a year and the oil life system
page 10‑26.
pressures. See Tire Pressure on must be reset. Your trained dealer
page 10‑62. technician can perform this work. . Check windshield washer fluid
If the engine oil life system is reset level. See Washer Fluid on
. Inspect the tires for wear. accidentally, service the vehicle page 10‑34.
See Tire Inspection on within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the
page 10‑68. . Visually inspect windshield
last service. Reset the oil life wiper blades for wear, cracking,
. Check the windshield washer system when the oil is changed. or contamination. See Exterior
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on See Engine Oil Life System on Care on page 10‑82. Replace
page 10‑34. page 10‑19. worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10‑43.


. Check tire inflation pressures. . Check restraint system . Check parking brake and
See Tire Pressure on components. See Safety automatic transmission park
page 10‑62. System Check on page 3‑14. mechanism. See Park Brake and
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire . Visually inspect fuel system for P (Park) Mechanism Check on
Inspection on page 10‑68. damage or leaks. page 10‑42.
. Visually check for fluid leaks. . Visually inspect exhaust system
. Check accelerator pedal for
and nearby heat shields for damage, high effort, or binding.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace if needed.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on loose or damaged parts.
page 10‑22. . Lubricate body components.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
See Exterior Care on signs of wear, cracks, or other
. Inspect brake system. damage. Check the hold open
page 10‑82.
. Visually inspect steering, ability of the strut. See your
suspension, and chassis
. Check starter switch. See Starter dealer if service is required.
components for damaged, loose, Switch Check on page 10‑41.
or missing parts or signs of . Check automatic transmission
wear. See Exterior Care on shift lock control function.
page 10‑82. See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 10‑42.



Footnotes — Maintenance d) Or every five years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System
Services — Normal (Engine) on page 10‑25 or Cooling
a) Or every two years, whichever System (Intercooler) on page 10‑26.
comes first. More frequent e) Or every 10 years, whichever
replacement may be needed if the comes first. Inspect for fraying,
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy excessive cracking, or damage;
traffic, areas with poor air quality, replace, if needed.
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed
if there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
b) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook‐up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
c) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.



Footnotes — Maintenance Special Application Additional
Schedule Additional Required
Services — Severe Services Maintenance and Care
a) Or every two years, whichever . Vehicles with manual Your vehicle is an important
comes first. transmissions: Every two years investment and caring for it
b) Check all fuel and vapor lines drain, flush, and fill clutch properly may help to avoid future
and hoses for proper hook‐up, hydraulic system. costly repairs. To maintain
routing, and condition. Check that . Severe Commercial Use vehicle performance, additional
the purge valve, if the vehicle has Vehicles Only: Lubricate maintenance services may be
one, works properly. Replace as chassis components every required. It is recommended
needed. 5 000 km/3,000 mi. that your dealer perform these
services — their trained dealer
c) Or every four years, whichever . Have underbody flushing service technicians know your vehicle best.
comes first. performed once a year. Your dealer can also perform a
d) Or every five years, whichever thorough assessment with a
comes first. See Cooling System multi‐point inspection to recommend
(Engine) on page 10‑25 or Cooling when your vehicle may need
System (Intercooler) on page 10‑26. attention. The following list is
intended to explain the services and
e) Or every 10 years, whichever conditions to look for that may
comes first. Inspect for fraying, indicate services are required.
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.



Battery Brakes Hoses
The battery supplies power to Brakes stop the vehicle and are Hoses transport fluids and should
start the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include that there are no cracks or leaks.
. To avoid break‐down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing With a multi‐point inspection, your
start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. dealer can inspect the hoses and
battery with full cranking power. advise if replacement is needed.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment Lamps
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
corrosion‐free. the road.
Fluids
Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
. Signs that the headlamps need
. Belts may need replacing if fluids protect the vehicle’s attention include dimming, failure
they squeak or show signs of systems and components. to light, cracking, or damage.
cracking or splitting. See Recommended Fluids and The brake lamps need to be
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for checked periodically to ensure
. Trained dealer technicians that they light when braking.
can inspect the belts and GM approved fluids.
. With a multi‐point inspection,
recommend replacement when . Engine oil and windshield
necessary. washer fluid levels should be your dealer can check the lamps
checked at every fuel fill. and note any concerns.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.



Shocks and Struts Tires Vehicle Care
Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated, To help keep the vehicle looking
for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining like new, vehicle care products
. Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and are available from your dealer.
steering wheel vibration, can reduce the risk of tire failure. For information on how to clean and
bounce/sway while braking, . Signs that the tires need to be protect the vehicle’s interior and
longer stopping distance, replaced include three or more exterior, see Interior Care on
or uneven tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord page 10‑86 and Exterior Care on
or fabric showing through the page 10‑82.
. As part of the multi‐point
inspection, trained dealer rubber; cracks or cuts in the Wheel Alignment
technicians can visually inspect tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
split in the tire. Wheel alignment is critical for
the shocks and struts for signs ensuring that the tires deliver
of leaking, blown seals, . Trained dealer technicians can optimal wear and performance.
or damage, and can advise inspect and recommend the right
when service is needed. tires. Your dealer can also
. Signs that the alignment may
provide tire/wheel balancing need to be adjusted include
services to ensure smooth pulling, improper vehicle
vehicle operation at all speeds. handling, or unusual tire wear.
Your dealer sells and services . Your dealer has the required
name brand tires. equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.



Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
provide a clear view.
. Signs of wear include streaking,
skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can
check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent,
Engine Oil of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑26.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
ZR1 Only: Intercooler System
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑26.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only GM Part No. 88958860,
Hydraulic Clutch System
in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4 brake fluid.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubrication (Rear Toe‐Link
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Outer Ends with Z06, ZR1,
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
or Z51 Option)
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
Rear Axle (Limited-Slip Differential) DEXRON ® LS Gear Oil. See Rear Axle on page 10‑40.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor,
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
and Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Hood and Door Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 and 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines 15776148 A3077C
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 25940997 A3107C
Engine Oil Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System 12626224 UPF-48R
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12626224 UPF-48R
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12626224 UPF-48R
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15848592 CF139
Spark Plug
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 12621258 41-110
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12571165 41-104
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12571165 41-104
Wiper Blades — 52.5 cm (20.7 in)
Driver Side 12335960 —
Passenger Side 12335961 —



Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading



Odometer
Reading


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).

This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be . Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 11.3 L 11.9 qt
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Cooling System 12.0 L 12.7 qt
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Supercharger
4.9 L 5.2 qt
Intercooler Cooling System
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 11.3 L 11.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6.2L LS3 V8 with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System 9.9 L 10.5 qt


Technical Data 12-3

Capacities
Application
Metric English
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 9.9 L 10.5 qt
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 9.9 L 10.5 qt
Fuel Tank 68.0 L 18.0 gal
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter
6.2 L 6.5 qt
Replacement)
Manual Transmission – Base 3.5 L 3.6 qt
Manual Transmission – Z16 4.0 L 4.2 qt
Manual Transmission – Z06 4.3 L 4.5 qt
Manual Transmission – ZR1 4.3 L 4.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Firing Order
Automatic
6.2L LS3 V8 W 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Manual
6.2L LS9 V8 T Manual 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
7.0L LS7 V8 E Manual 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

Engine Data
Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio
6.2L LS3 V8 without
430 @ 5900 rpm 424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1
option NPP
6.2L LS3 V8 with
436 @ 5900 rpm 428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1
option NPP
6.2L LS9 V8
638 @ 6500 rpm 604 lb ft @ 3800 rpm 6.2L 9.10:1
Supercharged
7.0L LS7 V8 505 @ 6300 rpm 470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm 7.0L 11.00:1


Technical Data 12-5

Engine Drive Belt Routing

6.2L LS9 V8 Engine
6.2L LS3 V8, 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines


12-6 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-18
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-20 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-21 If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21 or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency of your dealership or the general
Appointments Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 manager.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-13


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
Center at 1-800-222-1020. Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto
In Canada, call General Motors dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free
of Canada Customer Care Centre sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at
at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, the following address:
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc.
your inquiry prompt attention. can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
Have the following information Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Suite 800
available to give the Customer to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Assistance representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all
title, or the plate at the top left of dispu

2012 Chevy Corvette Owners Manual

2012 Chevy Corvette Owners Manual

More Related Content

What's hot

Similar to 2012 Chevy Corvette Owners Manual

More from Jerry's Chevrolet

Recently uploaded

2012 Chevy Corvette Owners Manual